Full text of "Graduate catalog"

See other formats

Digitized by tine Internet Arciiive

in 2009 witii funding from

Lyrasis IVIembers and Sloan Foundation

http://www.archive.org/details/graduatecatalog1985indi

Graduate School Catalog
1985-1987

lUP IS ACCREDITED BY THE MIDDLE STATES ASSOCIATION OF
COLLEGES AND SECONDARY SCHOOLS, THE NATIONAL
COUNCIL FOR ACCREDITATION OF TEACHER EDUCATION,
AND, FOR ITS MUSIC CURRICULA, THE NATIONAL ASSOCIA-
TION OF SCHOOLS OF MUSIC. THE UNIVERSITY IS A MEMBER
OF THE COUNCIL OF GRADUATE SCHOOLS IN THE UNITED
STATES AND OF THE NORTHEAST, AND PENNSYLVANIA
ASSOCIATION OF GRADUATE SCHOOLS

lUP IS COMMITTED TO PROVIDING LEADERSHIP IN TAKING
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION TO ATTAIN EQUAL EDUCATIONAL AND
EMPLOYMENT RIGHTS FOR ALL PERSONS, WITHOUT REGARD
TO SEX, HANDICAP, OR OTHER LEGALLY PROTECTED CLAS-
SIFICATION. THIS POLICY IS PLACED IN THIS DOCUMENT IN
ACCORDANCE WITH STATE AND FEDERAL LAWS INCLUDING
TITLE IX OF THE EDUCATIONAL AMENDMENT OF 1972 AND
SECTION 503 AND SECTION 504 OF THE REHABILITATION ACT
OF 1973. THIS POLICY EXTENDS TO DISABLED VETERANS AND
VETERANS OF THE VIETNAM ERA. PLEASE DIRECT EQUAL
OPPORTUNITY INQUIRIES TO: AFFIRMATIVE ACTION OFFICE,
215A JOHN SUTTON HALL, lUP, INDIANA, PA 15705.

lUP RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REPEAL, CHANGE, OR AMEND
THE POLICIES, REGULATIONS, AND COURSES CONTAINED IN
THIS CATALOG AT ANY TIME. TUITION AND FEES ARE ALSO
SUBJECT TO CHANGE.

PRESS DATE: DECEMBER, 1984

Indiana University
of Pennsylvania
1985-1987

The Graduate School

Catalog

Indiana, Pennsylvania 15705

Telephone: (412) 357-2222

Table of Contents — 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS

The Graduate School Calendar 5

Tuition and Fees °

University Refund Policy ^

lUP

Location

Library ^^

Computer Center ''2

Testing Services ''2

Career Services ''3

The Graduate School at lUP 15

General Information "15

Admission

Programming and Registration 19

Specialist or Supervisory Certificate Programs 19

Financial Aid 22

Insurance 22

Procedures and Regulations 22

Academic Credits and Student Status 24

Workshops and Other Special Credits 24

Residency 25

Degree Candidacy 25

Grading System 26

Course Abbreviation Key 27

Doctoral Degree Programs 30

Master's Degree Programs 33

Master of Education Curriculum Requirements 37

Certification Programs 37

General Service Courses

Research 39

Statistics

.40

Other 40

Supervised Laboratory Experience (Teaching) 41

Graduate Programs and Courses

Adult and Community Education (See Counselor Education)

Anthropology 43

Art and Art Education 44

Art Therapy ^9

Biology 51

Business 57

Business Administration 57

Chemistry 59

Communications Media 75

Computer Science ^0

Consumer Services 32

Counselor Education 34

Criminology 91

4 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Economics 93

Educational Psychology 96

Elementary Education 99

English 105

Food and Nutrition 110

Foreign Languages 112

Foundations of Education 118

Geography and Regional Planning 119

Geoscience 123

Health and Physical Education 125

History 128

Home Economics Education 132

Industrial and Labor Relations 135

Mathematics 1 38

Mathematics for Elementary School Teachers 141

Music and Music Education 145

Nursing 150

Philosophy and Religious Studies 152

Physics 153

Political Science 158

Professional Growth 163

Psychology 163

Reading 171

Safety Sciences 175

Science for Elementary School Teachers 179

Social Science 181

Sociology 182

Special Education and Clinical Services 184

Sport Sciences (See Health and Physical Education)
Student Personnel Services (See Counselor Education)

Theater 1 91

Directory 193

Trustees 1 93

Administrative Officers 193

Index 1 94

Telephone Numbers 197

Campus Map Inside Back Cover

Application Requests 16

The Graduate School Calendar — 5

THE GRADUATE
SCHOOL CALENDAR

SUMMER SESSION 1985

April 1 Students who plan to take graduate work during the 1985

Summer Session must have an application for graduate
study approved on or before this date.

June 1 Final date to submit thesis proposal to the College Dean

in order to complete requirements for the degree in Summer
1985.

June 1 Prospective August 1985 graduates must have filed an

application for graduation.

July 1 Final date for presentation of completed thesis to major pro-

fessor in order to complete requirements for the degree in
the Summer 1985.

August 1 Completed and corrected thesis must be on file with the

College Dean for Summer 1985 degree.

FALL SEMESTER 1985

July 1 Students who plan to take graduate work during the fall

semester must have an application for graduate study ap-
proved on or before this date.

October 1 Final date to submit thesis proposal to the College Dean

in order to complete requirements for the degree in the Fall
Semester 1985.

October 1 Prospective December 1985 graduates must have filed an

application for graduation.

November 1 Final date for presentation of completed thesis to major
professor in order to complete requirements for the degree
in the Fall Semester 1985.

December 1 Completed and corrected thesis to be filed with the College
Dean for degree in Fall Semester 1985.

6 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

SPRING SEMESTER 1986

November 1 Students who plan to take graduate work during the Spring
Semester must have an application for graduate study ap-
proved on or before this date.

March 1 Final date to submit thesis proposal to the College Dean

in order to complete requirements for the degree in the
Spring Semester 1986.

March 1 Prospective May 1986 graduates must have filed an applica-

tion for graduation.

April 1 Final date for presentation of completed thesis to major

professor in order to complete requirements for the degree

in the Spring 1986.

May 1 Completed and corrected thesis must be on file with the

College Dean for degree in Spring Semester.

SUMMER SESSION 1986

Dates for 1 986 Summer Session have not been set as of this printing. Please
contact The Graduate School for further information.

April 1 Students who plan to take graduate work during 1986

Summer Session must have an application for graduate
study approved on or before this date.

June 1 Final date to submit thesis proposal to the College Dean

in order to complete requirements for the degree in Summer
1986.

June 1 Prospective August 1986 graduates must have filed an

application for graduation.

July 1 Final date for presentation of completed thesis to major

professor in order to complete requirements for the degree
in the Summer 1986.

August 1 Completed and corrected thesis must be on file with the

College Dean for Summer 1986 degree.

FALL SEMESTER 1986

July 1 Students who plan to take graduate work during the Fall

Semester must have an application for graduate study ap-
proved on or before this date.

October 1 Final date to submit thesis proposal to the College Dean

in order to complete requirements for the degree in the Fall
Semester 1986.

The Graduate School Calendar — 7

October 1 Prospective December 1986 graduates must have filed an

application for graduation.

November 1 Final date for presentation of completed thesis to major
professor in order to complete requirements for the degree
in the Fall Semester 1986.

December 1 Completed and corrected thesis to be filed with the College
Dean for degree in Fall Semester 1986.

SPRING SEMESTER 1987

November 1 Students who plan to take graduate work during the Spring
Semester must have an application for graduate study ap-
proved on or before this date.

March 1 Final date to submit thesis proposal to the College Dean

In order to complete requirements for the degree in the
Spring Semester 1987.

March 1 Prospective May 1 987 graduates must have filed an applica-

tion for graduation.

April 1 Final date for presentation of completed thesis to major

professor in order to complete requirements for the degree
in the Spring 1987.

May 1 Completed and corrected thesis must be on file with the

College Dean for degree in Spring Semester.

SUMMER SESSION 1987

Dates for 1 987 Summer Session have not been set as of this printing. Please
contact The Graduate School for further information.

April 1 Students who plan to take graduate work during 1987

Summer Sessions must have an application for graduate
study approved on or before this date.

June 1 Final date to submit thesis proposal to the College Dean

in order to complete requirements for the degree in Summer
1987.

June 1 Prospective August 1987 graduates must have filed an

application for graduation.

July 1 Final date for presentation of completed thesis to major

professor in order to complete requirements for the degree
in the Summer 1987.

August 1 Completed and corrected thesis must be on file with the

College Dean for Summer 1987 degree.

8— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

TUITION AND FEES

REGULAR SEMESTER TUITION (Fall & Spring)
Full-Time Tuition for Pennsylvania Residents

$785 for 9-15 semester hours (s.h.), then $87 for each additional s.h.
Part-Time Tuition for Pennsylvania Residents

$87 per semester hour (s.h.) for fewer than 9 s.h.
Full-Time Tuition for Non-Pennsylvania Residents

$830 for 9-15 semester hours (s.h.), then $92 for each additional s.h.
Part-Time Tuition for Non-Pennsylvania Residents

$92 per semester hour (s.h.) for fewer than 9 s.h.
SUMMER SESSION TUITION
All Graduate Students (in-state and out-of-state) $87 s.h.

Application Fee (non-refundable) $10.00

Activity Fee — Semester Full-Time Students

(9 s.h. or more) $36.00

Semester Part-Time Students

(8 s.h. or fewer) $12.00

Main Summer Session

All Graduate Students $26.00

Pre or Post Summer Session

All Graduate Students $1 1 .00

Health Fee- Semester Full-Time $34.00

Pre Session $ 7.00

Main Session $14.00

Post Session $ 7.00

Late Fee $1 0.00/day up to $20.00

Applied Music Fee per private instruction $50.00

Auditor's Fee (Same as Tuition)

Graduation Fee $20.00

Master's or Doctoral Cap, Hood and Gown Fee . Nominal

ALL FEES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.

Grades and transcripts may be withheld by lUP if a student is delinquent
in paying any bill owed the University. Payment of the bill or establishment
of a payment plan satisfactory to the University will be required for release
of grades and/or transcripts.

University Refund Policy

The University must engage its faculty, assign Residence Hall space and
make various other arrangements in advance of each term in accordance
with the number of students who expressed their intent to be enrolled.
When students withdraw from the University, they create vacancies which
cannot be filled, and financial commitments for salaries and services by the
University must be honored. The refund policy at lUP applies to all students
enrolled in credit producing programs at the University either full-time or
part-time.

Graduate students withdrawing from the University must process such
withdrawal through the Graduate School Office. The official withdrawal date
will be established by the Graduate School Office.

Tuition and Fees

Students totally withdrawing from courses, upon receiving approval from
the Graduate School, will forfeit a portion of the semester charges in accord-
ance with the following schedule:

Withdrawal on Calendar Percentage of Student's Total

Day Basis Semester Charges to be Forfeited

4 days prior to the start of

classes through 14 days 20%

15 through 21 days 30%

22 through 28 days 40%

29 through 35 days 50%

36 or beyond 100% (no refund)

The start of calendar days is defined as the first day of classes as scheduled
on the University calendar.

During Summer Sessions, students totally withdrawing from the University,
upon receiving approval from the Graduate School, will forfeit a portion of
the total session charges in accordance with the following schedule:

Calendar Day Percentage of Student's Total

of Withdrawal Session Charges to be Forfeited

First class day through

Fourth calendar day 50%

Fifth calendar day and beyond 100% (no refund)

The Associate Provost will determine the official start of classes for each
semester or session. Refunds to students enrolled in credit-bearing sum-
mer conferences, institutes, workshops or tours of less than three weeks
duration will be granted a 50% refund through the first day of the class
(unless a no refund policy is required by the sponsor).

INDIVIDUAL COURSE WITHDRAWAL-A graduate student may cancel an
individual course(s) up to four days prior to the first day of classes by noti-
fying the Registrar in writing. If a student cancels a course(s) prior to the
fourth day preceding the start of classes, no penalty will be charged and
the student will receive 1 00% refund for the course(s) cancelled. No refunds
will be made to full-time students who withdraw from individual courses after
the fourth day preceding the first day of classes. Individual course withdrawal
is defined as a reduction in class load but not total withdrawal from the Univer-
sity. Example: A student who registers for three courses and then withdraws
from one or two classes but continues with the class or classes.

Part-time students will forfeit a portion of the credit-hour fee in accordance
with the following schedule:

Calendar Day of Percentage of Student's

Individual Course Withdrawal Instructional Fee to be Forfeited

Fourth day prior to the first class

day through 35 days 50%

36 and beyond 100% (no refund)

10- Indiana University of Pennsylvania

During Summer Sessions, part-time students will forfeit fees as follows. The
student will forfeit 50% of the course charges from the first class day through
the fourth calendar day. On the fifth calendar day and beyond, the student
will forfeit 100% (no refund).

Refunds will be granted only for instructional fees. No refund will be granted
to students who drop and add like number of credit hours.

WITHDRAWAL FROM UNIVERSITY SERVICES

Graduate students wishing to terminate residence hall or food service con-
tracts must do so through the Office of Housing and Residence Life. This
same office can provide information on dates and percentage of forfeiture.

OTHER REFUND POLICY PROVISIONS

No refunds will be granted to students who are suspended or expelled from

classes, residence halls, and/or food service.

The Accounts Receivable Office, Administrative Annex, is responsible for
implementing the refund policy. Students who wish to appeal a decision
rendered by Accounts Receivable may do so through the Director of Ac-
counting to the Vice President for Finance.

The University — 1 1

lUP

Location — lUP, the largest state-owned university in Pennsylvania's
State System of Higher Education, is located in Indiana, Pennsylvania, a
community of 26,000 about 55 miles northeast of Pittsburgh and 30 miles
north of Johnstown. Situated in the Allegheny foothills, Indiana has a
moderate climate conducive to study the year round and a wide variety of
historical, cultural, and recreational facilities both immediately at hand and
in neighboring population centers.

Library — The University Library Complex (Patrick J. Stapleton, Jr.
Library and Rhodes R. Stabley Library) provides excellent facilities for
graduate work with librarians readily available for assisting with specialized
reference work. The Library is an officially designated Federal Depository.
The holdings in Patrick J. Stapleton, Jr. Library include over 575,000 volumes
of books, 1 ,700,000 units of microform, 4,000 indexed periodical subscrip-
tions, and the government documents collection.

DIALOG on-line computer service for searching periodicals, and other
sources is also available through the Reference Department of the library.
Altogether, 180 data banks are searchable by DIALOG. A $5.00 deposit is
required of students using this service.

The Rhodes R. Stabley Library houses 50,000 units of media material
and software together with facilities for listening and viewing. These ser-
vices consist of the development of instructional systems such as student
response, and personal self-instructional materials. In addition, the services
provide photographic, sound recording and reproduction, design and pro-
duction of conventional instructional materials: procurement, inventory, and
maintenance of University multi-media equipment; developing and main-
taining a 16mm film library.

Graduate students and faculty conducting research may apply for inter-
library loans to supplement the library's holdings. Individual study carrels
are available for graduate students conducting library research.
STAPLETON/STABLEY LIBRARY HOURS
Monday thru Thursday 7:45 a.m. - 10:30 p.m.
Friday 7:45 a.m. - 9:30 p.m.

Saturday 9:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m.

Sunday 1:00 p.m. - 10:30 p.m.

Schedules for summer sessions and vacation periods are posted. The
telephone number for the Main Desk is 357-2340.

12— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

The Computer Center— The Computer Center, established in July,
1963, provides connputational support for undergraduate and graduate
courses, faculty and student research, and the administrative requirements
of the University. The computing capacity of the Center is provided by a
large-scale disk oriented central processor which supports both time-sharing
and batch processing services for the university community. Typewriter
terminals, located both in the Computer Center and in various locations on
campus, permit the use of the computer on a time-sharing basis. Key-
punching facilities and a full complement of tabulating equipment are
available in the Computer Center for student use. Remote job entry stations
are located in the Computer Science Department and the College of
Business, along with a large number of time-sharing terminals. Aid in the
use of the computer and facilities may be obtained from user assistants on
duty at the Computer Center, and from the Center's professional staff.

lUP's Computer Center plays an active part in the daily functioning of
the University. It is the principal laboratory facility for computer-oriented
courses and is used as a teaching aid in many classes involving statistical
and numberical analyses and computer simulations. In addition, over 80
organizations outside the University make extensive use of lUP's computing
facilities. The staff at the Center is actively involved in continuing work aimed
at making computers a more effective and readily accessible tool for both
the academic and administrative segments of the university community.

Testing Services— Testing programs at lUP are administered through
the Academic Services and Testing Center. Among the national testing pro-
grams offered, the following are of particular interest to potential graduate
students.

The Graduate Record Examination (GRE) is administered on nationally-
established dates five times each year. In the Saturday morning sessions
the general examinations (formerly called aptitude examinations) are offered;
the advanced examinations (specializations) are offered in the afternoon ses-
sions. Information and registration booklets are available from the Graduate
School or from the Testing Center. Registration forms must be sent directly
to ETS in Princeton, New Jersey.

The Miller Analogies Test (MAT) is administered by the Testing Center
on a frequent schedule — usually monthly on a weekday afternoon. To
register, contact the Testing Center (412-357-3050). All Graduate School
applicants with a GPA of below 2.6 must take the MAT.

The Graduate Management Admission Test (GMAT) is administered
on nationally-established dates. lUP is a regular center for some dates and
can be a special center for other dates if 15 registrations are submitted to
the Testing Center before the "special requests" deadline. Registrations for
regular center dates, as listed in the GMAT booklet, are submitted directly
to ETS. Information-registration booklets are available from the College of
Business — MBA Coordinator or from the Testing Center.

The National Teacher Examination (NTE) is administered on four
nationally-established dates. On two dates the common examinations are
offered; on two other dates the area examinations (specializations) are of-
fered. It is used generally by participating school systems for qualification

The University — 13

and/or selection of instructional staff. This test is used at lUP in admissions
to the Supervisor of Guidance certificate program.

Information on graduate and professional school exams other than those
used for lUP Graduate School programs is available through the Testing
Center. Law School Admission Test (LSAT) information is also available in
the office of the College of Humanities and Social Sciences. Medical Col-
lege Admission Test (MCAT) information is available through the Dean of
the College of Natural Sciences and fvlathematics.

Arrangements can be made by advance contact for administration of
tests adapted to visual, auditory, or physical handicaps.

The Testing Center is a service operation for the administration of tests
and neither makes testing requirements nor offers interpretation of testing
results. Commercial "How to Prepare for . . ." materials are available in the
Co-op Store and other local bookstores. Questions concerning test re-
quirements and desirable scores should be addressed to The Graduate
School. Questions concerning specific registration matters and the test
agency information-registration materials may be directed to the Academic
Services and Testing Center, G-30 Sutton Hall (412-357-3050).

Career Services— The Office of Career Services, 302 Pratt Hall, is open
to all lUP graduate students and alumni. Students and classes are invited
to use the facilities and professional staff for assistance in career planning
and development.

The primary functions of the Career Services program are: providing
vocational planning assistance through conferences with professional career
counselors; assembling a set of credentials for each student who submits
the materials and making copies of these credentials available to prospec-
tive employers; cooperating with the faculty of the University to increase
the overall awareness of current employment opportunities and trends;
arranging for campus interviews; publicizing career information, especially
regarding campus interviewing opportunities; preparing vacancy files and
a current vacancy list which are made available to eligible candidates; main-
taining a career information library; arranging for occupational information
through meetings with representatives from education, business, industry,
and government; conducting follow-up studies of graduates and assembling
supply and demand data.

Each student is urged to obtain a packet of information in the Career
Services Office and complete all the forms necessary to establish a credential
file for employment purposes.

•X '^

The Graduate School —15

THE GRADUATE SCHOOL AT lUP

GENERAL INFORMATION

Graduate work was inaugurated at lUP in September, 1957.

Master of Arts, Master of Science, Master of Business Adnninistration,
Master of Education, Doctor of Education, Doctor of Philosophy, and Doc-
tor of Psychology degrees are currently available. Non-degree programs
leading to certification in various teaching and school service fields are also
available.

In all graduate programs the objectives are (1) to encourage excellence
and scholarship, (2) to provide depth in the student's special field, and (3)
to stimulate enthusiasm for continued cultural and professional growth on
the part of the student.

The Graduate School staff is assisted in its daily functioning by a) the
Graduate Committee, a standing committee of the University Senate
concerned with graduate program curricular and policy matters; b) the
Graduate Student Assembly, an elected graduate student body represen-
tative of all campus acaden' c departments offering graduate programs, and
c) the chairpersons and grtiduate studies coordinators of departments of-
fering graduate course work.

In addition to the degree and certification programs referred to above,
lUP's Graduate School also maintains liaison with other graduate institu-
tions in Pennsylvania. Students should contact The Graduate School for ad-
ditional information.

16 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

ADMISSION

Admission to The Graduate School is required of all students who wish
to take graduate courses for graduate credit. Each student applying for ad-
mission, either as an applicant for a graduate degree program or as an ap-
plicant for a non-degree program, must file with The Graduate School an
application for admission and such other supporting documents as the school
may specify. An Admissions Packet is supplied by the Graduate Office upon
request. As a general rule application materials must be on file in the
Graduate Office at least one month prior to the beginning of the semester
or term in which the applicant plans to begin graduate work. Some excep-
tions to these deadlines exist; please refer to the Graduate Calendar on the
opening pages of this catalog for specific program dates.

Requirements for Admission

1 . An applicant must have a bachelor's degree from a college or univer-
sity accredited by the Middle States Association of Colleges and
Secondary Schools or an equivalent regional accrediting agency.

2. The applicant's undergraduate transcript (or transcripts collectively)
must show a minimum cumulative quality point average of 2.6 on
a 4.0 maximum scale. Occasionally, additional evidence of academic
ability is required.

3. Graduate Record Examination (GRE) scores must be submitted prior
to admission or during the student's first semester of course work
by all students except MBA and M.S. in Business program applicants;
the latter must submit General Management Admission Test (GMAT)
scores. (These tests are described in detail earlier in this catalog.)

4. Most applicants requesting admission to programs leading to an MEd
degree are required to have a Provisional Pennsylvania Teachers
Certificate or its equivalent; all MEd degree applicants should be sure
to inquire at their program's sponsoring department. MEd applicants
who do not already have such certification where required must com-
plete a planned program leading to certification prior to applying for
MEd degree candidacy at lUP.

Graduate School admission means that students may program and
register for graduate courses. Admission does not guarantee subsequent
admission to candidacy for a degree, nor does it guarantee successful com-
pletion of requirements for a degree.

Admission Procedures

1. Each applicant must file with the Dean of The Graduate School a
completed application form. Applications along with forms pertain-
ing to items 2 and 3 below are included in the Admission's Packet.
The Admission's Packet sent to Doctor of Psychology applicants dif-
fers somewhat from the regular packet, especially regarding item
3 below.

The Graduate School —17

2. The application must be accompanied by one copy of an official
transcript from each graduate and undergraduate institution attended,
including lUP if the applicant is an lUP graduate. lUP graduates must
ask the Registrar's Office to forward official transcripts to the
Graduate School.

3. Each applicant must submit statements of recommendation from
three individuals who are familiar with his/her background. At least
two of the individuals must be persons familiar with the applicant's
academic background.

4. All applicants must submit Graduate Record Examination (GRE)
scores except MBA and M.S. in Business degree applicants, who
must submit Graduate Management Admission Test (GMAT) scores.
Information about both is contained in the Admission's Packet.

5. An application fee in the amount of $10.00, non-refundable, must
accompany the application. Please pay by check and make check
payable to: lUP.

Admission Classifications

Applicants for admission to The Graduate School are notified of their
admission status by The Graduate School Dean prior to the beginning of
the term of planned study. Admission classifications are as follows:

1 . Pre-Candidacy Status. Given to an applicant who plans to work
toward a graduate degree and whose application file with The
Graduate School is both complete and satisfactory. The pre-
candidacy student may program, under departmental guidance, 6
to 12 graduate hours toward the degree being sought. Pre-Candidacy
Status does not guarantee subsequent admission to candidacy.

2. Special Graduate Standing. Granted to applicants who indicate they
do not plan to work toward a graduate degree but who wish to take
graduate courses for which they are qualified. Applicants granted
this standing who later wish to work toward a graduate degree must
request reclassification by The Graduate School. Credits earned by
a student having Special Graduate Standing may be applied to an
lUP degree after the reclassified student has been awarded degree
candidacy, provided the credits are deemed appropriate to the degree
by the program's sponsoring department.

3. Admission Denied. Applicants denied admission to The Graduate
School will receive a letter from the Graduate Dean indicating the
reason for the denial.

Graduate Record and Other Examinations

All graduate school applicants must take the GENERAL (formerly called
the Aptitude section) section of the Graduate Record Examination. The

18- Indiana University of Pennsylvania

following departments require that the Examination's ADVANCED section
must also be taken for the degree or certification programs indicated:

Biology (MS and MEd)

Educational Psychology (MEd and School Psychology programs)

Elementary Education (EdD)

English (PhD)

Foreign Languages (German, MEd; Spanish, MA and MEd)

Music (MA, MEd)

Psychology (MA, Psy.D.)

Under certain conditions lUP applicants may be required to submit MAT
(Miller Analogies Test) scores. Both Graduate Record and Miller Analogies
examinations are administered by lUP's Testing Center; specific informa-
tion about test availability can be obtained from the Center's director. Ap-
plicants taking such examinations, whether at lUP or elsewhere, should
request that their scores be sent to: Dean, The Graduate School, lUP,
Indiana, PA 15705.

Foreign Student Applicants

In addition to following the general procedures for admission to The
Graduate School, foreign students must present evidence of fluency in
English. Applicants whose native language is not English are required to
take the Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL)*. The Graduate
School will not process applications from such students until satisfactory
TOEFL scores are filed with the Dean of The Graduate School.

TOEFL scores are only one of several criteria considered for the ad-
mission of foreign students to the Graduate School at lUP. However, as a
broad indicator, applicants should be aware of the Council of Graduate
Schools' finding that, among American universities, the TOEFL scores most
widely expected for admission are 500 and above.

Foreign applicants must also present evidence to The Graduate School
of having financial resources sufficient to meet the cost of living in Indiana,
Pennsylvania; the cost of travel to and from the student's native country,
and the cost of graduate education at lUP. Such evidence should be sent
directly to: Dean, The Graduate School, lUP, Indiana, Pennsylvania 1 5705,
U.S.A. The Graduate School gives notification to the University's Foreign
Student Adviser of foreign student applications received; the Foreign Stu-
dent Adviser mails to the prospective foreign student information on housing,
arrival dates, and other general information about the University. Applicants
who have questions about legal or other matters such as the issuance of
certificates of eligibility (1-20) and the like should address those questions
directly to: lUP Foreign Student Adviser, lUP, Indiana, Pennsylvania 15705.

Foreign Student Candidacy Test— All foreign students will be required
to take the GRE if they have studied in an American college or university.
If a foreign student has not studied in an American college or university,
the test required for candidacy will be the TOEFL. Business students in MBA
or MS programs must take the GMAT regardless of foreign status.

'Students desiring direct information about this examination should write
to TOEFL, Educational Testing Service, Princeton, New Jersey 08540,
U.S.A.

The Graduate School —19

PROGRAMMING AND REGISTRATION

Advisement

After a student has been admitted to The Graduate School, he/she
should consult the departnnent chairperson or coordinator of graduate studies
in his/her intended field of study about a program of courses. If the student
is a special graduate student, consultation should be with the Dean of The
Graduate School. Advisement before course registration is required of all
students enrolling for graduate classes for the first time. In addition, many
departments feel strongly that their students should be advised well before
registration for each semester or summer term; these departments are iden-
tified in each semester's (or summer session's) schedule of course offer-
ings. The student should carefully check such schedules about advisement
responsibilities, as well as course offerings, before registration.

Pre-registration

Prior to each semester or summer session enrolled graduate students
receive schedules and pre-registration materials with accompanying instruc-
tions from The Graduate School. Similar material is sent to prospective new
students in response to their inquiries. The student should return all com-
pleted registration forms to the Graduate Office by the date published in
the graduate schedule.

Final Registration

After the student has returned the registration materials to The Graduate
School, he/she will receive from the Business Office a bill for tuition and
fees. Bills must be paid before the student attends classes. Arrangements
for housing and meals when necessary, parking, identification-card receipt
can be made at the registration location for "walk-in" students. Mail-registered
students should make such arrangements independently with offices
involved.

"Walk-in" registration is usually held during the final hours of registra-
tion for students who have not pre-registered. Walk-in students may en-
counter lengthy delays in their registration processing and other
inconveniences. It is unquestionably to the student's advantage to be pro-
cessed with the majority pre-registration group.

APPLICANTS FOR SPECIALIST OR
SUPERVISORY CERTIFICATION PROGRAMS

lUP offers specialist or supervisory certificate programs in Instructional
Media Specialist (Communications Media Department), Elementary School
Counselor, Secondary School Counselor, Supervisor of Guidance Services,
Supervisor of Pupil Personnel Services (Counselor Education Department),
School Psychology certification (Educational Psychology Department),
Reading Specialist, Reading Supervisor (Elementary Education Department),
and Supervisor in Special Education (Special Education and Clinical Ser-
vices Department).

Applicants for these programs should follow the same procedures for

20 -Indiana University of Pennsylvania

admission, programming, and registration as described in this catalog for
special programs requirements. However, potential applicants should check
with the department chair or graduate coordinator responsible for the
specialized program in order to gather information before beginning the
admissions process.

FINANCIAL AID

The Financial Aid Office, located at 308 Pratt Hall, offers financial in-
formation and counseling to all students attending lUP. The types of finan-
cial assistance offered by the Financial Aid Office include student
employment, loans, and scholarships. In most cases the Pennsylvania State
Grant Application is used to determine eligibility for these programs.

In order to be considered for financial aid administered through the
University, a Pennsylvania State Grant Application must be submitted to
Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. Students attending lUP on at least a half-time
basis (5 credit hours or more) will be awarded assistance based on dem-
onstrated financial need. To be eligible for continued funding, applicants
must remain in satisfactory academic standing at the University and show
continued academic progress.

Payment of financial aid awards is done on a semester basis. All finan-
cial aid, with the exception of the private scholarships, work-study, and
guaranteed student loans are credited to the student's bill in advance.

The cost of attending lUP and the University's refund policy are listed
in this catalog. Please refer to the index for further information.

Asslstantshlps

lUP offers both half-time assistantships (20 hours per week of assistant-
ship service) and quarter-time assistantships (10) hours per week of assis-
tantship service) to full-time graduate students. Duties will vary somewhat
from assistant to assistant and may include assistance with teaching, super-
vised teaching, research or assistance with research, and university service
activities. Duties are under the supervision of a graduate faculty member.
Assistantships are looked upon as an encouragement or reward for academic
excellence rather than a means to relieve financial need.

Half-time assistantships carry a full tuition waiver for the two semesters
of the assistantship and the following summer. With some exceptions,
quarter-time assistantships carry one-half tuition waiver for the two semesters
of the assistantship and a six semester hour waiver for the following summer.

Since stipends for assistantships may be raised from year to year, poten-
tial applicants should check with The Graduate School for current stipend
levels.

The deadline for applying for a September assistantship is March 15
of the same calendar year. Applications and further information are available
at The Graduate School.

Scholarships

Margaret Flegal Harte Scholarships

Two $450 scholarships are awarded yearly to needy new full-time
graduate students. All new Graduate School applicants except for those who

The Graduate School - 21

receive other lUP scholarships are considered for the Margaret Flegal Harte
Scholarships based on academic records and financial need. No applica-
tion forms for the scholarships are required; the Pennsylvania State Grant
Application submitted to Harrisburg, Pennsylvania, serves as the need
analysis document for need assessment.

Employment Programs

A. Federal College Work-Study Program (CWSP)

The College Work-Study Program provides an opportunity for graduate
students to earn money to help finance educational expenses. Students
may be employed on campus for up to 20 hours per week when classes
are in session and 40 hours per week during vacation periods. Work-study
jobs not only help to defray the cost of education but can add valuable
practical experience accompanying the student's graduate education.
Eligibility is based on financial need as determined by an analysis of the
Pennsylvania State Grant Application submitted to Harrisburg, Penn-
sylvania. The form is available in the Financial Aid Office.

B. State University Employment Program (UE)

The State University Employment Program also provides an opportunity
for students to work as an accompaniment to their studies program. Max-
imum UE hours are 20 hours per week when classes are in session and
40 hours per week during vacation periods. No application is necessary.

C. Special Funded Grant Employment opportunities are also available to
graduate students from time to time. Interested students should check
with the Graduate Office.

Loan Programs

A. Guaranteed Student Loan (GSL)

Applications for the GSL, known in Pennsylvania as the PHEAA Loan,
are obtained from private leading institutions such as banks and credit
unions and are administered in conjunction with the State and Federal
Governments. There are no cancellation privileges. Up to $5,000 per
academic year may be borrowed with a total limit of $1 5,000 for graduate
study or $25,000 for graduate and undergraduate years combined. For
new borrowers, repayment at 8% simple interest per year starts after the
six month grace period. Previous borrowers will continue at the same
interest rate (7%, 8%, or 9%) and the same grace period (six or nine
months). Minimum monthly repayment is $50.00.

B. Auxiliary Loans to Assist Students (known in Pennsylvania at PLUS)
Applications for the PLUS loan are obtained from participating private
lending institutions such as banks and credit unions and are administered
in conjunction with the State and Federal Governments. There are no
cancellation privileges. Up to $3,000 per academic year may be borrowed
by approved graduate students with a maximum of $1 5,000 for graduate
study.

Repayment at 12% interest per year starts 60 days after the check is
issued. Some lenders will defer payment of principal until graduate study
is completed.

C. Family Partnership Loan (FPL)

To assist students who are ineligible for GSL or who receive less GSL
than had been requested, PHEAA has established the Family Partner-

22— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

ship Loan. $10,000 maximum may be borrowed at approximately 10%
annual interest. Principal repayments may be deferred until completion
of graduate study. Interest must be paid quarterly.
To be considered for the Family Partnership Loan, students must sub-
mit a GSL application and receive a denial or less than requested. PHEAA
will contact the student automatically with details of the FPL.

Veterans

lUP is approved to offer training under the various G.I. Bills. Students
who are entitled to training under one of these bills should contact the
Veterans' Counselor immediately after being accepted for admission to lUP
in order to secure additional instructions. This procedure is necessary so
veterans may be included on the monthly payrolls. The Office of the Vet-
erans' Counselor is in 304 Pratt Hall.

INSURANCE

lUP provides an opportunity for full-time graduate students to purchase
accident and illness insurance. Coverage normally begins on a date near
the end of August and ends on the same date the following year. However,
shorter coverages are available based on the date a graduate student enrolls
at lUP. Since the range of items covered and benefit maximums change
from time to time, no policy details can be listed here. For further details
and/or policy purchases, please contact the Associate Treasurer, Admin-
istrative Annex, lUP, Indiana, PA 15705.

Foreign students enrolled at lUP must purchase the insurance described
above unless they can demonstrate that they already have comparable
coverage.

GENERAL GRADUATE SCHOOL PROCEDURES
AND REGULATIONS

The graduate student is expected to assume full responsibility for
knowing graduate program procedures and regulations. General Graduate
School requirements are set forth in this catalog; a description of special
departmental degree requirements is available at each department spon-
soring the specific degree or certification program. Requests for exceptions
to policy are given consideration when unique circumstances exist; ques-
tions concerning the proper routing of such requests should be addressed
to the Graduate School Dean. In addition to knowing policy and procedure,
all admitted graduate students should also be familiar with the document
"Graduate Student Rights and Responsibilities," a copy of which can be ob-
tained at the Graduate Office.

Program Changes

To insure their quality and relevance, graduate programs at lUP are
subject to constant review and change by duly appointed and responsible
University groups. Because of this, the University recognizes that provision
must be made to prevent hardship to students already enrolled in programs
if changes later occur in specific or general program requirements. Students

The Graduate School — 23

affected by changes in programs, policies and regulations are therefore
given the option of following those requirements in effect when the student
was first admitted to the program or those in effect at the time of expected
graduation. The student cannot, of course, combine chosen elements of the
two. Should a question of rule interpretation arise with respect to changes,
the student, the student's adviser, or both should petition The Graduate
School Dean for a decision about which requirements apply.

Graduate Student Rights and Responsibilities

upon admission to The Graduate School, the student assumes re-
sponsibility for knowing program requirements and following established
procedures in relation to academic advisement, course selection and reg-
istering, the payment of fees, the processing of withdrawals from class (if
any), the meeting of residency requirements, applying for degree candidacy,
and applying for and meeting all specific requirements for graduation. Con-
versely, he/she has the right to expect that all program requirements will
be made clear, that all course requirements— including grading criteria and
procedures- will be made known early in the course, and that course grades
will represent the instructor's professional and objective evaluation of per-
formance. He/she has the right to instruction which encourages the free and
open discussion of ideas, and which respects reasonable student needs and
aspirations. It is the student's responsibility to contribute to that classroom
decorum and atmosphere which encourages maximum learning. Finally, the
student understands that a departmental evaluation of academic progress
and professional potential will be filed and that such an evaluation is available
upon request.

The Graduate Student Assembly

Each lUP department offering a graduate program is required to
establish a graduate studies committee and is urged, but not required to
form an association for its graduate students. On a University-wide basis,
the Graduate Student Assembly (GSA) is the graduate students' organiza-
tion. GSA is composed of two elected representatives (and frequently an
alternate) elected by the full-time and part-time graduate students of the
department. GSA functions to serve all graduate students by having voting
representation on the Graduate Council and in the University Senate; by
having the right to review Council policies; by having the means to make
recommendations about graduate student affairs to the Council and/or to
the Graduate Dean; by working to improve the social, intellectual, and cultural
life of graduate students; and by participating in the judicial procedure
established for graduate students.

Academic Good Standing

lUP graduate students must maintain a minimum of 3.0 (B) cumulative
graduate quality point average to be in good standing academically. Students
falling below good standing are placed on probation for their succeeding
active semester or summer; probationary continuance beyond one semester
or summer is permitted only upon receipt of special authorization to this ef-
fect from the Graduate Dean. A student must be in good standing to be ad-
mitted to degree candidacy and to graduate.

24 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

ACADEMIC CREDITS AND STUDENT STATUS

Although many graduate students depend upon part-time or full-time
employment to meet expenses, the time demands for such employment must
not be permitted to curtail academic achievement. lUP Graduate School
facilities are offered only to students in a position to benefit from their
graduate experience.

Students may regularly schedule a full-time academic load in most
graduate programs. Full-time graduate student status is defined as 9 to 15
graduate semester hours per semester, while part-time status is defined as
eight or fewer semester hours per semester. Full-time graduate students
should not hold full-time outside employment. Graduate assistants may not
register for more than 12 total hours in any semester.

WORKSHOPS AND OTHER SPECIAL CREDITS

The following policy governing the use of workshop and other special-
offering credits toward graduate degrees was passed by the University
Senate on May 8, 1979:

The individual master's degree candidate may submit for credit for his
degree no more than six (6) semester hours of workshop and other
special-credit offerings approved by the department offering the degree.
Doctoral candidates may submit a further six (6) semester hours of such
work beyond the master's or its equivalent if approved by the degree-
granting department. Should the workshop(s) or special credit offering(s)
later become a catalog-listed course which is part of the degree pro-
gram, while the student is still working toward his/her degree, the stu-
dent may request of the department a retroactive reclassification of
credits so earned and upon approval may again use workshop or special
offering credits, up to the above maximum, toward a degree.

The Graduate School — 25

RESIDENCY

Master's degree candidates may satisfy the residency requirements by
taking all credits applicable to the lUP degree (except possibly six transfer
credits-see "Credit Transfers." Doctoral candidates have the following
options: completion of a minimum of nine graduate credits at lUP in each
of at least two consecutive semesters; completion of a minimum of nine
graduate credits at lUP for at least one semester immediately preceding
or following a summer of nine-hour study; completion at lUP of at least nine
graduate credits in each of two consecutive summers plus six graduate
credits during the intervening academic year; or completion of 1 2 graduate
credits at lUP in each of two consecutive summers (this latter is recom-
mended only in very special instances).

DEGREE CANDIDACY

Part-time graduate students must apply for degree candidacy through
their Dean's Office immediately following completion of six graduate credit
hours taken at lUP. Full-time students must do the same at the mid-term
of the semester or summer term during which they are taking their 1 2th lUP
graduate hour. The appropriate form is available at the College Dean's Of-
fice. Notification of candidacy award or denial, as recommended by the pro-
gram's sponsoring department, will be received from the Dean. Receipt of
degree candidacy is a most important requirement in the student's progress
toward an lUP graduate degree.

Admission to Candidacy

To qualify for admission to candidacy, the student must complete the
following steps:

1 . Submit an official application for admission to candidacy to the Col-
lege Dean (form may be obtained at the student's College Dean's
Office).

2. Complete with satisfactory grades (see description of Academic Good
Standing) at least six semester hours (part-time students) or be in
the process of completing 12 semester hours (full-time students-
see first paragraph under Degree Candidacy) of graduate work at
lUP.

3. Have on file in the Graduate Office scores from the Graduate Record
Examination, or for MBA and MS in Business students. The Graduate
Management Admission Test.

4. Have satisfied the research course requirement (GR 615 Elements
of Research, or equivalent).

5. Have on file in the College Dean's Office a tentative program of
studies for completion of the desired degree program.

Degree candidacy is awarded by the dean's office only upon recom-
mendation of the student's academic department. The student will be notified
in writing of candidacy decisions.

Individual departments may have requirements exceeding the minimum
prescribed by The Graduate School. Students should inquire for such written
requirements at the degree-sponsoring department.

26— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

GRADING SYSTEM

The following grades are used in reporting the standing of students at
the end of each semester or summer term:

A — Excellent I— Incomplete

B — Good R — Research in Progress

C-Fair W-Withdrawal

F — Failure

No "D" grade is recognized in lUP graduate work.

Quality points are assigned as follows: A — 4; B — 3: C — 2. No quality
points are carried by the notations of F, I, R, and W.

The notation 'T' is used to record work which, as far as it has progressed,
Is of passing grade but is incomplete because of accident, illness, pregnancy,
or extreme personal disturbance. The "R" notation pertains only to thesis
and dissertation research credits when such research is in progress as a
semester or summer terms ends, or in certain practicum-type courses ap-
proved for this notation by the Graduate Dean. All •'R's" are replaced by the
research grade eventually assigned when the research is completed. The
"W" notation applies to certain withdrawals from courses. Withdrawals from
the University and discrete course withdrawals are discussed in detail in
other sections of this catalog. Note that an "F" is entered in the student's
permanent academic record if a withdrawal of either type has not been
processed in accordance with established procedures.

Course Auditing

Auditing is not permitted in a graduate course unless the student has
been admitted to The Graduate School, has received permission to audit
from the course's instructor, and has been approved for course enrollment
by the Dean of The Graduate School. Auditors must pay normal tuition and
related fees. An auditor will, with permission from the instructor, participate
in class discussion, do practicum work, take examinations, and share
generally in the privileges of a class member. If the student completes all
course requirements — but only if so — an "Audit" notation is posted to the
student's academic record. No student who is required to carry a certain
number of credits may count among those credits the credit of an audited
course.

Class Cancellation

It is the policy of The Graduate School not to cancel regularly scheduled
classes because of weather conditions, nor does it make announcements
via radio, newspaper, or through its switchboard that classes are being
suspended because of such conditions. In cases of emergencies disrupting
transportation facilities or otherwise creating hazardous travel conditions,
students should make those decisions as to attendance which appear
appropriate to them in their particular circumstances.

Graduate Course Numbering

All dual-level courses, open to enrollment by both graduate and qualified
undergraduate students, carry a 500-599 course number; all courses open
only to graduate students carry 600-series and above numbers.

The Graduate School -27

Dual Level Courses

The number of credits attained in dual-level courses (500-599) which
shall be applicable to a degree program for any student shall be a maximum
of 50% of the credits required for that degree. Some programs may call for
less than 50%. Students should check this requirement with their advisors.

Graduate students who enroll in dual level courses should be aware
that dual level courses commonly impose greater obligations on graduate
students than on undergraduate students taking the same course.

COURSE ABBREVIATION KEY

The following departmental abbreviations are used to identify courses

referred to in the Catalog:

Adult Education

Foundations of Education

Accounting

Geography & Regional

Administrative Services

Planning

Art History

Geoscience

Applied Music

Graduate

Anthropology

Health & Physical Ed

Art

History

Art Education

Home Economics Ed

Business Education

Industrial & Labor Relations

Biology

Management

Chemistry

Marketing

Communications Media

Mathematics

Computer Science

Music

Consumer Services

Nursing

Counselor Education

Philosophy

Criminology

Physics

Distributive Education

Political Science

Economics

(Public Affairs)

Early Childhood Education

Psychology

Education

Religious Studies

Education Administration

Safety Sciences

Educational Psychology

Science

Elementary Education

Social Science

Elementary Mathematics

Sociology

Elementary Science

Special Education

English

Ed of Except Children

Fine Arts

Speech & Hearing

Finance/MIS

Student Personnel

Food and Nutrition

Theater

Foreign Language

Critical Language

French

German

Greek

Latin

Spanish

28— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Credit Transfers

Credit for graduate courses taken at another institution may under cer-
tain circumstances be incorporated as part of the graduate student's pro-
gram at lUP. These courses must have been completed on the main campus
of an accredited institution, or acceptable in its degree programs by that
main campus. The grade earned must be a "B" or its equivalent or better.
The time limitation rule for lUP degrees (cited later in this catalog) pertains
without modification to transfer credits.

A maximum of six credits of transfer work may be accepted. Transfer
credits are not necessarily posted to the student's lUP graduate record un-
til the student has been admitted to degree candidacy. Acceptance of transfer
credit must be approved by the candidate's department and the Dean.
Students wishing to transfer back to lUP credits taken at another institution
while enrolled in an lUP graduate program must receive advance written
authorization for credit acceptance from the College Dean.

Graduate Course Repeat Policy

Under University policy no graduate credit is recognized for courses
completed with grades of "F". Graduate grading policy does not permit an
award of "D". A student receiving a "C" or "F" grade may request through
his/her adviser or coordinator of graduate studies approval to repeat the
course to a maximum of two repeats. Each such repeat must receive final
approval from the dean of the student's College.

Semester hours for repeated courses shall be counted only once for
all attempts made and, should there be a difference in hours because of
a course hours change, the hours and quality points earned when last taken
shall be those used for quality point average computation.

Credits earned in only one repeated course may be applied to an lUP
graduate degree.

Course Overlaps in Degree Programs

Within set limits, a student may use the same course to count in two
different master's degree programs, if the course is acceptable in both pro-
grams. However, the number of overlap credits counted toward a second
master's degree will be limited to 20% of the credits in the second master's
degree program. Exceptions to this limit may be made by the Graduate Dean
in consultation with the appropriate Department Chair and College Dean.

Independent Study Maximum

Only six credits of Independent Study work may apply toward a graduate
degree unless written authorization for hours in excess of six is obtained
from the student's adviser or coordinator of graduate studies and the dean,
in that order.

Graduate Internship Policy

To qualify for a graduate internship appointment the graduate student
must have a minimum of 12 lUP graduate credits earned and a minimum
3.0 GPA; must have been in full-time enrollment (nine graduate credits or

The Graduate School - 29

more) during the semester or summer sessions (the latter taken as a
whole) immediately preceding the academic period for which internship is
requested;* and must meet departmental internship criteria. No more than
six internship credits may apply to a graduate degree unless written approval
of the student's departmental chairperson or graduate studies coordinator
and the dean (in that order) is obtained. Continuation in an internship ex-
perience by a given graduate student is contingent upon the student's
maintenance of satisfactory performance in all aspects of his/her degree
program. Programmatic exceptions to the foregoing policy can be made only
with the approval of the Graduate Council.

*For graduate students active during summers only, or during fall-spring
semesters only, "immediately preceding the academic period" etc. refers
to the student's last preceding active semester or summer session.

Final Credits Policy

All degree candidates must complete their program's final six credits
of graduate work in courses offered by lUP. Under certain circumstances
appropriate substitutions may be authorized. Students wishing such
authorization must petition the Dean after obtaining the approval of their
adviser and department chairperson or graduate studies coordinator.

Discrete Course Withdrawal

During the fall and spring semesters, graduate students may request
authorization to withdraw from a graduate course without prejudice and with
the grade of "W" by petitioning the Graduate Dean in writing within the first
two-thirds of the semester as determined by the published University calen-
dar. The request must carry the endorsement of both the course instructor
and the student's department chairperson or graduate studies coordinator,
in that order. Graduate students wishing to withdraw from an undergraduate
course within the prescribed period must do so by processing the standard
undergraduate Discrete Course Withdrawal form.

For summer term classes and labs, the following is substituted for the
above in the preceding paragraph; for the Pre and Post Sessions, within
the first six class days; for Main Session, within the first twelve class days.

Following the close of the established six weeks (or 6th or 12th day)
withdrawal period, a graduate student may withdraw from a course, either
graduate or undergraduate, without grade penalty only with the written
approval of his/her department chairperson or graduate studies coordinator
and the Dean (in that order) for such reasons as accident, severe illness,
or extreme personal disturbance. A student dropping a course under any
other circumstances will automatically receive an "F" at the end of the
semester or summer term.

Withdrawals from the University

Graduate students withdrawing from the University for any reason must
process such withdrawals in writing through the Office of the Graduate Dean.
The official withdrawal date to be recognized will be established by the Dean.

Please refer to the early pages of this catalog for detailed description
of the University's Refund Policy and related matters.

Official notification of course withdrawal will be sent by the Graduate

30— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Dean to the students course instructor(s) and chairperson/graduate studies

coordinator.

No person shall be considered withdrawn from the University unless
the withdrawal process described herein has been employed.

Graduate Course Scheduling by
Certain Undergraduates

lUP undergraduate students with an academic grade point average of
at least 2.6 who are within 32 semester hours of graduation are permitted
after appropriate approvals, to take up to six semester hours of graduate
work whether or not they have applied for acceptance into an lUP graduate
program. Graduate hours so earned have no necessary bearing upon the
meeting of undergraduate degree requirements, and no assurance is given
or implied as to the hours' later applicability to a graduate degree should
the students be admitted to an lUP graduate program.

Time Limitations

Program credits earned at lUP or accepted by transfer are applicable
to lUP master's degrees over a period not to exceed five years from the date
of their earning unless the period is extended through student petition
approved by the program's chairperson or graduate studies coordinator and
the Graduate Dean. Doctoral candidates must complete degree requirements
no later than seven years after beginning lUP doctoral program course work
unless an extension similarly is authorized.

Graduation

Early in their final semester or summer session, students must file an

application for graduation in their College Dean's Office on a form furnished
by that office. Graduation applications must be filed by the deadlines shown
on the Graduate Calendar.

When all requirements for the degree have been completed and this
fact is attested to by the student's department, the student's College Dean,
and The Graduate School, the student's academic record will be so posted
and the degree will be awarded at the following established diploma-award
date. An official diploma is presented to the student at that time.

DOCTORAL DEGREE PROGRAMS

The Graduate School at iUP offers v/ork leading to the doctorate through
the following departments: Counselor Education, Educational Psychology.
Elementary Education. English and Psychology.

Applicants should keep in mind that the doctorate is conferred for
distinguished achievement in a particular field of scholarship and for
demonstrated ability to perform independent research in an area of that field.
No specific number of course credits entitles a student to the degree.

Those interested in any of the doctoral programs should read the
description provided by sponsoring departments later in this catalog.
Deadlines for submitting applications and supporting documents vary from
program to program, as do degree requirements. Therefore, it is important

7^76 Graduate School — 31

for students to check with the sponsoring department at the very start of

the application process.

The following doctorates are offered:

Doctor of Education in Counselor Education

Doctor of Education in Elementary Education

Doctor of Education in School Psychology

Doctor of Philosophy in English and American Literature

Doctor of Philosophy in Rhetoric and Linguistics

Doctor of Psychology in Clinical Psychology

The doctoral programs in Counselor Education and School Psychology

maintain cooperative arrangements with other universities in the State
System of Higher Education iSSHE). whereby some part of the requirements
may be fulfilled at these schools. Counselor Education has a cooperative
agreement with California University of Pennsylvania and the School
Psychology program with California University of Pennsylvania. Edinboro
University of Pennsylvania, and Millersville University of Pennsylvania. For
details, check the appropriate program descriptions in this catalog and con-
sult with the sponsoring department.

Requirements for the Doctoral Degree

Students seeking a doctoral degree must satisfy the minimum Graduate
School requirements described below. Sponsoring departments may have
additional requirements: students must be equally familiar with departmen-
tal requirements since these are equally binding.

Under certain circumstances Graduate School requirements for the Doc-
toral degree may be satisfied by means of substitution. Requests for the
acceptance of substitutions should be made in the form of a petition to the
Graduate Dean, the petition first having the approval of the student's ad-
viser and department chairperson or graduate studies coordinator.

Credit requirement — A minimum of 60 graduate semester credits,
exclusive of dissertation credits, must be earned beyond the bachelor's
degree for any of the doctorates offered at lUP.

Transfer credit — Transfer credit is limited to the credit equivalent of
a recognized master's degree, except in those special cases recommended
by the student's department chairperson or graduate studies coordinator
and approved by the Graduate Dean and up to 12 graduate credits in the
use of program specific interinstitutional agreements approved by the
Graduate Dean.

Admission to Candidacy — Each student admitted to a aoctoral pro-
gram must apply for doctoral degree candidacy after completing at lUP no
less than nine nor more than 15 graduate credits beyond the master's degree.
The student must have a minimum quality point average of 3.0. The stu-
dent's minimum GPA may be set higher than the foregoing Graduate School
requirement by the programs sponsoring department, but in no case may
it be lower.

32 -Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Candidacy Examination— The candidacy examination, which may be
written, oral, or both, as determined by the program's sponsoring depart-
ment, and which may serve also as the final examination for the master's
degree if a department so prescribes, is administered by the department
in the student's field of specialization. The examination may not be taken
until the student has completed at least one year of study beyond the
bachelor's degree. Examination scores must satisfy the student's dissertation
committee.

The Dissertation Committee— The candidate's dissertation commit-
tee supervises the student's degree program from the point at which he/she
is admitted to doctoral degree candidacy through defense of the disserta-
tion. The committee approves the student's plan of study; arranges for the
candidacy examination; arranges for the comprehensive examination; and
oversees the candidate's general supervision related to research, the disser-
tation, and the general meeting of degree requirements.

The Comprehensive Examination— This examination is given, usually
upon the candidate's completion of course work, to determine the student's
stage of progress in the degree field and fields related to it, and the stu-
dent's likelihood of success in his/her research— dissertation phase. The
examination may be written, oral, or both. It is not necessarily limited to areas
in which the candidate has taken course work.

Foreign Language/Research Tool Options— Foreign Language and/or
research tool requirements for doctoral degrees vary from program to pro-
gram. In most cases, programs offer options for meeting these requirements.
Students should consult with the department sponsoring the degree for
specific information and guidance on meeting these requirements.

Research Proposal — After the candidate has passed the comprehen-
sive examination and has done extensive preliminary proposal research,
he/she must present and defend a research proposal before the disserta-
tion committee. A copy of the proposal must be placed in the hands of all
committee members at least two weeks in advance of the scheduled meeting.
The proposal must be found satisfactory by all members of the committee
before the candidate may proceed with the dissertation.

The Dissertation— A dissertation is required of all doctoral candidates.
The paper must demonstrate the candidate's mastery of his/her research
and reflect the results of an original investigation in the principal field of study.
The goal should be to make a definite original contribution to knowledge
in the field. The notation "R," to indicate research in progress, is made in
the candidate's academic record.

Dissertation Review Meeting— Upon acceptance of the dissertation
by the candidate's adviser, the candidate must follow procedures accept-
able to his/her department and College Dean in providing copies for review
by the dissertation committee. College Dean and graduate coordinator. The
candidate shall then request a formal meeting of the dissertation committee,
at a time convenient to all members, to secure dissertation approval. The
dissertation must be approved in writing by each member of the committee.

The Graduate School — 33

Publication of the Dissertation -Following dissertation approval by
the committee, three copies of the dissertation and two copies of an abstract
must be submitted to the College Dean. The program's sponsoring depart-
ment may also require a copy for its archives.

The dissertation must be microfilmed according to the plan provided
by University Microfilm, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

Re-examination -A student who fails the candidacy examination, or
any part of the comprehensive examination, or any of the examinations in
foreign languages and/or computer language, may request re-examination
not earlier than one semester following the time of failure, nor later than
one year after that date. No student is permitted a third examination without
a recommendation to that effect from the degree program's sponsoring
department and the approval of the Graduate Council.

Application for Graduation — Formal application for graduation must
be filed with the dean of the student's college no later than two months prior
to the University's published degree-granting date at which the candidate
expects to receive the doctoral degree.

MASTER'S DEGREE PROGRAMS

The Graduate School offers Master of Arts and Master of Science
degrees in most academic fields plus the professional degrees Master of
Business Administration and Master of Education. See below for specific
degree fields. All students working toward a master's degree must satisfy
The Graduate School policies set forth in this catalog. Most departments
have additional special program requirements; students must be equally
familiar with departmental requirements.

Under certain circumstances a specific Graduate School requirement
for the master's degree may be satisfied by means of substitution. In no case
are requirements waived. Requests for substitutions must be made by peti-
tion of the College Dean after approval by the student's adviser and depart-
ment chairperson or graduate studies coordinator.

Master of Arts degrees are offered in the following:

Adult/Community Education Industrial and Labor Relations

Art Music

Art Therapy Physics

Chemistry Psychology

Counseling Services Public Affairs

Criminology Sociology

English Spanish Language and

Geography Literature

History Student Personnel Services

Master of Science degrees are offered in:

Biology Health & Physical Education

Business (Sport Sciences)

Chemistry Mathematics

Exceptionality (Adult) Nursing

Food and Nutrition Physics

.Geography Safety Sciences

Speech-Language Pathology

34— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

A Master of Business Administration degree (MBA) is offered.

Master of Education degrees are

Art

Biology

Business

Chemistry

Communications Media

Education of Exceptional

Children
Educational Psychology
Elementary Education
Elementary Mathematics
Elementary Science
Elementary or Secondary

School Counseling

offered in the following;
English
Geography
German

Home Economics
Mathematics
Music
Physics
Reading
Science
Social Science
Spanish
Speech-Language Pathology

The Thesis/No Thesis Option, Master's Programs

Several lUP master's degree programs offer the graduate student a
thesis/no-thesis option.

When the no-thesis option is chosen, additional approved course work-
usually six or more credit hours — is frequently required.

The typical committee thesis arrangement (3-6 s.h.) has the student
working with a committee of four faculty members including the student's
adviser and two faculty members, one of whom may or may not be a member
of the program's department. The committee may include an off-campus
person with special expertise as part of the four if requested by the depart-
ment and approved by the Graduate Dean.

DEPARTMENT

DEGREE

THESIS

CREDITS

COMMENTS

Adult/Community Ed.

Optional

AC645 may be
substituted for
the thesis.

Art

MEd

Required
Required

30
30

Art Therapy

Required

Biology

MEd

Required

Optional

32
30
33

Thesis

Thesis
No Thesis

Business

MBA
MEd
MS

No Thesis

Optional

30
30

Chemistry

MA
MS

MEd

Optional
Required
Optional

30
30
30

Thesis
Thesis
Thesis

Comnnunications Media

MEd

Optional

30
36

Thesis
No Thesis

Counselor Ed

MEd
MA

Optional
Optional

33
36
39

Thesis
No Thesis

Criminology

Optional

Thesis

The Graduate School — 35

DEPARTMENT

DEGREE

THESIS

CREDITS

COMMENTS

Educational Psychology

MEd

Optional

33
36

Thesis
No Thesis

Elementary Education

MEd

Optional

30
36

Thesis
No Thesis

Elementary Mathematics

MEd

Optional

30
30

Thesis
No Thesis

Elementary Science

MEd

Optional

30
33

Thesis
No Thesis

Emotionally Disturbed

MEd

Optional

33
36

Thesis
No Thesis

English

Optional

30
30

Thesis
No Thesis

MEd

Optional

30
30

Thesis
No Thesis

Exceptionality

Optional

33
36

Thesis
No Thesis

Food and Nutrition

Optional

30
33

Thesis
No Thesis

Geography

MEd

Optional

30
36

Thesis
No Thesis

Optional

30
36

Thesis
No Thesis

Optional

30
36

Thesis
No Thesis

German

MEd

Optional

Gifted and Talented

MEd

Optional

33
36

Thesis
No Thesis

Health & Physical Ed.

Optional

30
36

Thesis
No Thesis

History

Optional

30
36

Thesis
No Thesis

Home Economics

MEd

Optional

30
33

Thesis
No Thesis

Industrial & Labor

Relations

Optional

Thesis (3-6 crs)

Learning Disabilities

MEd

Optional

33
36

Thesis
No Thesis

Mathematics

MEd

Optional

30
30

Thesis
No Thesis

Optional

30
30

Thesis
No Thesis

Mental Retardation

MEd

Optional

33
36

Thesis
No Thesis

Music

In Music Performance

Recital

In Theory or Musical

Composition

Optional

Musical
Composition

36— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

DEPARTMENT

DEGREE THESIS

CREDITS COMMENTS

In Music History
In Music Education

MA
MA

Required
Optional

31
30

MEd

Optional

Nursing

Optional

38
44

Physics

MS
MEd

Required
Optional

Optional

30
30
33
30
33

Political Science
International Studies

Optional

Public Affairs

No Thesis

Professional Growth

MEd

Required

Psychology
Community
General Experimental

Required
Required

45
33

Reading

MEd

Optional

32
36

Safety Sciences

Optional

Social Science

MEd

Optional

30
36

Sociology

Optional

30
36

Spanish

MEd
MA

Optional
Optional

30
33
30
33

Speech-Language
Pathology

MEd
MS

Optional
Optional

36
36
36
36

Student Personnel
Services

Optional

33
33

Course Work or
Thesis or Recital
Course Work or
Thesis or Recital

Thesis
No Thesis

Thesis
No Thesis
Thesis
No Thesis

Internship
required if Thesis
Option not
chosen.
Internship
required

4 credit thesis

required

4 credit thesis

required

4 credit thesis

required

Thesis
No Thesis

3-6 credits of
thesis option is
included.

Thesis
No Thesis

Thesis
No Thesis
Thesis
No Thesis

Thesis
No Thesis
No Thesis
No Thesis

Thesis
No Thesis

The Graduate School — 37

MASTER OF EDUCATION
CURRICULUM REQUIREMENTS

All Master of Education degrees at lUP are patterned as indicated
below. The goal is to assure the student strength in humanistic and be-
havioral areas as well as professional developnnent in selected subject
specialty areas. Specific course descriptions are presented by department
in the catalog section which follows:

I. Professional Development Area (nine s.h.)

A. Humanistic Studies (three s.h.)
One of the following courses:

FE 611 Historical Foundations of Education

FE 612 Philosophical Foundations of Education

FE 613 Social Foundations of Education

FE 514 Comparative Foundations of Education

B. Behavioral Studies (three s.h.)
One of the following courses:

Advanced Educational Psychology

Psychology of Adolescent Education

Behavioral Problems

Learning

Pupil Adjustment

Group Procedures (Elementary)

Group Procedures

Psychology of the Exceptional Child

C. Research (three s.h.)

GR 615 Elements of Research

I. Specialization Core (six s.h.)

FE 515 Curriculum Development
CM 600 Seminar in Learning Resources
OR

Department Methods or Curriculum Course(s)

I. Subject Area and/or Electives (11-15 s.h. maximum)

604

573

576

578

580

629

639

631

SCHOOL CERTIFICATION

Students admitted to The Graduate School who wish to work toward
certification in a specific field(s) should check the descriptions of certifica-
tion programs found in this catalog for requirements related to their pro-
gram(s) of interest. If a given certification program requires completion of
a master's degree, the master's degree procedures and regulations set forth
in this catalog apply. The Graduate School does not, however, certify
students; certification is processed by the Dean of the College of Education.

Principal Certification

lUP offers a competency-based school administrative certification pro-
gram in elementary and secondary education. Those who wish to pursue
this program must first be granted admission to the Graduate School. Before

38— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

applying, however, potential applicants should consult with the director of
the principal's certification program (Dean's Office, College of Education,
Stouffer Hall).

Graduate Study Beyond the Master's Degree

it is not unusual to find graduate students enrolling in more courses
than they need to meet the requirements of a master's degree. Such action
can be beneficial beyond the personal satisfactions which accrue, because
the added studies may be well received by employers whether in business,
government, or the school system in such matters as certification. However,
students should understand that most graduate schools have residency re-
quirements at the doctoral as well as master's level and frequently will ac-
cept no more than 30 graduate semester hours earned elsewhere as
applicable to a doctorate.

Degree Eligibility of lUP Teaching Staff

Members of the teaching faculty at lUP with the rank of Assistant Pro-
fessor or above (or equivalent), may not receive a graduate degree from
this institution. This rule applies also to any faculty members employed at
lUP full-time at the Instructor rank unless such an individual is already an
approved candidate for a degree in the Graduate School of lUP at the time
he/she is given full-time employment as an Instructor. Faculty members may,
however, register for work in The Graduate School and apply the credit
toward graduate degrees to be conferred by other institutions.

General Service Courses — 39

GENERAL SERVICE COURSES

The following Graduate School courses are taught by selected depart-
mental faculty and are open to all qualified graduate students independent
of degree or certification program. The student should check program ap-
plicability with his/her adviser, department chairperson, or graduate studies
coordinator.

RESEARCH

GR615 ELEMENTS OF RESEARCH 3 s.h.

Selection of a research problem, data collection, types of research, research reports,
and use of the library and computer in connection with research problems are studied.
Elements of statistics are introduced. This course provides background for prepara-
tion of the thesis and enables the student to become an intelligent consumer of prod-
ucts of academic research. Required of all students working toward the MEd degree.

*XX 850 THESIS 1-6 s.h.

For students writing the thesis. GR 850 should be scheduled for the semester in
which the student plans to complete his/her work.

*XX 851 RECITAL 2-4 s.h.

Required for students enrolled in the program Master of Arts in Music-Performance.
Graduate students in music education have the option to prepare and perform a for-
mal recital in their major performing area under the guidance of their private teacher.
Approval is granted from the area faculty of the student's performance major. ML)
851 should be scheduled for the semester in which the student plans to give the recital.

*XX 950 DISSERTATION 1-12 s.h. -Hours to be arranged

Students preparing a doctoral dissertation for credit must register for this course.
The number of credits assigned and the extent of time for which research activity
is scheduled depend upon the nature and scope of the individual student's research
problem and his/her general doctoral program.

*Each Academic department utilizes its own two-letter prefix.

NOTE: Credits for both thesis and dissertation if not completed during the semester
scheduled are recorded as RESEARCH IN PROGRESS. They remain so until the
paper is approved. THEY DO NOT AUTOMATICALLY REVERT TO THE GRADE OF
"P in a specific length of time. Also, thesis and dissertation can be programmed above
the regular load.

40— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

STATISTICS

GR 516 STATISTICAL METHODS I 3 s.h.

Measurement and statistical techniques as used in administration and educational
research. Basic descriptive statistics, including measures of central tendency, vari-
ability and correlation are developed. Reliability and validity of test scores with em-
phasis on use of statistical techniques studied and their interpretation.

GR 517 STATISTICAL METHODS II 3 s.h.

Using computer programs, a wide array of statistical procedures for research workers
are explored. Basic concepts of statistical inference and prediction are reviewed,
including regression analysis and prediction, hypothesis testing, analysis of variance
and covariance, and partial and multiple correlation. Emphasis on use of computer
and interpretation of computer print-outs along with understanding techniques
employed. No computer knowledge is necessary. Prerequisite: GR 516 or equivalent.

OTHER COURSES

GR 681 SPECIAL TOPICS 1-3 s.h.

Group study of course material not offered in other graduate courses.

GR 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 s.h.

Individualized in-depth study of an approved topic directed by a participating faculty
member and approved administratively.

NOTE: Neither GR 681 nor GR 699 may be scheduled without prior written approval
of the Graduate Dean.

SS 599 CONTEMPORARY EUROPE 3 s.h.

A study/tour program in Europe, commonly of three weeks duration each summer.
Itinerary differs, but normally includes London, Paris, and Rome, Florence, Austria,
and Switzerland, among others. Program atmosphere is informal and always fun and
tiring (lots of walking). Informal lectures on site, guided tours. Academic work includes
reading before departure and keeping a daily log.

ED 595 INTERNATIONAL STUDYTOUR IN EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Provides an analysis of educational programs and methodology in selected coun-
tries. Introduces students to series of diverse educational experiences. Special
attention to teaching techniques, innovative curricula and school organizational
patterns. Teaching takes place on site in selected countries.

General Service Courses — 41

SUPERVISED LABORATORY EXPERIENCE
(TEACHING)

The following course, designed for cooperating teachers and others
working with student teachers, is open to persons having a teaching cer-
tificate and teaching experience.

ED 540 SUPERVISION OF STUDENT TEACHING

Designed for cooperating teachers and others working with student teachers, this
course provides opportunity for the development of pertinent materials and for con-
tinuous evaluation of various aspects of the student teaching program. Stress is also
given to evaluate procedures used in working with prospective teachers. Basic prin-
ciples underlying an effective student teaching program are examined from a
theoretical and applied viewpoint. Prerequisite: Teaching certificate and teaching
experience.

*^^

Programs and Courses — 43
Anthropology

GRADUATE PROGRAMS
AND COURSES

ANTHROPOLOGY

Anthropology is the study of human biological and cultural evolution.
The discipline is organized into four sub-fields: sociocultural anthropology,
physical anthropology, linguistics and archaeology. The breadth of anthro-
pology gives the discipline wide applicability to a variety of careers and
lifetime undertakings.

Although there is presently no graduate degree program in anthropology,
courses in anthropology are a component of the MEd degree in Social
Science and may be used as electives for MA degrees in other programs.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

AN 514 ETHNOLOGY OF NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS 3 s.h.

Review of culture history and culture area characteristics of Indians of North America.
Representative groups at different levels of economic, social and political complexity
chosen for more detailed study related to historical, functional, ecological and
psychological concepts. Current living conditions of Native Americans ranging from
lifestyles on the reservation to urban settings examined in view of recent theories
of social and cultural change.

AN 520 FIELD SCHOOL IN ARCHAEOLOGY 6 s.h.

Current strategies and techniques in archaeological excavation research applied
to prehistorical and/or historic sites in Indiana and adjacent areas. Relationships of
archaeological and social science paradigms of archaeological data, national and
state conservation policies, and archaeological study of culture change examined
in excavation context.

AN 522 CULTURE AND PERSONALITY 3 s.h.

Studies personality traits unique to prescribed cultural or institutional settings. Sub-
ject matter includes socialization, emotional expression, kinesics. deviant roles, cultural
aspects of mental disturbance, and value orientation. Some attention given to research
methods employed in the discipline.

AN 571 CULTURAL AREA STUDIES 3 s.h.

Analysis of prehistoric, and contemporary aspects of ethnological studies in a culture
area. Examines social organization, linguistic ties, cultural ecology, folklore, mythology,
artistic expression and world view in a particular culture area. This course may be
repeated according to selection of culture areas by instructors responsible for the
course. The following culture areas are initially available: AN 571 A CULTURAL AREA
STUDIES: JAPAN; AN 571C CULTURAL AREAS STUDIES: THE CARIBBEAN.

44 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

AN 691 STUDIES IN ANTHROPOLOGY 3 s.h.

Surveys anthropological approach to human biological and cultural heritage with
special reference to physical variability of human populations, past and present.
Stresses relationship between culture and processes of biological evolution.

AN 692 COMPARATIVE CULTURES 3 s.h.

Comparative study of selected examples of world cultures ranging from hunting
and gathering groups to modern industrial systems viewed as adaptations to their
geographical, cultural and social environments. Emphasis on the universal features
of culture.

AN 693 THE SCIENCE OF CULTURE 3 s.h.

Examination to major theories of cultural anthropology employed to account for
variety and structure of human cultures. Worldwide data utilized; interplay between
data and theory emphasized.

AN 694 ANTHROPOLOGY SEMINAR 3 s.h.

Considers conceptual problems and definitions in anthropology. Formulations of
a variety of research problems central in anthropology emphasized.

AN 695 PREHISTORY 3 s.h.

Comparative study of specific cultural trajectories and cultural processes leading
toward the emergence of urban society, political differentiation, the state, social
stratification, craft specialization and militarization. Various culture change models
examined using archaeological excavation data from China, India, Egypt,
Mesopotamia, Africa, and Middle and South America.

ART AND ART EDUCATION

The following curricula make it possible for a mature student capable
of self-direction to select a program suited to individual needs with the help
of an adviser. In effect, the student and adviser can tailor-make a program
of study.

Procedure for Admission (departmental approval)

1 . The student must file a "letter of intent" stating the applicant's area(s)
of specialization and reasons for these choices. The area of
specialization is subject to review including one revision in consulta-
tion with the student's advisory committee. This review will take place
between six and 1 2 semester hours. It is the student's responsibility
to arrange for the review.

2. For admission to the MEd program, a student must have completed
an undergraduate degree program in Art Education. To be admitted
to the MEd and Certification or the MA in studio art, the candidate
must possess a BS in Art Education, BFA or BA with a studio major
or equivalent.

Research and Independent Study

Independent Study: A student may select a specific problem for one
to three semester hours and pursue it in off-campus study with the help of
an adviser. The student will present a proposal for approval to the adviser
of his/her choice and the director of graduate studies. The study will be

Programs and Courses — 45
Anthropology
Art and Art Education

reviewed by the advisory committee and juried at the end by the same
committee.

Thesis: Under both thesis and independent study, the final product may
be a one-artist show of the minor and major area. The show will be juried
by the thesis committee, which will be composed of the advisory committee.
The show will be accompanied by a written statement, sketch books,
catalogue, notes or other methods of reporting deemed appropriate by the
committee. All shows will leave some permanent evidence of their existence
such as slides, photographs or catalogues.

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN ART

See page for additional information on the MEd degree.
I. Professional Development Area (nine s.h.)

A. Humanistic Studies (three s.h.)-One of the following:
FE 611, FE 612, FE 613, or FE 514.

B. Behavioral Studies (three s.h.)-One of the following:

EP 604, EP 573, EP 576, EP 578, EP 580, CE 629, or CE 639, or
EX 631.

C. Research (three s.h.)

GR 615, Elements of Research

II. Specialization Core (six s.h.)-One of the following courses:
FE 515, CM 600, AT 610, AT 611, AT 614, *AT 613.

III. Subject Area and/or Elective

AR Studio courses are listed in catalog (nine s.h.)

Art Elective (three s.h.)
AR 850 Thesis (three s.h.)

For description of FE courses see section on FOUNDATIONS OF
EDUCATION; for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE
courses, COUNSELOR EDUCATION; for EX courses, SPECIAL EDUCA-
TION; for CM course, COMMUNICATION MEDIA.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

MASTER OF ARTS IN ART

Studio Major (AR 640 through AR 668) no less than 12

Studio Minor (AR 640 through AR 668) no less than 6

Art Seminar (AR 615) 3

Thesis (AR 850) 3

Electives 6

TOTAL 30

46 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MASTER OF EDUCATION PLUS CERTIFICATION
Undergraduate Requirements

Elementary Education (AR 317, EL 421, EL 422) 11

Secondary Certification (AR 318, ED 441, ED 442) 11

Elementary and Secondary Certification 22

Graduate Requirements

Seminar in Learning Resources (CM 600) 3

Educational Psychology (EP 604 or EP 618) 3
Foundations of Education (FE 611, FE 612, FE 613,

FE 514, FE 515) 3

Art Education (Select Two: AT 610, AT 611, AT 612, AT 614) 6

AT 613 Research in Art Education 3

GR 615 Elements of Research 3

AR 850 Thesis 3

Studio 9

For description of CM course, see section on COMMUNICATIONS
MEDIA; for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for FE courses,
FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

GRADUATE MINOR IN MEDIA

Graduate students may, with the approval of their adviser, obtain a minor
in Media at lUP. The minor consists of a minimum of six semester hours
of work in graduate level courses in Media and may include as many hours
in Media as are approved by the student's graduate program adviser.

The minor may include any combination of courses offered by the
Communications Media Department except CM 630 Classification and
Cataloging of Learning Resources, CM 660 Management of Learning
Resources Programs and CM 699 Internship. These courses are designed
for the professional Media Center Manager rather than the person minor-
ing in Media. Media minors may be designed around the list of courses under
Communications Media. All courses are three semester hour credits.

The number of semester hours in each of these programs represents
the minimum. The student's committee reserves the right to recommend
more.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

AH 506 ANCIENT MIGRATORY ART 3 s.h.

Survey of painting, architecture, and sculpture of Prehistoric Man; Egypt and the
Near East; as well as Art of Primitive Man of later times— The American Indian, African
Art and the Art of the Oceanic.

Programs and Courses — 47
Art and Art Education

AH 507 MEDIEVAL ART 3 s.h.

Prerequisite Art History majors, by special arrangement, Art and architecture of
Europe during Middle Ages, beginning with a study of Early Christian and Byzantine
art, and concluding with art of Romanesque and Gothic periods.

AH 508 ITALIAN RENAISSANCE ART 3 s.h.

Art History majors, by special arrangement. Covers span of Italian art from 1400's
through 1850 and Mannerist movement. Special attention paid to great masters of
the period.

AH 509 BAROQUE AND ROCOCO ART 3 s.h.

General survey of art from 1575-1775. Will include architecture, sculpture, paint-
ing and other arts.

AH 519 MUSEOLOGY 3-6 s.h.

The student will work in the University museum under the supervision of the museum
director. Museum techniques and practices will be stressed in an "on-the-job" train-
ing situation. The role of the graduate student will be that of "acting curator" of specific
areas of his/her choice, and supervising selection and hanging of shows.

AH 522 ART IN AMERICA 3 s.h.

Surveys American art and its relation to development of American ideas and ideals.

AH 523 SEMINAR IN ART CRITICISM 3 s.h.

Explores philosophic theories of art and art products. An attempt to relate these
theories to senses, and form itself— and to technical, psychological and cultural values.
Primary concepts explored are play, illusion, imitation, beauty, emotional expression,
imagination, empathy, creativity and experience. Time will be given to forms of art
that are not primarily visual, including music, dance, literature, and poetry.

AH 524 ART OF THE EAST 3 s.h.

Nature of Eastern Art's meaning and place in contemporary world culture.

AH 625 ARCHITECTURAL 'NFLUENCES IN

A CONTEMPORARY SOCIETY 3 s.h.

Experimental problems in structure and aesthetics as related to architecture. At-
tempts are made to search out the historical roots of many contemporary styles of
architecture.

AH 626 PRE-COLUMBIAN ART 3 s.h.

Art of Mezo-American cultures, Mayas, Aztecs and Incas, as influenced by Oceanic
migrations.

AH 628 WORLD ART SINCE 1875 3 s.h.

Discoveries and advances in artistic expression in modern times. Subject matter
for study may be found in any or all of the arts.

All art history courses are open as electives to all students.

AR 615 ART SEMINAR 3 s.h.

Opportunities for student to discuss problems in art related to studio interests.
Thesis/Show proposals will also be prepared. For MA candidates only.

AR 616 DIRECTED STUDIES 3-6 S.h.

Offered in instances where a particular course is needed by a student, but is not
on the regular schedule rotation. Approval must be secured from the adviser, the
instructor involved and the Graduate Coordinator.

48— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

AR 640 GRADUATE STUDIO IN CERAMICS 3-18 s.h.

Prerequisite— at least one year of undergraduate ceramics. All aspects of hand-
forming, decorating, glazing, and firing will be dealt witfi. This may include body and
glaze formulation and reduction, oxidation, salt, wood, and raku firing as well as thrown,
coiled, or slab construction or combinations thereof. Includes historic and contem-
porary ceramics and philosophies of the craft.

AR 644 GRADUATE STUDIO IN FIBERS 3-18 s.h.

Fundamentals of fiber construction and processes. Emphasis on experimental
approaches to fiber design and construction. Designed to meet the needs of begin-
ning as well as advanced students.

AR 647 GRADUATE STUDIO IN JEWELRY AND METAL WORK 3-18 s.h.
Advanced study dealing with specialized problems in design and execution of metal
work and jewelry. A thesis may be developed depending upon research in one of
areas relating to this field, history, materials, tools, processes, or teaching techniques
of the craft.

AR 650 GRADUATE STUDIO IN SCULPTURE 3-18 s.h.

An advanced course in which students are expected to work on challenging prob-
lems in sculpture. A student may explore one or several sculpture or modeling media.

AR 653 GRADUATE STUDIO IN WOODWORKING 3-18 s.h.

Specialized study and experiences in the design and execution of problems relating
to wood as a crafts material. Opportunity is presented to more intensive exploration
of materials and processes of this craft employing both hand and power tools.

AR 661 GRADUATE STUDIO IN DRAWING 3-18 s.h.

Drawing as a language and continued development of skill in communication and
expression in all kinds of materials and media. Drawing as an intimate work of the
artist will be stressed.

AR 662 GRADUATE STUDIO IN OIL PAINTING 3-18 s.h.

Traditional and contemporary methods and techniques in area of plastic painting
media. Composition, in relation to modern painters' problems. Opportunity is presented
for exploration and specialization in depth as well as breadth.

AR 665 GRADUATE STUDIO IN WATERCOLOR PAINTING 3-18 s.h.

Painting in transparent watercolor, gouache, mixed media and with new water solu-
ble paints, such as casein and acrylic polymer tempera. Traditional, current and ex-
perimental approaches with emphasis on design and emotional content.

AR 668 GRADUATE STUDIO IN PRINTMAKING 3-18 s.h.

Prerequisite— AR 217 or its equivalent. Modes, media, material, techniques and
processes of graphic arts and their use in expression. The student may concentrate
on intensive exploration of one media in depth or explore a number of media for breadth
of experience.

Studio courses may be taken for a total of 18 semester hours in one studio. No
more than 6 semester hours in one studio may be taken during any one semester.

AT 610 ART AND THE EXCEPTIONAL CHILD 3 s.h.

Designed to consider characteristics and needs of the mentally retarded and the

intellectually gifted child with particular emphasis on art aspects of their education.

Programs and Courses — 49
Art and Art Education

AT 611 ART CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT IN

ART EDUCATION 3 s.h.

A seminar and study of curricula at all levels. Particular attention given to individual
needs of class participants in development of curricula pertinent to their own teaching
situations. For those students who have not yet taught, theoretical and practical prob-
lems will be examined.

AT 612 SUPERVISION AND ADMINISTRATION IN

ART EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Responsibilities, functions and duties of Art Supervisors and Administrators.

AT 613 RESEARCH IN ART EDUCATION 3 S.h.

Required of all Art Education majors. Reviews past and present research focusing
upon the methodologies pertinent to the field. Prerequisite for this course, GR 615,
is to be scheduled within the first four to eight semester hours. AT 613 must be taken
as soon after as possible, but within the first 12 semester hours.

AT 614 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF ART EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Considers art education in Europe, United States and Canada, designed to give
the student background.

AT 654 INTRODUCTION TO ART THERAPY 3 s.h.

A survey of the concepts and theories, applications and procedures of Art Therapy.
Consideration of selections of materials and media for varying diagnostic and
therapeutic problems, rehabilitory and psychiatric settings, and limitations of the art
therapist. Prerequisite is admission to graduate school. Basically the course will serve
individuals with clinical backgrounds (psychology, social workers, child care, speech
therapy, special education, art education, art therapy), and those with a primary identity
in one ore more of the arts.

AT 655 ART THERAPY SEMINAR 3 s.h.

Provides practical considerations in therapy to prepare student to enter a prac-

ticum experience. Prerequisite is Introduction to Art Therapy 654 or the equivalent.

AT 656 ART THERAPY PRACTICUM 6 s.h.

A professional supervisory team will guide the student in a semester experience
in settings where they will practice art therapy. Discussion, analysis, planning, and
data gathering will be in the student's area of interest. Minimum required courses
for the Art Therapy Degree are the prerequisites.

AT 657 METHODOLOGY IN ART THERAPY 3 s.h.

This course will be a lecture/experiential situation in which the art therapy major
will become involved with treatment approaches for use with individuals and groups
in various clinical and agency settings.

MASTER OF ARTS IN ART THERAPY

The Master of Arts degree in Art Therapy is designed to fulfill the
minimum graduate requirements for an art therapist. Following the guidelines
of the American Art Therapy Association, the master's degree in Art Therapy
at lUP is designed to provide the theoretical and practical art therapy skills
which are applied in clinical, education or rehabilitative settings. The pro-
gram is an interdisciplinary one of art, art therapy, psychology and related
areas. A practicum of 600 hours under the supervision of an art therapist
in an applicable setting is required.

in addition to meeting the requirements for admission to the Graduate
School, an interview with a portfolio of the candidate's art work will be re-

50— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

quired and an evaluation of the candidate's interests in therapeutic work
will follow. It is suggested that graduate students in art therapy have a
background in human, normal, and abnormal psychology and have
background suitable to professional work in the field. Upon the director's
advisement students may be required to take additional undergraduate
course work if they are found to lack proficiency in art or the social sciences.
Graduate credit is not given for undergraduate courses which may be
required.

The M.A. in Art Therapy requires the successful completion of a
minimum of 42 semester hours.

The following courses are required:
AT 654 Introduction to Art Therapy (3 s.h.)
AT 655 Seminar in Art Therapy (3 s.h.)
AT 656 Art Therapy Practicum (6 s.h.)
AT 657 Methodologies in Art Therapy (3 s.h.)
AT 650 Thesis and Research in Art Therapy (3-6 s.h.)
PC 643 Methods of Intervention for Art Therapy (3 s.h.)

Required out of department courses (minimum number determined by
program director and the student's undergraduate preparation):
PC 554 Developmental Psychology (3 s.h.)
PC 633 Psychology of Personality (3 s.h.)
PC 634 Abnormal Psychology (3 s.h.)
PC 635 Advanced Psychopathology (3 s.h.)
PC 646 Clinical Group Techniques (3 s.h.)
PC 681 Family Therapy (3 s.h.)
EP 662 Psychotherapy and Group Dynamics (3 s.h.)
CE 646 Encounter and Sensitivity in Counseling (3 s.h.)

Electives may be chosen from the following:
AR 616 Directed Studies in Art Therapy (3 s.h.)
PC 545 Principles of Behavior Modification (3 s.h.)
PC 561 Motivation (3 s.h.)
PC 574 Adult Development and Aging (3 s.h.)
PC 578 Psychology of Death and Dying (3 s.h.)
PC 641 Psychological Assessment I (3 s.h.)
EP 573 Psychology of Adolescent Education (3 s.h.)
EP 580 Pupil Adjustment (3 s.h.)
EP 604 Advanced Educational Psychology (3 s.h.)
EX 631 Psychology of Exceptional Children and Youth (3 s.h.)
EX 638 Psychology of the Gifted (3 s.h.)
EX 639 Psychology of the Mentally Retarded (3 s.h.)
EX 655 Education of Children with Social and Emotional

Maladjustments (3 s.h.)
GR 615 Elements of Research (3 s.h.)

*Psychopharmacology (Drugs & Behavior) to be offered, Fall 1984.

For descriptions of PC courses, see section on PSYCHOLOGY; for EP
courses, see section on EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for EX courses,
SPECIAL EDUCATION; for description of GR course, see entry under
GENERAL SERVICE COURSES.

The practicum is based upon the minimum AATA education re-
quirements. Practicum course .work extends over two semesters and requires
at least 600 hours in the field. If conducted during the normal semester,

Programs and Courses — 51
Art and Art Education
Biology

two to three working days per week are required. The same number of hours
may be provided by concentrating summer work in a shortened period or
by evening work over a more extended period. The 600 hours will be spent
under qualified supervision in agencies which may be in a locality of the
student's choice and/or desired area of interest.

The Art Therapy Director assists the student in securing the site and
makes scheduled visitations to evaluate the student's progress, modality
of treatment and daily supervision, as well as to observe the student func-
tioning as an Art Therapist. Uppermost in such visitations is the quality and
applicability of preparation by the student Art Therapist.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

AT 654 INTRODUCTION TO ART THERAPY 3 s.h.

A survey of the concepts and theories, applications, and procedures of Art Therapy.
Considerations of selections of materials and media for varying diagnostic and
therapeutic problems, rehabilitory and psychiatric settings and limitations of the art
therapist. Prerequisite is admission to the Graduate School. Basically, the course
will serve individuals with clinical backgrounds (psychology, social workers, child care,
speech therapy, special education, art education, art therapy), and those with a primary
identity in one or more of the arts.

AT 655 ART THERAPY SEMINAR 3 s.h.

Provides practical considerations in therapy to prepare students to enter a prac-
ticum experience. Prerequisite is AT 654 or equivalent.

AT 656 ART THERAPY PRACTICUM 6 s.h.

This will be a professional on site experience as an art therapist. The student will
assume the staff responsibilities expected at the agencies; this will include art therapy
treatment planning, inservice training, attendance at staff meetings. In addition to
art therapy group work, the student will work with individuals, couples and families.
A professional supervisory team will guide the student in the semester's experiences
where they will practice art therapy as interns.

AT 657 METHODOLOGIES IN ART THERAPY 3 s.h.

This course will be a lecture/experiential situation in which Art Therapy majors will
become involved with the art therapy approaches for use with individuals and groups
of different treatment modalities in various clinical and agency settings. Students will
participate in diagnostic and therapeutic processes through art work. (This is a prereq-
uisite to the Art Therapy Practicum, AT 656.)

It is the feeling of the University and the American Art Therapy Association that
the acquisition of competence in the professional field demands two academic years
of study.

BIOLOGY

Requirements for Admission -to be admitted to the Biology Depart-
ment, the applicant must have completed the requirements for a bachelor's
degree from an accredited college or university which should include a ma-
jor in biology, one year of inorganic chemistry, one semester of organic and
one semester of calculus or statistics. Applicants with undergraduate defi-
ciencies may be required to register for appropriate courses.

The Requirements for Candidacy for an M.Ed. Degree are-the
satisfactory completion of 15 semester hours of graduate work, with at least

52 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

eight hours of biological sciences. For those students electing the thesis
option, requirements are the same as those for MS students beginning with
the second paragraph below. For those students electing the non-thesis op-
tion, requirements are the same as those for MS students beginning with
the third paragraph below.

The Requirements for Candidacy for an MS Degree are— satisfactory
completion of 1 5 semester hours of graduate work, with at least eight hours
in core courses.

The selection of an adviser and a committee of at least two additional
faculty members to guide the candidate in completing a tentative program
and selecting a thesis problem.

An official application for admission to candidacy, including the tentative
program which has been approved by the adviser, must be submitted to
the Biology Department graduate committee.

Candidates for all degrees are expected to maintain an average of not
lower than B. Continuance in the graduate program for those receiving two
course grades below the minimum is contingent upon favorable review of
the graduate committee.

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN BIOLOGY

Students working for this degree have two options, a non-thesis pro-
gram with a 33 credit hour requirement and a thesis program with a 30 credit
hour requirement. The only way in which these programs differ is in the credit
hour requirement noted above and that the thesis is required for the 30 credit
hour degree. Students working in either of these programs will complete
the appropriate number of hours in accordance with the following
requirements:

I. Professional Development area (nine s.h.)

A. Humanistics Studies — three s.h. to be selected from FE 611, 612,
and 613.

B. Behavioral Studies — three s.h. to be selected from EP 573, 576,
578, 583, 604, CE 639, and EX 631.

C. Research— three s.h. GR 615 required for all students (both options)

II. Specialization Core (six s.h.)

Six s.h. to be selected from Bl 661 , FE 515 and CM 600. Biology Prac-
ticum (Bl 661) is strongly recommended.

III. Subject Matter Concentration (15-18 s.h.)

Fifteen s.h. (for thesis program students) or 18 s.h. (for non-thesis
program students) to be selected from Bl 532 through Bl 699, Ml 500,
Bl 850, GS 530, and CH 651.

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF
EDUCATION; for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE
courses, COUNSELOR EDUCATION; for EX courses, SPECIAL EDUCA-
TION; for CM courses, COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA; for GS courses, GEO-
SCIENCE; for CH courses, CHEMISTRY.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

Programs and Courses — 53
Biology

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN BIOLOGY

Students working for this degree will complete 32 semester hours of
work in accordance with the following divisions:

I. Core Courses- 18-20 s.h. Bl 601 (Instrumentation), Bl 602 (Biometry),
Bl 610 (Seminar-two s.h.), and Bl 850 (two-four credits in thesis) are
required courses. The remaining hours of core credits include one
morphology-taxonomy course (chosen from Bl 532, 546, 551 , 575, 576,
578, and 620 through 625), and one physiology course (chosen from Bl
553, 652, 653, or 654), and one ecology course (chosen from Bl 563,
631, 635, or 640).

II. Elective Courses— 12-14 semester hours to be selected with the approval
of the adviser from the 500 and 600 level Biology courses. (With the ex-
ception to Bl 661) or from related science and mathematics courses.

III. Resident Requirements for the MS— the candidate must take a minimum
of 26 of the semester hours required for graduation at lUP.

IV. Research Requirements for the MS — every candidate must present a
research thesis on an original topic approved by the candidate's advisory
committee. This is programmed as Bl 850 (thesis) for two to four credits.

V. Requirements for Completion of the MS

A. 1. All students in the MS program in the Biology Department must

pass a competency examination administered by the department
graduate committee. The purpose of this examination is to assure
that all of our graduates have a well proportioned knowledge of
the field of biology. The examination will also help point out the
student's major area of inadequate knowledge or training.

2. This examination is offered at a specific time twice each year. The
student may signify intentions of taking the examination by inform-
ing the graduate committee.

3. The student should plan to complete the entire exam by the end
of the second semester of full-time course work (or the equivalent).
A second attempt, if necessary, should come in the student's third
full-time semester. A third and final attempt is permitted only after
petition to, and approval of the Graduate Committee.

4. This will be the only departmental examination for the Master of
Science degree.

B. After the thesis has been accepted in its final written form by the can-
didate's committee and The Graduate School, the candidate will pre-
sent a public seminar reporting the results of his/her research.

For descriptions of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

54 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

In many courses in the Biology Department, additional laboratory time
may be required beyond the regularly scheduled periods.

Bl 532 COMPARATIVE VERTEBRATE ANATOMY 3 s.h.

Discussion of anatomy of representative vertebrates from a comparative point of
view. Stresses major organizational changes observed in vertebrate history. Two hours
lecture. 3 hours lab per week. Prerequisite: Bl 120.

Bl 546 DENDROLOGY 3 s.h.

Identification and the study of the taxonomy, distribution, silvics. wood properties,
mensuration and utilization of woody plants. Two hour lecture and three hours lab/
week. One or more Saturday and/or weekend field trips.

Bl 551 TAXONOMY OF PLANTS 3 S.h.

Includes collection, identification, and classification of vascular plant species with

special emphasis on family characteristics and phylogeny. Prerequisite: Plant Biology.

Bl 553 PHYSIOLOGY OF PLANTS 4 s.h.

A comprehensive study of physiological bases for organization and function of living
plants. Current literature is emphasized. Prerequisite; Biochemistry. Closed to students
with undergraduate Plant Physiology, Bl 351.

Bl 563 LIMNOLOGY 3 s.h.

An investigation into the physical, chemical, and biological aspects of inland waters
and their inter-relationships. Saturday or Sunday labs may be required. Prerequisite:
Ecology.

Bl 572 RADIATION BIOLOGY 3 s.h.

Basic aspects of nuclear physics, phenomena of radioactive isotopes and biological
effects and uses of such isotopes. Lab work utilizes instruments for detection and
measurement of radioactive nuclides. Prerequisites: two years Biology, one year
Physics, and General, Organic and Biochemistry.

Bl 575 MAMMALOGY 3 s.h.

General discussion of mammals emphasizing systematics, distribution, and structure-
function modifications related to their evolution. A paper is required.

Bl 576 PARASITOLOGY 3 s.h.

The parasitic protozoa, flatworms and roundworms. Major emphasis upon species
infesting man and includes their structure, physiology, ecology, life cycles and
pathogenicity. Arthropods involved in parasite transmission included. Prerequisites:
one year Biology. Vertebrate and Invertebrate Zoology.

Bl 578 MYCOLOGY 3 s.h.

The systematics. morphology and physiology of fungi, with emphasis on economi-
cally important and experimentally useful Myxomycophyta and Eumycophta. Not open
to students with undergraduate Bl 381. Mycology.

Bl 585 MICROTECHNIQUE 3 s.h.

Procedures involved in production of microscope slides. Techniques of preparing
whole mounts, microtome sections and serial sections of both plant and animal
materials.

Programs and Courses — 55
Biology

Bl 597 INTRODUCTION TO ROCKY MOUNTAIN ECOLOGY 4 s.h.

Flora and fauna of each of the life zones described, collected, and identified. Takes
place in Bridger-Teton National Forest Wyoming. Tents, food, horses, etc. are pro-
vided by professional outfitter. Offered only in the summer. No prerequisites.

Bl 601 INSTRUMENTATION 3 s.h.

Introduction to the variety of techniques and procedures of instrument-assisted data
gathering appropriate to the biologist.

Bl 602 BIOMETRY 3 s.h.

The choice and application of standard, efficient, and practical statistical techniques
for data analyses in common biological research situations.

Bl 610 BIOLOGY SEMINAR 1 s.h.

An opportunity to become acquainted with various areas of current research in
biology. One hour meeting per week.

Bl 620 PROTOZOOLOGY 3 s.h.

Common and representative genera of all groups of free-living protozoa. Emphasis
placed upon structure, physiology, ecology and life histories of these organisms. An
independent research project is required.

Bl 621 PRINCIPLES OF ANIMAL TAXONOMY 3 s.h.

Study of classification system and its application to identification of animals. Basic

principles of taxonomy rules of nomenclature, a synoptic history of classification and

the "old" and "new" taxonomy will be included. A taxonomic field study is required.

Bl 622 ADVANCED ORNITHOLOGY 3 s.h.

A detailed study of bird populations, behavior, and movement including the an-
nual cycle. Prerequisite: identification by site and song of local birds.

Bl 623 ANIMAL MORPHOGENESIS 3 s.h.

Factors that influence and control the differentiation of organs, tissues, and cells.
Emphasis is placed on experimental procedures and methods. Prerequisites: Em-
bryology of Comparative Anatomy, Organic Chemistry and Biochemistry, and Genetics.

Bl 624 ADVANCED ENTOMOLOGY 3 s.h.

Insect morphology, including external and internal organization of different species
of insects. Comparisons between species included. An independent research study
and seminar presentation required.

Bl 625 HERPETOLOGY 3 s.h.

A comprehensive survey of the classes Amphibia and Reptilia, including their

classification, structure, origin, evolution, phylogenetic relationships, distribution, and

natural history. Special emphasis is placed on the herpetofauna of Pennsylvania.

Bl 631 PLANT ECOLOGY 3 s.h.

Nature and distribution of vegetation in relation to environmental factors. Field
investigations of local plant communities constitute bulk of lab work. Prerequisites:
Field Botany, Plant Taxonomy or general knowledge of local flora.

Bl 635 TAXONOMY AND ECOLOGY OF BACTERIA 3 s.h.

Isolation, cultivation, classification and ecology of major groups of bacteria. Special

emphasis on principles of bacterial taxonomy and ecology. Prerequisite: Microbiology.

Bl 640 ANIMAL ECOLOGY 3 s.h.

Effect of environmental factors on animals, animals as members of communities,
their trophic relationships, their ecological distribution, population dynamics, and
aspects of animal behavior. A field or lab problem is required.

56— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Bl 652 MICROBIAL PHYSIOLOGY 4 s.h.

Physiological reactions involved in growth, reproduction, and death of microbes.
Energy production, substrate transport, metabolism, regulatory and control
mechanisms are discussed. Prerequisites: Microbiology and Biochemistry.

Bl 653 ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY 4 s.h.

Digestion and molecular transport of nutrients, gaseous exchanges, excretion,
muscular activity, and control by endocrine and neural elements. Prerequisite: Animal
Biology,

Bl 654 ENDOCRINOLOGY 4 s.h.

Phylogeny, embryology, micro-anatomy, and physiology of the endocrine tissues.
Prerequisites: course in anatomy and physiology.

Bl 663 IMMUNOLOGY 3 s.h.

Study of anatomy and function of immune system, physical and chemical proper-
ties of antigens and antibodies, nature of antigen-antibody interactions, humoral and
cell mediated immune responses and immunopathology. Prerequisites: Biochemistry
and Microbiology,

Bl 699 INDEPENDENT STUDIES 1-3 s.h.

Individual or small group instruction, by tutorial and intensive literature survey, in
a particular area not covered by a student's course-work or thesis research. By ar-
rangement with instructor and with approval of graduate director. Maximum of six
hours to be used toward degree.

Ml 500 PROBLEMS IN MARINE SCIENCE 3 s.h.

Independent study for the advanced student in marine sciences. Topics are selected
from areas offered by the Marine Consortium and studies are directed by the instructor
in that area. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.

Bl 850

THESIS

2-4 s.h.

Programs and Courses — 57
Biology
Business

BUSINESS

The College of Business offers three separate graduate programs: The
Master of Business Administration (MBA), the Master of Education in
Business (M.Ed.), and the Master of Science in Business (M.S.).

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION (MBA)

The Master of Business Administration program is intended to serve
the needs of both junior and senior level business and industrial executives
seeking additional knowledge and skills to do a more efficient job of prob-
lem solving and managerial decision making. Also, the program serves the
needs of students seeking advanced training in business management prior
to entry into a business career. The program is offered on a part-time or
full-time basis.

Core I of the program consists of 10 undergraduate prerequisite courses
(31 s.h.) that provide a foundation in the basic concepts and techniques used
in today's business world.

Core II consists of ten graduate level courses or thirty semester hours.
Of these, seven courses are required in the functional and applied areas
of business. The remaining courses are electives which may be concen-
trated in one functional area, such as Accounting, Finance, Marketing,
Management Information Systems or Management, by those students
wishing to develop an academic specialty within the broader field of business
administration, or the electives may be taken from any combination of those
areas or, with permission, from other related areas outside the College of
Business by those students wishing a Business degree covering a broader
range.

Normally the student with an undergraduate degree in Business Ad-
ministration would either go directly to the Core II subjects or would have
a minimal number of Core I or prerequisite subjects remaining.

However, a student with no undergraduate background in Business Ad-
ministration would need to take most or all of the prerequisite classes.
Therefore, for the student with no Business Administration background, com-
pleting both Core I and Core II will normally require two years of full-time
study to achieve the MBA degree. For the student with a recent bachelor's
degree in Business Administration, the requirements for the MBA can nor-
mally be completed in one year of full-time study.

Students who did not have all the Core I courses as undergraduates
may take these courses at lUP or, with prior permission, at other accredited
institutions. In some instances, course credit may be earned by examina-
tion for some prerequisite courses. In some cases, credit may be given for
other parallel educational experiences. For example, there are certain cor-
porate training programs in computer languages that might be accepted in
lieu of the introductory undergraduate computer course. Please contact the
Director of Graduate Studies in Business for information concerning the
prerequisite courses.

Students seeking enrollment in the MBA program or M.S. in Business
program must take the Graduate Management Admission Test (GMAT)
before being admitted to the program. Information about the GMAT can be
obtained from the Educational Testing Services, Princeton, NJ 08540 or from
the lUP Academic Services and Testing Center (Telephone 412-357-3050).

58— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

COURSE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MBA DEGREE

Core I: 31 s.h. in the following undergraduate courses with a grade of "C"
or better: AG 201 , AG 202, FS 310, MK 320, AD 235, EC 1 22, MG
360, MA 121, FS 215, and FS 241. Students will be given credit
for Core I, undergraduate prerequisite courses taken at lUP or at
other appropriate institutions with prior permission. Contact Direc-
tor of Graduate Studies in Business to ascertain the appropriateness
of such courses and to obtain pernnission to tal<e courses at any
other institutions. See lUP undergraduate catalog for course
descriptions.

Core II: (a) 7 courses (21 s.h.) in the following graduate courses: AG 607*,
EC 634, FS 601, FS 630, FS 640, MG 633, and MK 603.
(b) 3 courses (9 s.h.) chosen from among the following elective
courses:

Accounting: AG 501 , AG 51 2, AG 531 , AG 600, AG 603, AG 608.
Finance/MIS: FS 510, FS 520, FS 522, FS 550, FS 551 , FS 570,
FS 580, FS 602, FS 604, FS 631 , FS 632, FS 635,
FS 641 , FS 642.
Management/Marketing: MG 630, MG 631, MG 632, MG 635,
MG 636, MG 642, MG 645, MK 521,
MK 530, MK 531.
Other: 581/681 Special Topics courses offered by the AG, FS,
MG and MK Departments; and other business-related
courses with the prior approval of the Director of Graduate
Studies in Business.

Students may take one 500 level course without permission of
Director of Graduate Studies in Business. Additional 500 level
courses require prior approval. Students may elect graduate level
courses outside of the College of Business which are in related
fields as electives with approval of the Director of Graduate
Studies in Business.

* Students with undergraduate concentrations in Accounting are
not eligible for AG 607. Undergraduate Finance majors are not
eligible for FS 630. See Director of Graduate Studies in Business
for alternative course selections.

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN BUSINESS (M.Ed.)

The Master of Education in Business degree is designed to permit
business teachers to broaden their understanding of business, to study
current teaching procedures, and to update their knowledge in the new
technologies used in business.

Business Education teachers with appropriate prerequisites can earn,
at the graduate level, certification in accounting, data processing, marketing,
and distributive education while pursuing the Master of Education degree
program.

Distributive Education teachers seeking to broaden their background
In marketing, merchandising, and management may emphasize these areas
in the Master of Education degree program.

Programs and Courses — 59
Business

While the program was designed for students who have completed the
undergraduate curricula in Business Education or Distributive Education,
including certification requirements, other students may apply but will be
required to complete the undergraduate Business Education requirements
as a prerequisite. Individuals without an undergraduate degree in business
may pursue graduate work leading to certification in Distributive Education.

Cooperative Education certification may be earned by teachers holding
a valid Pennsylvania teaching certificate or its equivalent.

Upon admission to the Graduate School, each student is assigned an
adviser who will assist the student in scheduling his/her program of studies.
Prior to admission to candidacy for the degree of Master of Education in
Business, the student must take the Graduate Record Examination aptitude
test. Information about this examination can be obtained from the Educa-
tional Testing Services, Princeton, NJ 08540 or from the lUP Academic Ser-
vices and Testing Center (Telephone 412-357-3050).

COURSE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE M.Ed. DEGREE

Students must complete 30 semester hours for the degree distributed
as follows:

I. Professional Development Area — 3 courses (9 s.h.)

A. Humanistic Studies (3 s.h.)-One of the following: FE 61 1 , FE 612,
FE 613, or FE 514.

B. Behavioral Studies (3 s.h.)-One of the following: EP 604, EP 573,
EP 576, EP 578, CE 639, or EX 631.

C. Research (3 s.h.)

GR 615 Elements of Research

II. Specialized Core — 3 courses (9 s.h.)

AD 610, BE 650 and either BE 660 or BE 661 (NOTE: Students seeking
certification in Distributive Education may substitute DE 510 or DE 513
for BE 660 or 661.)

III. Subject Area and/or Thesis— 4 courses (12 s.h.)

AD 850 (3 s.h.). Thesis (optional) and/or any additional graduate courses
listed in this catalog under AD, AG, BE, DE, FS, MK or MG. Other related
courses may be allowed with the consent of the Director of Graduate
Studies in Business.

Courses in Specialized Core Area and Subject Area should be scheduled
early in the student's program.

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF
EDUCATION; for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE
courses, COUNSELOR EDUCATION; for EX course, SPECIAL EDUCATION.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN BUSINESS (M.S.)

The Master of Science in Business degree is designed primarily for
business people, industrial, personnel and government employees who are
interested in furthering their academic careers through study in Business

60— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Administration. The program is designed to allow these people to specialize
in an area of Business Administration and to take more courses in their
chosen specialty than would be allowed In the MBA program. In the MS in
Business program, such students may elect to take four courses of their
graduate work in the area of their chosen specialization.

In order to familiarize the student with the full range of business ac-
tivities, the student is required to take a series of undergraduate prerequisite
courses identical to the "Core I" requirements or undergraduate prerequisite
courses that are required by the MBA program. If the student did not have
these courses as an undergraduate, they will be taken at lUP, or, with prior
permission, they may be taken at some other accredited institutions. In some
instances, course credit may be given by examination for these prerequisite
courses. Please contact the Director of Graduate Studies in Business for
information concerning the prerequisite courses.

The prospective MS in Business student will submit a written statement
explaining their career goals and the area of specialization or functional field
where they wish to concentrate to the Director of Graduate Studies In
Business. The Director and the student will develop a program tailored for
the student's specific needs, to Include a listing of courses to be taken for
completion of the degree requirements.

COURSE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE M.S. DEGREE

I. Undergraduate Prerequisite Courses: 31 s.h. In the following under-
graduate courses: AG 201, AG 202, FS 310, MK 320, AD 235, EC 122,
MG 360, MA 121, FS 215, and FS 241.

Students will be given credit for undergraduate prerequisite courses taken
at lUP or at other appropriate Institutions with prior permission. Contact
Director of Graduate Studies In Business to ascertain the appropriateness
of such courses and to obtain permission to take courses at any other
institutions. See lUP undergraduate catalog for course descriptions.

II. Graduate Courses (30 s.h. distributed as follows):

A. Three (3) required Business Courses (9 s.h.): AG 607, AD 610, and
FS 640.

B. Business Elective Courses— 4 to 5 courses (12 to 15 s.h.) from the
following list: AG 501, AG 512, AG 531, AG 600, AG 602, AG 603,
AG 608, AD 512, AD 515, AD 612, AD 614, AD 632, AD 633, AD 634,
AD 670, FS 510, FS 520, FS 522, FS 550, FS 551, FS 570, FS 601,
FS 602, FS 604, FS 630, FS 631, FS 632, FS 635, FS 641, FS 642,
MK 521 , MK 530, MK 531 , MK 600, MK 601 , MK 603, MG 630, MG
631, MG 632, MG 633, MG 635, MG 636, MG 642, MG 645.
Other graduate level courses closely related to the student's career
plans may be taken as electlves. Prior permission of the Director of
Graduate Studies in Business Is required.

C. Research Area — 2 to 3 courses (6-9 s.h.):

1. GR 516 or FS 601

2. FS 604 or MK 521

3. 850, Thesis In appropriate department in College of Business If
elected. Students not electing a thesis will take an additional elec-
tive course as prescribed In their course of studies by the Director
of Graduate Studies In Business.

Programs and Courses - 67
Business

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

Accounting

AG 501 ADVANCED PRINCIPLES OF ACCOUNTING 3 s.h.

Study of business combinations and consolidations as well as accounting problems
of specialized nature sucfi as goods on consignment, installment sales, receivershiip
accounts, agency and branch accounting. Prerequisite: AG 302 or equivalent (nine
semester hiours of Accounting).

AG 512 ADVANCED COST ACCOUNTING 3 s.h.

Theory, preparation and use of budgets, analysis of cost variances, direct costing,
and extensive analysis of various cost-control and profit-planning programs Prereq-
uisite: AG 311.

AG 531 AUDITING 3 s.h.

A study of auditing theory and practical application of auditing standards and pro-
cedures to the verification of accounts and financial statements, working papers, and
audit reports. Prerequisite: AG 301.

AG 581 SPECIAL TOPICS IN ACCOUNTING 3 s.h.

Covers advanced or exploratory topics within the discipline. Specific content
developed by instructor. Content will vary depending on specific topics, fvlay be
repeated by specific approval. Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor and Direc-
tor of Graduate Studies in Business.

AG 600 ACCOUNTING SYSTEMS 3 s.h.

Accounting principles applied to constructing accounting systerps. Special atten-
tion is given to problems of management as they relate to accounting systems by
developing a system to give management the information desired for effective operation
of business. Prerequisite: AG 301.

AG 602 ADVANCED TAX ACCOUNTING 3 s.h.

Develops further knowledge of federal income tax laws as they apply to corpora-
tions, estates, and trusts. Federal estate tax and gift tax are also explored. Prereq-
uisite: AG 421.

AG 603 FINANCIAL STATEfVIENTS ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Detailed analysis and interpretation of financial statements using the various pur-
poses and coverage of the accounting principles underlying the data to be analyzed.
Prerequisite: AG 301.

AG 607 MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING 3 s.h.

Designed for management personnel who are not accountants but need to under-
stand the accounting process and the use of accounting information by management
in making decisions and in performance evaluation. Prerequisite: AG 202. Not open
for credit for students with constructive credit for AG 311.

AG 608 SEMINAR IN ACCOUNTING ISSUES 3 s.h.

Designed to offer students the opportunity to explore the conceptual framework
for accounting and reporting and to study, research, and debate various controver-
sial issues of current interest to the accounting profession as well as any other ac-
counting area of mutual interest to them and their instructor. The theme of the seminar
may be different every time it is offered. Prerequisite: AG 302 or instructor's permission.

62— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

AG 681 SPECIAL TOPICS IN ACCOUNTING 3 s.h.

Covers advanced or exploratory topics within the discipline. Specific content
developed by instructor. Content will vary depending upon the interests of instructor
and students with instructor choosing specific topics. May be repeated by specific
approval. Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor and Director of Graduate Studies
in Business.

AG 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN ACCOUNTING 1-3 s.h.

Individual research and analysis of contemporary problems and issues in a con-
centrated area of study under the guidance of a senior faculty member. Prerequisite:
Consent of instructor, departmental chairperson, and Dean, College of Business.

AG 850 THESIS 1-6 s.h.

For students writing the thesis, AG 850 should be scheduled for the semester in
which the student plans to complete his/her work. The thesis may be a non-committee
thesis (1-3 s.h.) with one faculty member serving as the student's adviser; or a com-
mittee thesis (4-6 s.h.) for which the student's adviser, two additional faculty members.
Director of Graduate Studies in Business, and/or the representative of the Dean, Col-
lege of Business, may constitute the committee.

Administrative Services and Business Education

AD 512 ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICE SERVICES 3 S.h.

Presentation of fundamental principles and practices used in the development of
an office. Specialized areas such as systems analysis work simplification, forms design,
word processing, office machines and equipment, records management, office design
and layout, office location and physical environment, office supervision, office manuals,
and development of office personnel will be discussed.

AD 515 RECORDS ADMINISTRATION 3 s.h.

Development of the principles of records administration including creation, use,
maintenance, and destruction. Storage facilities, records classification, forms analysis,
control of records, as well as micro-image systems will be discussed.

AD 610 BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONS AND REPORT WRITING 3 s.h.

Study and comparison of effective communications. Emphasis is on positive ap-
proach, clear statements, good form and structure. Organization and preparation of
reports used in business, government, and education. Techniques of collecting, in-
terpreting, and presenting information useful to executives.

AD 612 OFFICE ORGANIZATION AND MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

Duties and responsibilities of office manager, principles of practical office manage-
ment and their application. Includes survey and anaylsis development of manuals
and their use, selection, training, pay and promotion of office employees, controlling
expenses and measuring office efficiency, quality and quantity standards, purchase
and use of equipment and report writing.

AD 614 EXECUTIVE SECRETARIAL TRAINING 3 s.h.

Stresses application of secretarial skills and knowledge and importance of good
human relations in offices. Develops methods of complementing secretarial training
so that high school graduates may become competent, proficient, and well-adjusted
secretaries.

AD 632 CURRENT BUSINESS ECONOMIC PROBLEMS 3 s.h.

Provides opportunity for students to gain insights into relationships of business to
many facets of society, impact of major societal groups upon business, and nature
of otjstacles that businessmen face in day-to-day operations. Review and analysis
of basic economic concepts and principles will serve as a basis for study of selected
economic problems of current interest and concern to business and society.

Programs and Courses — 63
Business

AD 633 CASE PROBLEMS IN BUSINESS LAW 3 s.h.

Deals with solution of case problems as applied to various topics in the field of
business law. Prerequisite: AD 235 or equivalent.

AD 634 CONSUMER ECONOMIC PROBLEMS 3 s.h.

Program for the education of intelligent consumers in how to gain the maximum
satisfaction from goods and services. An effort will be made to develop an apprecia-
tion of the problems of the producer and distributor as well as the consumer.

AD 670 ECONOMIC BACKGROUNDS OF BUSINESS 3 s.h.

Overview of economic environment in which business and other agencies operate.
Students will gain a broad perspective of business operation through such topics as
business organization and management, consumption of goods, business risks,
business cycle, budgeting and investments. Not open to business majors, but is
designed as a general studies for other programs.

AD 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES 1-3 s.h.
Individual research and analysis of contemporary problems and issues in a con-
centrated area of study under the guidance of a senior faculty member. Prerequisite:
Consent of instructor, departmental chairperson, and Dean, College of Business.

BE 650 PRINCIPLES AND PROBLEMS OF BUSINESS EDUCATION 3 s.h.
Surveys basic principles and practices of Business Education. Among the topics
considered are: history of the high school business program, purposes, attitudes of
management and labor toward education, relationships of general education to
Business Education, and trends in the field.

BE 660 IMPROVEMENT OF INSTRUCTION IN

SECRETARIAL COURSES 3 s.h.

Provides business teachers with a working philosophy and practical approach to
teaching of secretarial subjects — shorthand, typewriting, transcription, and office prac-
tice. Teaching procedures basic to development of vocational proficiency in short-
hand, typewriting, transcription, and office practice including: content, methods,
teaching aids, available instructional materials, measurement of skills, and standards
of achievement.

BE 661 IMPROVEMENT OF INSTRUCTION IN ACCOUNTING AND

BASIC BUSINESS COURSES 3 s.h.

Problems and techniques in teaching accounting and basic business courses in-
cluding objectives, place and purpose of accounting and basic business courses,
curricular organization, teaching techniques, instructional materials, resource
materials, course standards, testing, and evaluation. For experienced or prospec-
tive high school vocational-technical school, and community college teachers of ac-
counting, general business, consumer economics, business mathematics, economics,
and business principles and management.

BE 676 SPECIAL STUDIES IN BUSINESS AND

DISTRIBUTIVE EDUCATION 1-6 s.h.

Special topics in Business and Distributive Education. Topics will be announced
well in advance of registration.

BE 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN BUSINESS EDUCATION 1-3 s.h.

64— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

BE 850 THESIS 1-6 s.h.

For students writing the thesis, BE 850 should be scheduled for the semester in
which the student plans to complete his/her work. The thesis may be a non-committee
thesis (1-3 s.h.) with one faculty member serving as the student's adviser, or a com-
mittee thesis (4-6 s.h.) for which the student's adviser, two additional faculty members,
Director of Graduate Studies in Business, and/or the representative of the Dean of
the College of Business may constitute the committee.

DE 510 METHODS & EVALUATION IN

DISTRIBUTIVE EDUCATION I 3 s.h.

To acquaint prospective teacher-coordinators with objectives of vocational
distributive education, including state plan and curriculum. To understand programs
in organizing, administering, and supervising a complete cooperative program.

DE 513 METHODS & EVALUATION IN

DISTRIBUTIVE EDUCATION II 3 s.h.

Acquaints students with basic principles of group and individual instruction in various
subject matter areas, as well as methods of presentation. Students prepare unit plans,
lesson plans, demonstrations, and evaluations. Prerequisite: DE 510 or DE 413.

DE 620 RETAIL ORGANIZATION AND MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

Directed toward problems of retail management. Includes present-day trends in
retailing, personnel management, merchandise control, pricing, promotion, services,
accounting, and expense control.

DE 640 INTERNSHIP IN OFFICE AND

DISTRIBUTIVE OCCUPATIONS 4 s.h.

Students who do not have extensive business experience are given the opportunity
to work full time for six weeks during the summer in a business position under super-
vision. Evening seminars are held weekly to discuss problems related to work ex-
perience program. A written report of the experience will be required. Individualized
instruction course.

DE 653 ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISION OF

VOCATIONAL EDUCATION 3 s.h.

An introductory course in administration and supervision of vocational education.
Historical background and problems connected with budgeting procedures and prac-
tices, teacher qualifications, certification, selection and assignments, in-service pro-
grams, rating and evaluating vocational techniques, classroom and personnel
supervision, vocational teachers' conferences, curriculum construction and revision,
selection and maintenance of equipment, establishing and using standards of achieve-
ment, guidance selection, placement and follow-up programs will be covered in this
course.

DE 654 COOPERATIVE VOCATIONAL EDUCATION 3 s.h.

To develop administrative procedures necessary for planning, organizing, and coor-
dinating cooperative vocational education programs. Major topics include historical
background of cooperative vocational education programs, program development,
supervision, public relations, the teacher coordinator and the job, labor laws govern-
ing such a program, and desired educational outcomes. Leads to Cooperative Educa-
tion Teacher certification. Prerequisite: DE 653.

DE 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN DISTRIBUTIVE EDUCATION 1-3 s.h.

Programs and Courses — 65
Business

Finance/MIS

FS 510 FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS AND MARKETS 3 s.h.

Review of entire structure of financial institutions, money and capital markets, of
which the business enterprise is both a supply and demand factor, and structure and
dynamics of interest-rate movements. Prerequisites: EC 325, FS 324.

FS 520 INVESTMENT ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Integrates the work of the various courses in the finance areas and familiarizes
the student with the tools and techniques of research in the different areas of in-
vestments. Prerequisites: AG 301, FS 310, FS 324.

FS 522 SEMINAR IN FINANCE 3 s.h.

A course primarily for the senior Finance major, covering topics in all areas of finance
by using recent articles, cases, discussions, speakers and a financial simulation game.
Prerequisites: FS 310, FS 320, FS 324.

FS 550 DATA BASE THEORY AND APPLICATION 3 s.h.

The analysis of data structures and data base, management systems and their im-
plementation in COBOL. Prerequisite: CO 220 or FS 352, and FS 350.

FS 551 SYSTEMS ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Develops understanding of concepts and techniques, involving conventional and
structured approaches to analyzing problems of business information systems,
systems definition feasibility, as well as quantitative and evaluative techniques of
business information systems analysis. Prerequisite: FS 352 or CO 220.

FS 570 SYSTEMS DESIGN 3 s.h.

Students learn tools and techniques for design of a business system. Along with
classroom discussions of principles and techniques for analyzing, designing, and con-
structing the system, students will formulate system teams to analyze the problems
of an existing business information system, to design an improved system and to
control implementation of new system. Prerequisites: FS 451/551, FS 450/550.

FS 580 DISTRIBUTED BUSINESS INFORMATION SYSTEMS 3 s.h.

Prerequisite: FS 451/551 or by instructor's permission.

FS 581 SPECIAL TOPICS IN FINANCE OR MANAGEMENT

INFORMATION SYSTEMS 3 s.h.

FS 601 QUANTITATIVE METHODS 3 s.h.

Introduction to the concepts and methods of scientific problem solving in manage-
ment. Students will learn to formulate mathematical models of complex decision prob-
lems and to solve these problems using quantitative methods. Topics covered include
linear programming, inventory models, network models, waiting line models, and
simulation. Prerequisite: FS 215.

FS 602 SEMINAR IN MANAGEMENT SCIENCE 3 s.h.

Builds upon basic concepts developed in FS 601 dealing with the theory and ap-
plication of mathematical models in an organizational environment. This course is
intended for the student who will actually be working with such models in his/her future
occupation. Topics to be covered include: more advanced methods of linear program-
ming, non-linear programming, dynamic programming, and simulation. Prerequisites:
FS 601, MA 121, MA 122.

66— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

FS 604 SEMINAR IN METHODOLOGY OF BUSINESS RESEARCH 3 s.h.
Designed to help students acquire a basic understanding of the research process
and a knowledge of the research methods needed in the design and execution of
a competent applied behavioral research. Emphasis will be on measurement and
scaling, survey research, and data analysis. Prerequisite: GR 516 or FS 601.

FS 630 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

An extension of basic managerial finance, dealing with the theory and practice of
analyzing companies, financial planning, capital budgeting, management of work-
ing capital, and obtaining funds for the corporation. Prerequisite; FS 310.

FS 631 ADVANCED FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

Purpose is to provide the business manager with various approaches and methods
for solving capital budgeting decisions and evaluating investment proposals. Topics
will include: capital budgeting techniques and applications, decisions under certainty
and uncertainty, capital rationing and methods of evaluating and classifying in-
vestments. Prerequisite: FS 630.

FS 632 SEMINAR IN FINANCE 3 S.h.

Covers topics in all areas of finance by using recent articles, cases, discussions,
speakers, and a finance simulation game. Designed to bring together all aspects of
finance. Prerequisite: FS 630.

FS 635 PRINCIPLES OF INVESTMENTS IN SECURITIES 3 s.h.

Introduces many forms of investment possibilities which exist. Attention is given
to operation of stock markets, concepts and terminology of investing, mutual funds
and their function, investment clubs and problems involved in making investments
through brokers, bankers, and stock promoters.

FS 640 MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS 3 s.h.

Introduces techniques involved in organizing computer-based management infor-
mation systems and the concepts of systems analysis and design including problem
definition, data gathering, information analysis, presentation techniques, implemen-
tation planning, systems control, and documentation is presented. Relationship be-
tween these techniques and the management of modern business organization is
stressed. Exercises and case studies used to develop student's ability to use the var-
ious systems methods presented in solving informational problems of modern busi-
ness. Prerequisites: AG 202 and FS 241 or equivalent.

FS 641 BUSINESS DATA PROCESSING I 3 s.h.

Covers the theory operation of remote computer terminals. The BASIC language
is used to write computer programs for Business Mathematics and Bookkeeping prob-
lems for the Business Education and Distributive Education teacher. Interactive pro-
grams utilizing the computer will be used for this training. Not open for students with
credit for FS 451/551.

FS 642 BUSINESS DATA PROCESSING II 3 s.h.

Develop the principles of COBOL language progamming with specific applications
for the teachers of Business and Distributive Education. The course builds upon the
basic concepts of data processing developed in FS 641. Special emphasis placed
on computer-based instruction and programmed instruction as used with the remote
terminals. The value of library programs will be demonstrated. Prerequisite: FS 641
or equivalent. Not open for students with credit for FS 470/570.

Programs and Courses — 67
Business

FS 681 SPECIAL TOPICS IN FINANCE OR MANAGEMENT

INFORMATION SYSTEMS 3 s.h.

Covers advanced or exploratory topics within the discipline. Specific content de-
veloped by instructor. Content will vary depending upon the interests of instructor
and students with instructor choosing specific topics. May be repeated by specific
approval. Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor and Director of Graduate Studies
in Business.

FS 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN FINANCE OR MANAGEMENT

INFORMATION SYSTEMS 1-3 s.h.

Individual research and analysis of contemporary problems and issues in a con-
centrated area of study under the guidance of a senior faculty member. Prerequi-
site: Consent of instructor, departmental chairperson, and Dean, College of Business.

FS 850 THESIS 1-6 s.h.

For students writing a thesis, FS 850 should be scheduled for the semester in which
the student plans to complete his/her work. The thesis may be a non-committee the-
sis (1-3 s.h.) with one faculty member serving as the student's adviser or a commit-
tee thesis (4-6 s.h.) for which the student's adviser, two additional faculty members,
Director of Graduate Studies in Business, and/or the representative of the Dean of
the College of Business may constitute the committee.

Management

MG 630 MANAGEMENT THEORY 3 s.h.

Study of development, nature, and meaning of basic functions of management.
Emphasis will be placed upon functional activities of an organization at all levels of
management and the application of these principles. Prerequisite: MG 360.

MG 631 MANAGEMENT DEVELOPMENT AND TRAINING 3 s.h.

A survey of the major aspects, trends, and methodologies in management develop-
ment and training as these specializations are being practiced in the enterprises in
the advanced western nations. Prerequisite: MG 360.

MG 623 SEMINAR IN PERSONNEL 3 s.h.

Designed to offer the MBA student the opportunity to research, study, and discuss
various theories, principles, concepts and issues of current interest to business and
personnel managers. The case method will be emphasized and the focus or theme
of the seminar may be different each time it is offered. Prerequisite: MG 360.

MG 633 ORGANIZATIONAL ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

An integrative course oriented toward an empirical analysis of the phenomena and
theories of large, complex, formal organizations. Intergroup phenomena are also
treated as they pertain to the larger organization. Special study is made of the or-
ganization as an economic, social decision-making, bureaucratic and political sys-
tem. The analysis and design of organizations is viewed from the number of
perspectives including classical theory and case analysis to illustrate and extend the
major topics of the course. Prerequisite: MG 360.

MG 635 SEMINAR IN MANGEMENT AND

ORGANIZATIONAL LEADERSHIP 3 s.h.

Studies of theory and research in the leadership of groups and organizations with
application to the management fields of business, industry and labor. The debate,
research, and study of controversial leadership issues of current interest to manage-
ment and preparation of a research paper by the student in his/her occupational in-
terest area is required. Prerequisite: MG 311 and permission of departmental
chairperson and/or instructor.

68— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MG 636 THE EVOLUTION OF MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

This course examines the backgrounds, roles and influences of major contribu-
tors and analyzes the various trends and movements in management thought. Prereq-
uisite: MG 360.

MG 642 HUMAN RELATIONS IN BUSINESS 3 s.h.

Study of human motivations and their constructive application to all aspects of busi-
ness. Psychological basis of human relations will be developing as it applies in the
business world. Major topics include employer-employee relations, labor relations,
stockholder relations, customer relations, community relations and public relations.
Prerequisite: MG 360.

MG 645 CASE PROBLEMS IN BUSINESS HUMAN RELATIONS 3 s.h.

Application of principles of personnel management in solution of problems in human
relations. Students will be required to solve realistic problems in human relations found
at all echelons of management. Emphasis will be placed on actual problems encoun-
tered in day-to-day work activities. Prerequisite: MG 642 or equivalent.

MG 681 SPECIAL TOPICS IN MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

MG 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

With the approval of the department, students will select one or more topics of crit-
ical importance in the field and will meet with faculty for independent reading, analy-
sis, and evaluation. Prerequisites: Approvals of department chairperson and Director
of Graduate Studies in Business.

MG 850 THESIS 1-6 s.h.

For students writing the thesis, MG 850 should be scheduled for the semester in
which the student plans to complete his/her work. The thesis may be a non-committee
thesis (1-3 s.h.) with one faculty member serving as the student's adviser or a com-
mittee thesis (4-6 s.h.) for which the student's adviser, two additional faculty mem-
bers, Director of Graduate Studies in Business, and/or the representative of the Dean
of the College of Business may constitute the committee.

Marketing

MK 521 MARKETING RESEARCH 3 S.h.

Research procedures and techniques applicable to problem solving in the market-
ing field. Critical analysis of research techniques with considerable emphasis placed
on the use of information gathered. Prerequisite: MK 320.

MK 530 INTERNATIONAL MARKETING 3 S.h.

International marketing is analyzed with consideration given to the significance of
government regulation, organization structures of export and import enterprises, and
credit policies. Prerequisite: MK 321.

MK 531 INDUSTRIAL MARKETING 3 s.h.

Considers major activities involved in marketing of industrial goods and services.
Prerequisite: MK 320.

MK 600 MARKETING 3 s.h.

Study of risks, costs, and methods of distribution including analysis of such prob-
lems as research, competition, pricing, and laws in marketing goods from manufac-
turer to producer to consumer. Prerequisite: MK 320.

Programs and Courses — Q9
Business
Chemistry

MK 601 SALES PROMOTION AND ADVERTISING 3 s.h.

Basic principles of sales promotion and advertising together with consideration of
the major problems encountered in management of activities. Emphasized determi-
nation of basic promotional strategy, selection of advertising media, determining ad-
vertising appropriations, and advertising research. Prerequisite: fvIK 320.

MK 603 MARKETING MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

An analytical and quantitative approach to decision-making the planning, develop-
ment, implementation and control of marketing program. Prerequisite: MK 320.

MK 681 SPECIAL TOPICS IN MARKETING 3 s.h.

Covers advanced or exploratory topics within the discipline. Specific content de-
veloped by instructor. Content will vary depending upon the interests of instructor
and students with instructor choosing specific topics. May be repeated by specific
approval. Prerequisites: Permission of the instructor and Director of Graduate Studies
in Business.

MK 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN MARKETING 1-3 S.h.

MK 850 THESIS 1-6 s.h.

For students writing the thesis, MK 850 should be scheduled for the semester in
which the student plans to complete his/her work. The thesis may be a non-committee
thesis (1-3 s.h.) with one faculty member serving as the student's adviser or a com-
mittee thesis (4-6 s.h.) for which the student's adviser, two additional faculty mem-
bers, Director of Graduate Studies in Business, and/or the representative of the Dean
of the College of Business may constitute the committee.

CHEMISTRY

The Chemistry Department offers three different degree programs on
the master's level: the Master of Education, Master of Science, and the Mas-
ter of Arts degrees in chemistry.

The Master of Education program is designed for the secondary school
teacher, affording the teacher the opportunity to gain more knowledge of
chemistry and keep abreast of a rapidly changing field. The major empha-
sis is on subject matter. The student may enroll on either a full- or part-time
basis.

The Master of Science degree is for the chemist who intends to pursue
further graduate work leading to a PhD or who intends to work as a profes-
sional chemist and desires to become more competent in chemistry. This
degree is research oriented and successful completion of an experimental
thesis is required. Also two consecutive semesters of residency are required.

The Master of Arts degree is designed to meet the needs of the chem-
ist who is currently a full-time employee of the chemical or academic insti-
tution and who wishes strengthening in those areas relevant to the
professional position. The emphasis here is on course work.

Four core courses, one in each of the areas of inorganic, organic, ana-
lytical, and physical chemistry, are required in the MS and MA programs.*
Beyond this point the programs separate with the MS and MA student taking
more specialized work in chemistry along with an experimental research

70— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

problem. The MEd candidate will take broadening courses which increase
the effectiveness of a teacher. The MA candidate will take more specialized
work in chemistry and will be encouraged to take courses outside the
sciences if they are relevant to the particular area of employement.

General Admissions Requirements— Students should have completed
one year each of general chemistry, analytical chemistry, organic chemis-
try, physical chemistry,* * general physics, and calculus. Students wishing
to specialize in biochemistry should also have had an undergraduate course
in biochemistry. Students deficient in the above areas of study may also
be admitted provided these deficiencies are made up concurrently with the
student's graduate studies.

The general requirements for admission to candidacy for a master's de-
gree are discussed on page of the bulletin.

*An exception to this is afforded the student wishing to specialize in
biochemistry.
* *Only one semester of physical chemistry is required for education majors.

MASTER OF ARTS JN CHEMISTRY

I. Industrial/Teaching Experience: Before the degree of MA in chemistry
can be granted the applicant must have had three years of full-time em-
ployment in an approved area of chemistry. Only those years of employ-
ment acquired after obtaining the bachelor's degree may be counted.
This experience meets the University residency requirements.

II. Course requirements include 14 hours in the following: CH 540, 600*,
610, 620, and 630.

III. Course electives (10-16 s.h.)— Any graduate level courses selected from
the natural sciences and mathematics with the permission of the can-
didate's adviser. Special permission from the Chemistry Department's
Graduate Committee will be required for courses outside the sciences.

IV. Thesis Requirements (zero, two, or four s.h.):
The student has three options:

A. Thesis not required — a total of 30 s.h. in suitable courses being
acceptable.

B. No-Committee Thesis (CH 850-two s.h.) — Refer to page , for the
steps in satisfying the research requirement for submitting a "Two-
Hour, No-Committee Thesis."

C. Committee Thesis (CH 850-four s.h.) — If the candidate is doing re-
search as part of the full-time employment, the research may be sub-
mitted as a thesis, provided approval is given in advance by the
employer, and the Chemistry Graduate Committee. The candidate's
employment supervisor may serve as an ex-officio member of the the-
sis committee.

*The MA candidate is not required to attend all of the day time seminars,
but is required to present two seminars and is expected to attend the
evening seminars.

Programs and Courses — 71
Chemistry

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN CHEMISTRY

Students working for this degree will complete a minimum of 30 semes-
ter hours of work in accordance with the following division.

I. Subject Area and/or Thesis— 15-18 s.h.

A. Elective Chemistry Courses— 1 1-18 s.h. of work selected from CH 500
and CH 600 level courses.

B. Thesis — zero-four s.h. After consultation with the adviser, the student
may choose:

1. No thesis (if the student chooses this option he/she must earn a
minimum of 18 s.h. in A above.)

2. A no-committee thesis — CH 850-two s.h.

3. A committee thesis — CH 850-four s.h.

II. Professional Development Area — nine s.h.

A. Humanistic Studies— three semester hours in one course selected
from the following: FE 611, 612, 613, or 514.

B. Behavioral Studies — three s.h. in one course selected from the fol-
lowing: EP 604, 573, 576, 578, 580, CE 639, or EX 631.

C. Research — three s.h. required of all students GR 615.

III. Specialization Core-six s.h.— CH 505 and one of the following courses:
FE 515, CM 600, or CH 605.

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF EDU-
CATION; for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE course,
COUNSELOR EDUCATION; for EX course, SPECIAL EDUCATION; for CM
course, COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN CHEMISTRY

I. Residence Requirements: The student shall be in residence a minimum
of two consecutive semesters of full-time work. Students working as
graduate assistants and/or making up deficiencies can expect to be in
residence for at least two years.

II. Course Requirements: For those specializing in analytical, inorganic, or-
ganic, or physical chemistry:

A. Required Courses (15 s.h.): The four core courses of analytical, CH
620; inorganic, CH 610; organic, CH 630; and physical, CH 540, and
one additional three hour course designated by a chemistry 600 num-
ber selected from one of the four areas of analytical, inorganic, or-
ganic, or physical chemistry.

B. Electives (six s.h.)

The electives may be selected from the areas of chemistry, phys-
ics, biology, and mathematics by the student with the advice and ap-
proval of the adviser.

CH 500, Special Studies, can provide a maximum of three semes-
ter hours toward the 30 semester hours necessary for the degree.

72— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

III. Course Requirements: For those specializing in biochemistry

A. Required Courses (12 s.h.), including CH 646, 623, 630, and Bl 662.

B. Electives (at least nine s.h.), including at least one of the following:
Bl 561 , 553, 652, 653, or 654 and any graduate courses in the natu-
ral sciences or mathematics mutually agreed upon by the student and
adviser.

IV. Research and Thesis Requirements:

A. The research work must lead to an acceptable thesis, approved by
the student's adviser and supervisory committee, and defended in a
final oral examination.

B. Seminar— two s.h. required in CH 600.

C. CH 690 for at least three hours.

D. CH 850 Thesis— four s.h., taken during the term in which the student
is writing the MS thesis.

For description of Bl courses, see section on BIOLOGY.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

General

CH 500 SPECIAL STUDIES 1-6 s.h.

Intensive survey of literature in a particular area as well as individual instruction
on recent advances in chemical instrumentation, methods of research, and special-
ized subject areas. To be arranged with instructor.

CH 502 CHEMISTRY IN MANUFACTURING PROCESSES 3 s.h.

A course on the applications of chemistry to manufacturing processes. Lecture and
field trips. Lecture— three hours.

CH 503 GLASSBLOWING TECHNIQUES 1 s.h.

Introduces science student to techniques necessary for construction and modifi-
cation of scientific glass apparatus. Two hours lecture instruction.

CH 505 NEW APPROACHES TO TEACHING

HIGH SCHOOL CHEMISTRY 3 s.h.

Chem Study and C.B.A. approaches will be investigated. Individualization of chemis-
try and application of various teaching materials and techniques used in individu-
alizing chemistry. Environmental chemistry and other relevant topics to better
understand the chemical basis of our current environmental problems. Four hours
lecture/laboratory.

CH 576 RADIOCHEMISTRY 3 s.h.

Basic aspects of nuclear structure, phenomena of radioactive isotopes and chem-
ical effect on such isotopes. Concurrent lab work utilizing instruments for detection
and measurement of radioactive nuclides used in chemical experimentation. Four
hours lecture/laboratory.

CH 600 SEMINAR 1 s.h.

A study of modern chemical research and research techniques. Scientific commu-
nication, including the role of the science laboratory in research. The student will
present one oral report. Lecture — one hour.

Programs and Courses — 73
Chemistry

CH 605 EXPERIMENTAL TECHNIQUES IN CHEMISTRY 3 s.h.

Experimentation, observation and application of scientific concepts. Classroom and

lecture demonstrations will be prepared, presented and evaluated by students and

instructor. Prerequisites: Chemistry I, II, Physics I, II. Four hours lecture/laboratory.

CH 633 CHEMICAL LITERATURE 3 s.h.

Periodicals, encyclopedias, handbooks, abstracting journals, and other sources
dealing with various divisions of chemistry will be studied. Students are required to
conduct a literature search on a selected topic. Lecture — three hours.

CH 690 RESEARCH 1-6 s.h.

Laboratory and literature investigation of the student's thesis problem done under
the direction of a faculty member.

Within the first 15 hours of course work, the student must schedule at least one
credit of research for which the student performs the literature review and writes a
research proposal.

CH 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-6 s.h.

Available to students who seek to deepen their knowledge in some specific aspect
of chemistry. The student must discuss the nature of the independent study with a
faculty member having expertise in the area prior to registration. Special attention
to development of new ideas and new ways of presenting scientific principles.

CH 850 THESIS 2 or 4 s.h.

For students writing the thesis. Should be scheduled for the semester in which
the student plans to complete work. May be a non-committee thesis (2 s h.) with one
faculty member serving as adviser; or a committee thesis (4 s.h.). for which the stu-
dent's adviser, two additional faculty members and the Dean of the College of Natu-
ral Sciences and Mathematics constitute the committee.

Inorganic

CH 512 INORGANIC PREPARATIONS 3 s.h.

Preparation of inorganic compounds expressing different techniques of synthesis.
Designed for those students who have chosen to do inorganic research but have never
had a prep course. Four hours lecture-laboratory.

CH 610 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY (core course) 3 s.h.

Theoretical inorganic chemistry and in particular, structure, periodicity, coordina-
tion chemistry, bonding and chemistry of non-aqueous solvents. Lecture — three hours.

CH611 COORDINATION CHEMISTRY 3 s.h.

Chemistry of transition metals, their compounds and complex ions. Lecture— three
hours.

CH 615 CURRENT TOPICS IN INORGANIC CHEMISTRY 3 s.h.

Representative elements, chemistry of rare earth elements, inorganic spectroscopy,
group theory or any other special areas of chemical interest.

Analytical

CH 521 ADVANCED INSTRUMENTAL METHODS OF ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Modern instrumental analysis including electrical, spectrophotometric, x-ray, gas
chromatography, and other methods. (Open to MS and MA candidates by permis-
sion only.) Four hours of lecture-laboratory.

CH 620 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY (core course) 3 s.h.

Theoretical principles of analytical chemistry. Lecture — three hours

74 - Indiana University of Pennsylvania

CH 621 ELECTROANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 3 s.h.

Theoretical and practical considerations of polarography, potentiometric, ampero-
metric, coulometric, and conductometric methods of chemical analysis. Lecture -
two hours— four-hour lab.

CH 622 SPECTROCHEMICAL METHODS OF ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Study of instrumentation and analytical applications of ultraviolet and visible ab-
sorption, atomic spectrometry, fluorescence, x-spectrometry, and nuclear magnetic
resonance. Lecture— two hours— four-hour labs.

CH 623 PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS OF SEPARATION 3 s.h.

Application of chromatographic methods to the quantitative separation and analy-
sis of chemical systems. Topics will include gas, column, paper and ion exchange
chromatographic methods and other methods of separation as time permits. Lecture-
two hours — four-hour lab.

Organic

CH 531 ORGANIC QUALITATIVE ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Gives student experience in systematic identification of various classes of organic

compounds by both chemical and physical methods. Four hours lecture-laboratory.

CH 535 CURRENT TOPICS IN ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 3 s.h.

With selections to meet the needs and interests of the students, possible topics
may include: reaction mechanisms, molecular spectroscopy, stereochemistry, natu-
ral products, heterocyclics, polymer chemistry, and organic synthesis.

CH 630 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY (core course) 3 s.h.

Principles of physical chemistry will be applied to the study of organic reaction
mechanisms. Lecture — three hours.

Physical Chemistry

CH 540 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY (core course) 3 s.h.

An introduction to chemical bonding and molecular structure. Lecture— three hours.

CH 641 STATISTICAL THERMODYNAMICS 3 s.h.

The application of statistical mechanics to chemical systems. Lecture— three hours.

CH 642 CHEMICAL KINETICS 3 s.h.

An introduction to empirical and theoretical chemical kinetics. Lecture-three hours.

CH 643 QUANTUM CHEMISTRY 3 s.h.

An introduction to quantum theory and its application to atomic and molecular struc-
ture and spectroscopy. Lecture— three hours.

CH 645 CURRENT TOPICS IN PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 3 s.h.

With selection to meet the needs and interests of the student, possible topics may
include: quantum mechanics, molecular structure, chemical thermodynamics, statisti-
cal mechanics and chemical kinetics.

Biochemistry

CH 646 BIOCHEMISTRY 3 s.h.

Topics covering and emphasizing most recent developments in the areas of bi-
ochemistry such as amino acids, carbohydrates, lipids, nucleic acids, proteins, en-
zymes, metabolism and metabolic control. Lecture— three hours.

Programs and Courses — 75

Chemistry
Communications Media

CH 651 BIOCHEMISTRY TOPICS 3 s.h.

A discussion of areas such as carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins, nucleic
acids, kinetics, and metabolism. Lecture — three hours.

CH 652 ENZYMES 3 S.h.

A study of enzymes to include isolation, kinetics, classification, specificity, mechan-
isms, cofactors, structure and formation. Lecture — three hours.

COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA

In the Communications Media Department, the student may choose from
these programs:

Master of Education in Communications Media

Instructional Media Specialist Certification

Students pursuing careers in educational communications, business
or industrial training as well as medical communications have the opportu-
nity to choose a course of study that most effectively prepares them for en-
try into that profession. The department's modern facilities and professional
staff provide students the opportunity to do intensive work in photography,
graphic production, radio, television, instructional design and development,
media management or such combinations of these areas as students may
desire to accomplish their goals. In many of these courses, students gain
experience in the design, production and evaluation of training, promotional
and educational materials. The culmination of the academic experience is
an optional internship in which students have the opportunity to apply theory
to practice.

Students are encouraged to consult their advisor and course instruc-
tors at frequent intervals, especially during the schedule planning stage prior
to preregistration. For current curriculum information, students should con-
tact the Department Graduate Coordinator.

All departmental offerings are distributed within the following course
concentration Blocks. The Blocks serve only as guides for choosing those
courses that are consistent with the student's goals. Students may elect
courses from all three Blocks or may choose to concentrate on only one.
These Blocks apply to both the Master of Education and the Instructional
Media Specialist programs.

BLOCK I MEDIA MANAGEMENT

CM 630, CM 660, CM 669, CM 699, EA 656, MG 630, MG 642,

MK 600
BLOCK II MEDIA PRODUCTION

CM 504, CM 505, CM 540, CM 544, CM 545, CM 549. CM 550,

CM 551 , CM 552, CM 561 , CM 571 , CM 572, CM 573. CM 577,

CM 578, CM 615, CM 630, CM 660, CM 669, CM 699
BLOCK III INSTRUCTIONAL DEVELOPMENT

CM 561, CM 615, CM 669, CM 699, CO 502, EL 631, EL 655,

FE 515, GR 516

76— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN
COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA

Admission Requirements

(Subject to some modification by departmental vote in individual cases
of merit)

1. A 2.5 (4 point scale) undergraduate GPA

2. Passing the Graduate Record Aptitude Examination. An average of
470 on the verbal and math tests is required.

Students from other Graduate schools and Programs may transfer up
to six semester hours of credit subject to the approval of the department
and the Graduate school. Apply through your advisor, providing him or her
with a copy of your graduate thanscript and full course description. Only
courses which parallel lUP courses will be accepted.

To enter the Indiana University of Pennsylvania Graduate School,
prospective students should request an application from:

Dean, Graduate School

Indiana University of Pennsylvania

101 Stright Hall

Indiana, PA 15705

By completing an application and by providing the appropriate tran-
scripts, letters of recommendation, etc., you will be considered for admis-
sion to graduate study at Indiana University of Pennsylvania in the area of
Communications Media. If you are accepted into the program, the Depart-
ment of Communications Media will notify you of your advisor's name. You
should contact him or her immediately for the purpose of designing your
program of studies.

While some basic media competencies as might be obtained in audi-
ovisual courses are preferred of all applicants, such experience is not a re-
quirement for acceptance into the program. Where lacking, these
competencies will be built into the student's program of study. Other than
the indicated required courses, students, in consultation with their advisor,
will elect the additional courses needed to complete their individual program.

Admission to Candidacy

After completion of at least six semester hours and before 1 2 semester
hours, the applicant will make formal application to the Graduate School
and to the departmental graduate committee for admission to candidacy for
a Master of Education in Communications Media. The candidate must have
at least a B average in graduate courses taken at Indiana, including the be-
havioral studies elective, and have taken at least two courses from the Com-
munications Media Curriculum. He/she may then be asked to appear before
the departmental Graduate Committee.

When applying for admission to candidacy, the student must declare
the terminal option he or she will follow to complete the degree. See The-
sis/Non-Thesis option below.

Programs and Courses — 77
Communications Media

Master of Education in Media Program

A. Professional Development Area (nine s.h.)

1. Humanistic Studies (three s.h.); one of FE 514, 611, 612, 613

2. Behavioral Studies (three s.h.); one of EP 572, 573, 576, 578, 604, or
CE 629, CE 639, EX 631, or PC 636

3. Research (three s.h.); GR 615

B. Specialization Core (three s.h.); CM 503

C. Subject Area

1 . Student elected concentrations from Blocks I, II, III. Dependent upon
terminal option selected (see above), students will take 12-18 s.h. media
courses specializing in one Block, or a variety of courses from Block
I: Media Management, Block II; Media Production, or Block III: Instruc-
tional Development

2. Thesis/Non-Thesis Option

a. Thesis — 30 s.h. including thesis

b. Coursework— 36 s.h. total

(For description of FE courses, see the Graduate Catalogue section on
FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION; for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSY-
CHOLOGY; for CE courses, COUNSELOR EDUCATION; for EX courses,
SPECIAL EDUCATION; for PC courses, PSYCHOLOGY; for description of
GR courses, see entry under GENERAL SERVICE COURSES.)

Certification as an Instructional Media Specialist

The specialist certificate in Instructional Media may be awarded to stu-
dents who hold at least a Pennsylvania Level 1 or equivalent certificate valid
for elementary or secondary education and who complete 24 semester hours
of graduate work in the curriculum of Communications Media and related
subjects. With the approval of an advisor, each student will select a balance
of courses from the three concentration Blocks described earlier; however,
CM 503, 615, 630, and 660 must be included in the courses selected. Ap-
plication for the certificate is made through the Communications Media
Department to the Pennsylvania Department of Public Instruction.

By careful structuring of their program, it is possible for students to ob-
tain both the MEd degree and the Instructional Media Specialist Certifica-
tion concurrently. Usually this will require slightly more than the 30 semester
hours of minimum credits required for the MEd but students often find it
to their advantage to fulfill the requirements for both programs.

Students not in the educational profession (i.e.. Business or Industry)
and who otherwise meet the admission requirements of the Graduate School
may pursue the program for Instructional Media Specialist and upon com-
pletion of the requirements may be granted a special Certificate of Profi-
ciency in Instructional Media by the University.

Graduate School admission does not automatically ensure acceptance
into the certificate program. Successful applicants will present evidence of
(1) the intellectual ability to do acceptable graduate work; (2) satisfactory
scores on the GRE; and (3) the requisite personal qualifications of charac-
ter, health, and professional background. The departmental graduate faculty
will make the necessary determinations.

78 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Placement

Early in the final semester of work, the student is encouraged to regis-
ter with the Career Services Division of the University in Pratt Hall, Room 302.

In addition, the Department of Communications Media makes every ef-
fort to keep a current listing of job vacancies in business, industry, educa-
tion and medical communications. Consult your advisor or the department
chairperson frequently. Vacancies are also regularly posted on the bulletin
board outside Stouffer Hall G-16.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

CM 503 SCRIPTWRITING 3 s.h.

Provides an introduction to scriptwriting for films and filmstrips. Various styles and
techniques of writing will be analyzed and each student will be expected to experi-
ment with the techniques presented. Emphasis on writing and criticism, in class, of
student script.

CM 504 FOUNDATIONS OF BROADCASTING 3 s.h.

An examination of the historical, legal, and economic aspects of modern broad-
casting. Extensive readings in fundamental theory and a study of current station and
network practices, educational as well as commercial.

CM 505 RADIO PRODUCTION 3 s.h.

Instruction in the various techniques and applications of sound production and
programming for radio. Emphasis on planning, scripting and producing broadcast
quality radio programs as well as commercial type announcements and station
promotional devices.

CM 540 COMMUNICATIONS GRAPHICS 3 s.h.

Provides basic experiences in planning and producing commonly used television
studio, industrial display and classroom graphics which are applicable in educational,
industrial and medical training programs. Experiences include layout and lettering;
color; mounting and laminating techniques; copying techniques such as Thermofax,
photography and Xerography; photo silk screening and photo sketching.

CM 544 APPLICATIONS AND TECHNIQUES

OF MOTION PICTURES 3 S.h.

Emphasis on effective use of motion picture camera and editing tools to make useful,

locally produced teaching films. No previous experience is necessary, but student

should own or have access to an 8mm or 16mm camera, and an acceptable exposure

meter.

CM 545 APPLICATIONS AND TECHNIQUES

OF MOTION PICTURES 3 s.h.

Production planning for motion pictures, directing, advanced picture and sound

editing techniques, and use of sound recording and lab facilities. In addition to live

action cinematography, titling, animation, and special effects photography will be

investigated. CM 544.

CM 549 BASIC AUDIO RECORDING 3 s.h.

Theory and practices of recording sound, developing an understanding of language
of sound recording as well as ability to make sound recordings. Exposure to record-
ing for various media including radio, music, motion pictures, television, multi-image,
and slide and tape production. Students will gain hands-on experiences through labs
and projects to be completed outside class.

Programs and Courses — 79
Commuriications Media

CM 550 ADVANCED AUDIO PRODUCTION 3 s.h.

Theory and practice of recording sound for motion pictures, video tapes, audio tapes,
sound filmstrips, etc. Will use sound on sound and other special techniques.

CM 551 BASIC TV PRODUCTION AND DIRECTION 3 s.h.

Intensive lab course using closed circuit facilities designed to develop skills in pro-
gram production and direction. Theory and practice of production is examined with
each student expected to produce a television program during the course.

CM 552 ELECTRONIC FIELD PRODUCTION 3 s.h.

For advanced graduate student with prior training and experience in television.
Advanced television production techniques, set design, lighing, special effects, and
advanced editing techniques. CM 551

CM 561 LEARNING SYSTEMS DESIGN 3 s.h.

Introduction to elements of systems approach to learning systems design. For people
involved in any level of instruction such as teachers, industrial, government, and so-
cial trainers. Participants will have the opportunity to study and carefully plan a learning
system according to accepted phases of analysis, design, and evaluation.

CM 571 BEGINNING PHOTOGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Emphasis on using still picture camera and the darkroom for instructional purposes,
the making of b/w negatives, 35mm slides, copywork, developing b/w film, and b/w
contact printing and enlarging. Each student must have manual focusing and manual
exposure setting capability. No previous photographic experience is necessary.

CM 572 PHOTOGRAPHY II 3 s.h.

Helps students develop their camera and printmaking skills to the extent thay they
can employ those processes to communicate an intended message with their photo-
graphs. The students explore the characteristics and uses of a variety of films. They
learn several skills such as copywork, basic techniques of portrait lighting, and alter-
ing film development to suit high- or low-contrast subjects. CM 571 and permission
of instructor.

CM 573 CREATIVE DARKROOM TECHNIQUES 3 s.h.

Introduces the student to a variety of photographic manipulations. Specific assign-
ments are chosen from such techniques as high-contrast imagery, tone line, bas-
relief, posterization; texturization, paper negatives, hand coloring, multiple printing,
photomontage. CM 571 and permission of the instructor.

CM 577 SLIDE AND SOUND PRODUCTION 3 s.h.

Emphasizes techniques of color and b/w slide preparation, duplication, titling and
binding; techniques necessary to produce color filmstrips on a commercial basis, and
students will participate in making of a filmstrip through all stages, from script to screen.
Techniques for making home-made filmstrips will also be explored. Each student must
furnish own 35mm camera, and an acceptable exposure meter. CM 571

CM 578 MULTI-IMAGE PRODUCTION 3 s.h.

Introduction to scripting, storyboarding and production of multi-image presenta-
tions. Major emphasis on students producing their own three-screen, six projector
program through the use of computer programming equipment. CM 571, 503.

CM 600 SEMINAR IN LEARNING RESOURCES 3 s.h.

Major emphasis on differences in learning materials, learning and teaching methods.
The student will do literary research for a better understanding of how learning
resources are related to learning processes in our society.

80— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

CM 601 THE CLASSROOM USE OF MOTION PICTURES 3 s.h.

Develops a basis for critical evaluation of films for various educational purposes.
Emphasis on an understanding of production techniques, stereotypes, prejudices,
and misconceptions which influence the quality of educational films.

CM 602 PROGRAMMING SYSTEMATIC INSTRUCTION 3 s.h.

Will cover historical development theory and philosophy, audio instructional equip-
ment, programmed texts, theories of programming, types of programs available,
analysis and evaluation of research.

CM 615 ROLE OF LEARNING RESOURCES 3 s.h.

Examines role of perception as it pertains to sensory experiences and inner cogni-
tive processes in relationship to maturation, goals and drives, and environment. Seeks
to relate psychological processes to learning resources, with emphasis on newer
media.

CM 630 CLASSIFICATION AND CATALOGING OF

LEARNING RESOURCES 3 s.h.

Principles of classifying and cataloging learning resources such as motion pictures,

video tapes, filmstrips, slides, transparencies, disk and tape recordings, microfilm,

microcard and microfiche, flat pictures, etc. For learning resources administrators

and librarians.

CM 660 MEDIA MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

Considers the problems in setting up and managing an integrated program, including
production, selection, utilization, and management of Learning Resources Centers;
and problems of finance and organization of the different services; relationships among
school systems, colleges and community and adult groups; and evaluation standards
for various services.

CM 669 INTERNSHIP 2-6 s.h.

Supervised professional work experience in communications media. Location,
duties, length of internship and hours are individually tailored to student career goals.
Sites represent wide application of process and technology of communications in
business, education, allied health, or other agencies.

CM 699 GRADUATE INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 s.h.

The student may elect, with approval of adviser, to do several different indepen-
dent study projects. University facilities and equipment are provided but student must
supply materials and pay for processing and production costs. Prerequisite: Successful
completion of the basic course in the medium selected, the professor's approval.

COMPUTER SCIENCE

The Computer Science Department does not currently offer a program
leading to a master's or doctoral degree. Graduate courses are offered as
dual level with undergraduate courses.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

CO 502 COMPUTERS IN EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Introduction to computers and computer programming in the language BASIC, with
emphasis on applications in education; general models for computer usage in edu-
cation, and educational institutions, case studies of specific project in terms of ap-
proach, effectiveness, and implications for the future. No computer prerequisites.

Programs arid Courses — 81
Communications Media
Computer Science

CO 510 PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND

MICROPROGRAMMING 3 s.h.

The logical description of computer processor structure (architecture), with em-
phasis on the mircoprogramming approach. Project assignments using the Microdata
1600 minicomputer at microlevel. Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.

CO 520 MODERN COMPUTER LANGUAGES 3 s.h.

Comparative study of the properties and applications of a range of modern higher
level programming languages, including APL, SNOBOL, PL/1 . ALGOL 60, PASCAL,
LISP, and TRAC. Comparison with older languages such as BASIC, FORTRAN,
COBOL, and RPG. Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.

CO 530 INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING 3 s.h

Concepts and techniques of systems programming with an emphasis on assembly
and compilation of user programs. Representation of source language so as to facili-
tate the needed translation process. Exercises using the University computer and
the departmental minicomputer and microcomputer. Prerequisite: Permission of the
instructor.

CO 540 LARGE FILE ORGANIZATION AND ACCESS 3 s.h.

The organization of large computer files for business systems, information systems,
and other applications. Use of COBOL and Assembler for efficient file access. Evalu-
ation of file access. Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.

CO 541 DATA BASE MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

Review of data base concepts. Detailed study of data base management ap-
proaches. Comparative presentation of commercially available data base manage-
ment systems. Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.

CO 550 APPLIED NUMERICAL METHODS 3 s.h.

Polynomial approximations using finite differences; applications in numerical in-
tegration and dififerentiation. Numerical solution of initial value ordinary differential
equations; boundary value problems; difference methods for partial differential equa-
tions. The APL language will be introduced and used, along with FORTRAN, in
programming selected algorithms. Prerequisites: Computer Programming, Linear
Algebra, and Ordinary Differential Equations.

CO 551 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Theory of polynomial approximation; applications to quadrature formulae. Numer-
ical solution of linear systems and computation of eigenvalues and eigenvectors us-
ing matrix transformation methods. Selected topics from differential equations, linear
programming, rational approximations, and Monte Carlo techniques. Prerequisite:
CO 550.

CO 560 THEORY OF COMPUTATION 3 s.h.

Formal methods for describing and analyzing programming languages and al-
gorithms; Backus-Naur forms; productions; regular expressions; introduction to au-
tomata theory; Turing machines; recent concepts in algorithm theory. Prerequisite:
Permission of the instructor.

CO 581 SPECIAL TOPICS IN COMPUTER SCIENCE 3 s.h.

Seminar in advanced topics from Computer Science; content will vary depending

on the interests of the instructor and students (consult department for currently planned

topics). May be repeated for additional credit. Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.

CO 601 FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTER PROGRAMMING 3 s.h.

Introduction to digital computer programming. Development of problem solving skills
using flowcharting and a problem oriented language, such as FORTRAN. Four to
five programs required. Description of a large problem from students field of interest
for nossihie nomniitpr <;nliitinn Nn nrfirpniilsite.

82— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

CONSUMER SERVICES

Graduate courses in Consumer Services are primarily designed to pro-
vide in-depth study in particular areas of home economics. A graduate degree
in Consumer Services is pending. Credits in these courses may be used
towards a degree in Home Economics Education.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

CS 533 CONSUMER SERVICES STUDY TOUR 1-6 s.h.

Offered to broaden the scope of experience and understanding of fashion in cloth-
ing, textiles, and interior design. Historic costumes, textiles, and decorative arts are
viewed. Fashion houses, designer salons, cottage industry centers, retail stores and
museums are visited.

CS 534 QUALITY CONTROL IN TEXTILES 3 s.h.

Physical properties explored through microscopic examination and use of textile
testing equipment for fabric analysis. Prerequisite: CS 314 Textiles, or equivalent.
Two lecture hours, two laboratory hours.

CS 553 FLAT PATTERN DESIGN 3 s.h.

Garment design achieved by use of flat pattern techniques. An understanding is

developed for the interrelationships of garment design, fabric, fit, and construction

processes. Two major projects required. One hour lecture, three hours laboratory.

CS 554 TAILORING 3 s.h.

Various tailoring methods are studied and applied in the selection, fitting, and con-
struction of a tailored garment. Consumer problems in the selection of ready-to-wear
apparel are investigated. A research study or project is required. One hour lecture,
three hour laboratory.

CS 555 DRAPING 3 s.h.

in-depth study of the principles involved in fashion design, draping principles, and
the manipulation of fabric to conform to the human figure. Students will pad a form
to individual measurements and design garments that are both individual and origi-
nal. Two major projects required. One hour lecture, three hours laboratory.

CS 556 HISTORIC COSTUME 3 s.h.

Chronological study of historic costume from ancient times to the present day, em-
phasizing style details as well as social, economic, political, religious, and aesthetic
influences on design of clothing. Three lecture hours.

CS 561 MICROWAVE COOKING TECHNOLOGY 3 S.h.

Study of the electronic technology, selection, care and use of the microwave oven.
Basic physical and chemical concepts related to microwave cooking will be included,
individual investigative research problems will be required. Two lecture hours plus
two lab hours per week.

CS 562 HISTORIC INTERIORS 3 s.h.

Chronological study from ancient times to the mid-19th Century of the dominant
influences and characteristics of historical interiors, furniture and ornamental design.
Emphasis placed upon style detail and its relationship to social, economic, political,
religious and aesthetic influence, and to the contemporary scene. Paper required.
Three lecture hours.

Programs and Courses - 83
Consumer Services

CS 563 MODERN INTERIORS 3 s.h.

Chronological study from mid-19th Century to the present of the dominant influences
and characteristics of 20th Century interiors, furniture and ornamental design. Em-
phasis placed upon style detail and its relationship to social, economic, political, reli-
gious and aesthetic influence, and to the contemporary scene. Paper required. Three
lecture hours.

CS 564 INTERIOR PLANNING AND DRAWING 3 s.h.

Lifespace analysis and design as related to residential applications. Presentation,
appropriate media, equipment and techniques will be stressed. Freehand and mechan-
ical methods employed to depict floor plans, elevations and construction details. A
research project related to professional interests is required. One hour lecture, three
hours lab per week.

CS 630 CLOTHING AND HUMAN BEHAVIOR 3 s.h.

Understanding factors affecting clothing decisions of differing individuals and
families. Cultural, social psychological and economic influences are considered. Con-
cepts from anthropology, sociology, psychology and economics are explored in stud-
ying the relation of clothing to human behavior.

CS 631 CREATIVE CLOTHING 3 s.h.

Factors that influence clothing design and sources of design inspiration are inves-
tigated. Lines, shapes, colors, and textures are studied in the creation of clothing
to fit the human body. Effects of fabric finishes, drapability, and dimensional stability
on design are explored. Two major projects required.

CS 632 RECENT DEVELOPMENTS IN TEXTILES 3 s.h.

Designed to acquaint the student with the new developments in textiles as they
affect the consumer. Emphasis on understanding factors involved in selection, use
and care of new fibers, fabrics and finishes.

CS 650 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

Principles of management are studied in-depth as they encompass conditions of
the household or family. A systems approach is used to analyze the components and
functions of home management. Management of resources is emphasized to improve
day-to-day living of families and individuals with different lifestyles. Individual research
on pertinent topics is required.

CS 655 CONSUMER ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Problems dealing with industry, government regulations and consumer relation-
ships with emphasis given to effects of current economic and social forces. Individual
investigations are required.

CS 656 PROBLEMS IN FAMILY FINANCE 3 s.h.

Advanced problems in personal and family finance. Individual investigations in cur-
rent situations are required.

CS 661 CONSUMER ELECTRONICS 3 s.h.

In-depth study of household equipment in relation to energy and its distribution
and consumption throughout the network systems of the house. Individual problems
required.

CS 662 PROBLEMS IN HOUSING 3 s.h.

Private and public housing problems posed by an urbanizing society and approaches
to their solution are studied. Social, economic, physical and psychological factors
are explored. Three hours lecture.

84 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

CS 663 PROBLEMS IN INTERIOR DESIGN 3 s.h.

Advanced work in the design, selection and arrangement of furnishings for residen-
tial interiors are studied in relation to the fulfillment of human needs and the applica-
tion to interior design problems.

CS 664 LIVING ENVIRONMENTS FOR OLDER ADULTS 3 s.h.

Social, psychological, physical, and economic concerns of the older adult are con-
sidered in relation to housing alternatives. Selected legislation and current programs
are investigated, evaluated and compared to proposals for a more livable and satis-
fying near environment.

COUNSELOR EDUCATION

Department offerings include Master of Arts, Master of Education and
Doctor of Education degree programs. Commonwealth approved programs
leading to certification as elementary school counselor, secondary school
counselor, supervisor of guidance services, and supervisor of pupil person-
nel services are also available.

Degree Programs

MASTER OF ARTS IN ADULT AND COMMUNITY EDUCATION

The Master of Arts in the Adult and Community Education (ACE) Pro-
gram is a leadership training program v^^hich prepares students for work in
educational settings in communities; schools; business and industry; and
social, health, and recreational agencies. It is designed to accommodate
qualified professionals from a wide variety of backgrounds who seek knowl-
edge and skills to work with adults in traditional as well as non-traditional
educational situations.

The ACE Program addresses the needs of the changing times and
changing student population by providing a flexible yet intensive curricu-
lum with a broad based approach to contemporary learning. The program
offers a proportionate balance of practical field experience, academic train-
ing, and individual research.

A minimum of 36 hours is required for the degree. These include 24
credits which may be individualized to allow students to pursue an area of
special interest. Required courses are AC 620, AC 621, AC 622, AC 623,
AC 625, AC 635, AC 640, GR 615, and GR 650 or AC 645. Students are
also required to take six hours in electives. The thesis is optional; AC 645
may be taken in its place.

MASTER OF ARTS IN COUNSELING SERVICES

The Master of Arts degree program in Counseling Services is designed
for students seeking preparation leading to counseling and counseling-
related employment in community and business settings. Student programs
are individually designed to prepare them to work in any of a number of set-
tings, including mental health centers, specialized community agencies,
vocational or rehabilitation programs, correctional institutions, health care
settings, social services, and business and industry.

Students enrolled in the Master of Arts degree program will complete
36 (includes thesis) or 39 (without thesis) hours of credit for the degree. The
program requires the following courses or their equivalents: CE 620, CE

Programs and Courses — 85
Consumer Services
Counselor Education

633, CE 635, CE 637, CE 639, CE 641 , GR 51 6 and GR 61 5. Students are
also required to take from nine to twelve hours in supporting electives.

MASTER OF ARTS IN STUDENT PERSONNEL SERVICES

Professional preparation in this program is designed for students who
plan to seek employment in student affairs in higher education. All students
are required to complete an internship in their potential area of employment.
Students in the program complete 33 credit hours for the degree. The fol-
lowing courses or their equivalents are required: CE 633, CE 637, CE 641 ,
GR 516. GR 615, ST 626, ST 627, ST 628, ST 629, and ST 630. Students
must take a minimum of three credit hours in electives.

MASTER OF EDUCATION

Students seeking the Master of Education degree who do not plan to
obtain Commonwealth certification as a school counselor must complete
thirty-three credit hours for the degree. The following courses are required:
CE629orCE 639; CE 631; CE 633; FE 611, 612, or 613; GR 516 and GR
615. In addition to the required courses, students must take fifteen addi-
tional credit hours. Twelve of these credit hours must carry an AC, CE, or
ST prefix. Courses are selected on the basis of the student's personal needs
and vocational goals.

Certification Programs

Elementary and Secondary School Counselors— To qualify for institu-
tional endorsement and Commonwealth certification the student must com-
plete a forty-five credit hour competency-based program to include field
experience and all requirements for the Master of Education degree.

While teaching experience is not a prerequisite for admission, students
should have or obtain an understanding of educational philosophy, objec-
tives, and practices. They should also understand the basic principles of
psychology, sociology, and related fields; and possess sufficient background
in mathematics to comprehend the statistical concepts and methods with
which the counselor must be familiar.

All students will take the following courses or their equivalents: CE 631 ;
CE 633; CE 638; CE 655; FE 611, 612, or 613; GR 516; and GR 615.

Students seeking Commonwealth certification as elementary school
counselors will also complete CE 625, CE 626, CE 627, CE 629. CE 640
plus a minimum of six credit hours in supporting electives.

In addition to the courses outlined above, students seeking Common-
wealth certification as secondary school counselors will take CE 635. CE
636, CE 637, and CE 639, CE 641 plus six credit hours in supporting
electives.

Supervisor of Guidance Services and Supervisor of Pupil Person-
nel Services — These two areas of study are six year, competency-based,
management-oriented programs. They are designed for the preparation and
certification of guidance services supervisors or pupil personnel services
supervisors in grades K-12. Applicants for both certificates must have suitable
academic credentials to include the master's degree. The supervisor of gui-
dance services applicant must have at least one year of experience as a
school counselor. The supervisor of pupil personnel services applicant must
have at least one year of experience as a pupil personnel specialist.

86 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Students in both certificate programs will take the following core courses
or their equivalents: CE 630, CE 643, CE 644, CE 645, CE 646, CE 647,
CE 651, CE 660, CO 502, FE 515, MG 630.

Students in the Supervisor of Guidance Services program will also take
CE 650.

Students in the Supervisor of Pupil Personnel Services program will
take CE 649 in addition to the core courses.

Both certificate programs require the completion of a minimum of forty-
eight credit hours which includes a twelve-hour internship.

DOCTOR OF EDUCATION

The degree program is specifically designed to meet the needs of human
service specialists who desire to become supervisors of human services and
for those supervisors who desire to refine and upgrade their competencies.
Students may choose from doctoral program concentrations that lead to the
development of competencies needed to function in one of the following
areas: supervisor of guidance services, supervisor of pupil personnel serv-
ices, supervisor of student personnel services in higher education, supervi-
sor of human services in government or business, or a teacher in higher
education.

Sixty-nine credit hours beyond the master's degree is required. Students
are required to take the following courses or their equivalents: CE 630, CE
643, CE 644, CE 645, CE 646, CE 648, CE 650, CE 651, CO 601, GR 517
and MG 630. Students are also required to complete a twelve-hour minor,
a twelve-hour internship, and a twelve-hour dissertation.

Course descriptions for required courses outside the Department may
be found in the following areas: CO courses, see COMPUTER SCIENCE;
FE courses, see FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION; GR courses, GENERAL
SERVICE COURSES; and MG courses, see BUSINESS MANAGEMENT.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

AC 620 INTRODUCTION TO ADULT AND

COMMUNITY EDUCATION 3 s.h.

A survey course which examines the fields of Adult and Community Education
philosophically and historically and in terms of current programs and processes. The
course includes the study of Adult and Community Education principles and con-
cept as well as available literature and resources.

AC 621 THE ADULT LEARNER 3 s.h.

This course focuses on the adult as a learner— his physiological, psychological,
sociological, and intellectual characteristics and how they affect learning.

AC 622 PROGRAM AND PROCESS DEVELOPMENT

IN ADULT AND COMMUNITY EDUCATION 3 s.h.

A knowledge and skill-building course designed for present and future Adult and

Community Education practitioners. This how-to-course will examine concepts and

practices relevant to program development in traditional and non-traditional educational

settings.

Programs and Courses
Counselor Education

AC 623 ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION

IN ADULT AND COMMUNITY EDUCATION 3 s.h.

This course introduces the student to basic theories of educational administration
and management and organizational structure. It includes a study of and application
of the tasks, tools, strategies and leadership role of the adult and community educa-
tion administrator. Prerequisites: AC 620, 622.

AC 625 TEACHING AND LEARNING IN

ADULT AND COMMUNITY EDUCATION 3 s.h.

This course examines: teaching-learning theories as they relate to adults; the
teaching-learning process in a variety of educational learning settings; instructional
methods, techniques and devices which are effective with adults; and instructional
designs and evaluative methods effective in the teaching-learning process. Prereq-
uisite: AC 621 and permission.

AC 635 SEMINAR IN ADULT AND COMMUNITY EDUCATION 3 s.h.

This course has a research emphasis. It involves an intensive study of special topics
in Adult and Community Education. Research content varies according to student
interest. Prerequisites: 12 credits in Adult and Community Education.

AC 640 INTERNSHIP IN ADULT AND COMMUNITY EDUCATION 6 s.h.

This is an individually designed field project where students work with a site proj-
ect advisor and an university advisor. The 6 credit Internship is a single project
designed in two phases, each earning 3 credits. Prerequisite: Advisor Approval.

AC 645 PRACTICAL RESEARCH IN

ADULT AND COMMUNITY EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Practical research in Adult and Community Education is designed to have students
conduct and report a formal research study in their field of interest. Students are to
formulate a research problem and design a plan of inquiry that will provide an an-
swer(s) to their stated research problem. Students must be able to interpret their re-
search findings and communicate them both orally and in writing at a professional
level. Prerequisite: Advisor Approval.

CE 620 COMMUNITY COUNSELING 3 s.h.

Provides an introduction to the work of the community counselor in a variety of
roles in many different settings.

CE 625 INDIVIDUAL ANALYSIS (CHILDREN UNDER 12) 3 s.h.

Principles, problems, methods, and content involved in understanding the child
and his/her developing self-concept.

CE 626 CAREER EDUCATION 3 s.h

Study of how education and the community help all individuals become familiar
with the values of a work-oriented society and the integration of these values into
their personal value structure.

CE 627 CONSULTATIVE AND COUNSELING THEORY 3 s.h.

Theories, objectives, principles and practices of consulting and counseling with
individuals and groups are covered. Emphasis is placed on techniques and practices
related to children.

CE 629 GROUP PROCEDURES 3 s.h.

Emphasis is placed upon understanding and developing group techniques related
to the development and growth of children.

88 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

CE 630 PROFESSIONAL, ETHICAL, AND

LEGAL CONSIDERATIONS 3 s.h.

Emphasis is placed on legal and ethical issues associated with the human serv-
ices. It analyzes the function of ethics in the profession and study of the legal rights,
duties, and liabilities of human sen/ice practitioners.

CE 631 INTRODUCTION TO GUIDANCE SERVICES 3 s.h.

Overview of genesis and development of guidance in American education, includ-
ing philosophical concepts, psychological theories, cultural and social influences, and
current practices.

CE 633 EVALUATION TECHNIOUES 3 s.h.

Basic concepts utilized in testing, emphasizing data concerning purposes and types

of tests, test administration, test scoring, test validity and reliability, and test selection.

CE 635 INDIVIDUAL ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Principles, problems, methods, and content involved in understanding the adoles-
cent and adult and their developing self-concepts.

CE 636 CAREER DEVELOPMENT 3 s.h.

Emphasizes how individuals acquire knowledge, understanding, skills, abilities,
attitudes, and values which will lead to effective career behaviors. Considers career
education, vocational development theories, decision-making skills, and the processing
and use of information.

CE 637 COUNSELING AND CONSULTATIVE THEORY 3 s.h.

Theories, objectives, principles and practices of counseling and consulting with
individuals are covered. Counseling skills and interviewing techniques are presented
and practiced to prepare the student for the practicum experience.

CE 638 MANAGEMENT OF THE GUIDANCE SERVICES 3 s.h.

Helps the school counselor acquire necessary competencies to manage guidance
services. Emphasis placed upon planning, organizing, actuating, and controlling func-
tions of management as applied to the guidance services. Prerequisites: CE 631,
633, 636, 637 and 639 or their equivalents.

CE 639 GROUP PROCEDURES 3 s.h.

Emphasis will be placed upon the nature of groups, techniques involved in the de-
velopment of group dynamics, formation and operation of groups, organization and
structure of groups, and the influence of the group.

CE 640 SUPERVISED PRACTICUM 3 s.h.

Practice in developing and using individual and group techniques for those who
work with children. Observing, interviewing, and consulting procedures will be de-
veloped. Prerequisite: CE 627.

CE 641 SUPERVISED PRACTICUM 3 s.h,

Practicum experience in counseling and consulting techniques, including interviews,
observations, written reports, and group interaction. Techniques for working with
adolescents and adults are emphasized. Emphasis is placed on the development of
effective interpersonal relationship skills. Prerequisite: CE 637.

CE 642 SCHOOL SERVICES 3 s.h.

Examines how the educational philosophies and objectives of elementary and secon-
dary schools are related to the development of the philosophy and objectives of the
school services — instructional, management, and pupil.

Programs and Courses — 89
Counselor Education

CE 643 PLANNING HUMAN SERVICES 3 s h.

Students will critically analyze the written philosophies and objectives of the hu-
man service field in which they plan to practice. Students will develop plans based
on the philosophy and objectives of the organization that include personnel, facili-
ties, materials, and money.

CE 644 ORGANIZING HUMAN SERVICES 3 s.h.

Students will identify tasks necessary to execute the plans which will fulfill the ob-
jectives of the organization. Personnel qualified to perform the tasks will be identi-
fied. Techniques to relate tasks to personnel will be examined and appropriate
organizational patterns developed. Prerequisite: CE 643.

CE 645 HUMAN RELATIONS AND COMMUNICATIONS 3 s.h.

Emphasis will be placed on the development of human relations and communica-
tion skills in human service organizations. Human relations principles and techniques
to elicit cooperation from personnel and skills in communicating with personnel par-
ticipating in the organization will be developed.

CE 646 INTERPERSONAL SENSITIVITY 3 s.h.

Participants will explore their interpersonal interaction style in groups and individ-
ually. Human potential of the students will be developed as they enter into authentic,
honest and trusting relationships within the context of a small group experience en-
couraging an examination and understanding of one's self and one's impact on others.

CE 647 PUPIL SERVICES 3 s.h.

Philosophy, objectives and roles of each of the pupil services will be considered.
Emphasis will be placed on the team approach to services. Pupil services will be viewed
as a facilitating function contributing to the development of individual pupils and to
success of the instructional and management processes of the school.

CE 648 ADVANCED RESEARCH IN COUNSELOR EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Research literature in counselor education and research design are covered. The
student will develop and present a trial dissertation proposal.

CE 649 PRINCIPLES OF SUPERVISION 3 s.h.

Designed to permit the student to study theory, research, and evolving concepts
of supervision.

CE 650 SUPERVISION OF HUMAN DEVELOPMENT SPECIALISTS 3 s.h.
A practicum designed to provide allied experience in supervision of the human de-
velopment practitioner. Focus is placed on assisting others in the process of developing
interpersonal counseling relationship skills.

CE 651 EVALUATION PRINCIPLES 3 s.h.

Student will evaluate programs of services as related to the objectives of the stu-
dents potential fields of practice. Emphasis will be placed on the development of ap-
propriate research and preparation and reporting of recommendations based upon
findings. Prerequisites: CE 643, 644.

CE 652 SKILLS APPROACH TO DECISION MAKING 3 s.h.

Decision-making is viewed as a multi-dimensional life process which integrates all
facets of self in life planning and goal settings. Games, role playing, group work, and
related experiences are utilized in providing experiential exposure to a diversity of
decision-making models which can be applied to a variety of work settings.

90— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

CE 655 FIELD EXPERIENCE 3 s.h.

This course provides a supervised field experience for students in the counselor
education programs. The plan and scope of the field experience will be determined
by the student and the faculty on an individual basis. Prerequisite: core courses in
master's program.

CE 656 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 s.h.

Topic pertinent to the individual's program of study. By permission of department
chairperson and advisor only.

CE 660 INTERNSHIP IN COUNSELOR EDUCATION 12 s.h.

The internship provides an opportunity to apply didactic experiences in an actual
work setting. Sites must be approved by the department.

ST 626 HISTORY OF HIGHER EDUCATION

IN THE UNITED STATES 3 s.h.

Growth and trends in higher education with emphasis on the twentieth century.
In addition to the traditional modes of post secondary education, continuing educa-
tion programs, community colleges, and adult education will also be examined. A
secondary focus will be the evolving role of student affairs.

ST 627 STUDENT PERSONNEL SERVICES

IN HIGHER EDUCATION 3 S.h.

Overview of student personnel work in higher education, highlighting functional
area of student personnel, organization, philosophy, and the role of the services ap-
plied to the institution and the profession.

ST 628 INTERNSHIP IN STUDENT PERSONNEL SERVICES 3 s.h.

Affords the student an opportunity to gain practical experience in dealing with the-
ories of his/her specialties. Includes one or two semesters in one of the student per-
sonnel offices at lUP or another institution under the leadership of a departmental
director or coordinator.

ST 629 STUDENT DEVELOPMENT IN HIGHER EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Provides an overview of student development theories and the student develop-
ment model. Includes the application of assessment, goal setting, intervention strate-
gies, environmental management, and evaluation in higher education settings.
Explores issues such as changing sex roles, sexual identity, life planning, and needs
of special student groups.

ST 630 MANAGEMENT OF STUDENT PERSONNEL SERVICES 3 s.h.

The course teaches managerial concepts and skills for managing student person-
nel programs or services. Concepts covered include planning, leadership, manage-
ment, supervision, organizational development, goal setting, collective bargaining,
legal issues, and team building.

The Thesis/No Thesis Option, Master's Program

Several lUP master's degree programs offer the graduate student a
thesis/no-thesis option.

When the no-thesis option is chosen, additional approved course work-
usually six or more credit hours Is required.

The typical committee thesis arrangement (3-6 s.h.) has the student
working with a committee of four faculty members including the student's
advisor and two faculty members, one of whom may or may not be a mem-
ber of the program's department. The committee may include an off-campus

Programs and Courses — 91
Counselor Education
Criminology

person with special expertise as part of the four if requested by the depart-
ment and approved by the Graduate Dean.

DEPARTMENT

DEGREE

THESIS

CREDITS

COMMENTS

Adult/Community
Education

MA.

Optional

AC 645 may be
substituted for
the thesis.

Counselor Education

M.ED.

Optional

M.A.

Optional

—

Thesis

No Thesis

Student Personnel
Services

M.A.

Optional

CRIMINOLOGY

The Department of Criminology offers a program of studies leading to
a Master of Arts Degree in Criminology. The program is designed to prepare
the graduate student for upper level administrative positions within the
criminal justice field and the pursuit of a doctoral education. The design of
the program allows the student to choose from a wide variety of courses
within the department of criminology as well as elective courses in related
departments.

Department Admission Requirements

In addition to meeting the requirements for admission to the Graduate
School, a student intending to work toward a Master of Arts in Criminology
will be required to have the following prerequisite academic and/or profes-
sional preparation:

A. Students should be able to demonstrate a sound understanding of
criminological theory and the criminal justice system; by

B. Having knowledge gained through practice experience within the
system of justice, or by specialized training, or completed graduate
or undergraduate studies in a related field.*

*AII applicants for the Master of Arts Degree in Criminology program must
possess the essence of the knowledge offered in the undergraduate (BA)
program core courses. These courses are:

CR 102 — Survey of Criminology

CR 210-Criminal Law

CR 300 — Theory of Complex Criminal Justice Organizations

CR 306— Criminological Research Methods

CR 400 — Theoretical Criminology

CR 401 —Contemporary Issues in Criminology

If upon the consideration of the Department of Criminology Graduate Com-
mittee an applicant is deemed to be deficient the Department, through the
Director of Graduate Studies, will require appropriate undergraduate courses
to remove these deficiencies.

92 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MASTER OF ARTS IN CRIMINOLOGY

Students must choose between a thesis or a no-thesis curriculum:
Thesis Degree Requirements — A total of 36 semester hours is re-
quired including CR 600, CR 601 , CR 605, CR 61 0, CR 630, CR 631 , CR 849,
and CR 850. Courses required from other disciplines include Philosophy
of Ethics and Statistics. A student may be exempt from either of these require-
ments if he/she has demonstrated competency as determined by the Director
of Graduate Studies. Students who elect the thesis option must also com-
plete six hours of elective courses for a total of 36 hours.

No-Thesis Degree Requirements — A total of 36 semester hours is
required including CR 600, CR 601 , CR 605, CR 610, CR 630. CR 631 , and
CR 849. Courses required from other disciplines include Philosophy of Ethics
and Statistics. A student may be exempt from either of these requirements
if he/she has demonstrated competency as determined by the Director of
Graduate Studies. Students who elect the no-thesis option must complete
12 hours of elective work for a total of 36 hours.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

CR 600 CRIMINOLOGICAL THEORY 3 s.h.

An examination of criminological theories with emphasis on origins and applica-
tions of relevant theoretical approaches to crime and criminally deviant behavior. Re-
quired of all graduate students.

CR 601 PROSEMINAR 3 s.h.

Survey of current research, critical issues in the administration of justice and
criminological theory. Designed to acquaint the student with recent developments
in the discipline of criminology. Required of all graduate students.

CR 605 RESEARCH METHODS 3 s.h.

Methods and techniques of research in Criminology. An in-depth examination of
the role of research in the analysis, interpretation, and clarification of problems in
Criminology and the administration of justice. The development of a thesis prospec-
tus will be an end product of the course. Required of all graduate students.

CR 610 LEGAL ISSUES IN CRIMINOLOGY 3 s.h.

An in-depth study of contemporary legal issues faced by criminal justice profes-
sionals. Emphasis is placed on criminal constitution problems as well as the judicial
review of administrative decisions made by criminal justice organizations. Required
of all graduate students.

CR 630 SEMINAR IN ADMINISTRATION AND MANAGEMENT

IN CRIMINAL JUSTICE 3 s.h.

The study of bureaucracy and complex organization with emphasis on the con-
cepts and practices of the organization and management of agencies in the administra-
tion of justice. Required of all graduate students.

CR 631 SYSTEMS DYNAMICS IN THE ADMINISTRATION

OF JUSTICE 3 s.h.

A study of dynamic systems and analytical techniques relevant for understanding

new perspectives of the administration of justice. Required of all graduate students.

CR 650 SEMINAR IN ADVANCED CRIMINOLOGICAL THOUGHT 3 s.h.

An in-depth examination of select criminological thought.

Programs and Courses — 93
Criminology
Economics

CR 660 SEMINAR IN ADVANCED CRIMINAL LAW 3 s.h.

A study of the theory of law as a means of social control, advanced problems and
issues in the use of the criminal sanctions, and alternative legal means of controlling
deviant conduct.

CR 665 CRIMINAL JUSTICE PLANNING AND EVALUATION 3 s.h.

The study of planning and evaluation in criminology and the administration of justice,
the literature and practices including problems and issues and tasks confronting plan-
ners and evaluators.

CR 670 SEMINAR IN CONTEMPORARY CORRECTIONS 3 s.h.

An examination of current issues and problems in contemporary corrections.

CR 675 SEMINAR IN CONTEMPORARY LAW ENFORCEMENT 3 s.h.

A social psychological examination of current issues and problems in contemporary
law enforcement.

CR 681 SPECIAL TOPICS 3 s.h.

Special topics courses are offered at the discretion of the department in a wide

area of subjects directly related to law enforcement, courts, corrections or security.

CR 685 SEMINAR IN CONTEMPORARY JUVENILE

JUSTICE AND DELINQUENCY 3 s.h.

An examination of current issues and problems in contemporary juvenile justice
and delinquency.

CR 690 SEMINAR IN THE CONTEMPORARY JUDICIAL SYSTEM 3 s.h.

An examination of current issues and problems in the contemporary judicial system.

CR 698 GRADUATE READINGS IN CRIMINOLOGY 3 s.h.

With faculty supervision, students will read at least six major criminological texts
and participate in a seminar situation for the purpose of discussing the reading
materials.

CR 699 INDEPENDENT/INDIVIDUALIZED STUDY 3 s.h.

Research of a significant issue or problem in criminology or the administration of
justice. Instructor and graduate director approval required. May be taken twice for
a maximum of six semester hours.

CR 849 COMPREHENSIVE EXAMINATION 0 s.h.

Written and/or oral examination to determine competency. Required of all students
during the semester in which they are enrolled for their last graduate course.

CR 850 THESIS 3-6 s.h.

ECONOMICS

The Economics Department does not currently offer a graduate degree.
The graduate courses offered by the department are a component of master's
degree programs offered by other departments and colleges.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

EC 501 FOUNDATIONS OF MODERN ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Not open to students who have credits of C or better in undergraduate EC 121-122
sequence. Survey of micro and macroeconomics designed for the student who is
not already well-grounded in the field.

94 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

EC 520 HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT 3 s.h.

Examination of social, political, intellectual, and economic origins of work of prom-
inent past economists, and of the content and impact of their work. Prerequisite: EC
501 or credits of C or better in six s.h. of Principles of Economics or permission of
the instructor.

EC 521 MACROECONOMIC ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Covers national income theory with emphasis on the causes and cures of inflation
and unemployment. Includes study of consumption and investment theories, fiscal
and monetary policy, national income accounts, and growrth analysis. Prerequisite:
EC 501 or credits of C or better in six s.h. of Principles of Economics or permission
of the instructor.

EC 522 MICROECONOMIC ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Analysis of the theories of consumer demand, the firm, exchange, market struc-
tures, distribution, and welfare economics. Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits of C or
better in EC 122, Principles of Economics II, or permission of the instructor.

EC 525 MONETARY ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Structure and function of monetary institutions including the Federal Reserve
System, commercial banks, and financial intermediaries, theory of monetary economy,
and monetary policy. Prerequisite: EC 501 , or credits of C or better in six s.h. of Prin-
ciples of Economics or permission of the instructor.

EC 530 LABOR ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

History, structure and operations of trade unions and employer organizations; major
Federal labor legislation; collective bargaining theory; wage determination; current
labor problems. Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits of C or better in six s.h. of Principles
of Economics or permission of the instructor.

EC 534 ECONOMICS OF CORPORATE DECISIONS 3 s.h.

Applies economic theory to corporate decision-making. Covers mathematical solu-
tions to various profit-maximization and cost minimization problems and examines
statistical estimation of demand and cost functions. Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits
of C or better in six s.h. of Principles of Economics or permission of the instructor.

EC 536 STATE AND LOCAL FINANCE 3 s.h.

Analysis of the character and consequences of state and local government revenue
procurement, expenditures, and fiscal systems. Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits of
C or better in six s.h. of Principles of Economics or permission of the instructor.

EC 541 CONTEMPORARY ECONOMIC ISSUES 3 s.h.

Problem areas of domestic economy. Primary focus in each semester is determined
by student-instructor interest. Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits of C or better in six
s.h. of Principles of Economics or permission of the instructor.

EC 545 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Nature of world economy, international trade, international investment, current in-
ternational institutions, and foreign economic policy of the United States. Prerequisite:
EC 501 or credits of C or better in six s.h. of Principles of Economics or permission
of the instructor.

EC 550 COMPARATIVE ECONOMIC SYSTEMS 3 s.h.

Basic economic issues in capitalism, socialism, communism, and fascism, and their
relationships to political and social problems. Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits of C
or better in six s.h. of Principles of Economics or permission of the instructor.

Programs and Courses - 95
Economics

EC 560 ECONOMICS OF HEALTH SERVICES 3 s.h.

Analysis of the allocation of resources in the health sector using dennand and supply
techniques. Pricing and output by physicians, hospitals, and their health agencies
are considered, along with National health insurance and current policy issues. Pre-
requisite: EC 501 or credits of C or better in six s.h. of Principles of Econonnics or
permission of the instructor.

EC 571 ECONOMICS OF LABOR LEGISLATION 3 s.h.

Economic background and effects of governmental regulation of labor relations,
with emphasis on a detailed examination of the National Labor Relations Act as
amended. Prerequisite: EC 530 or permission of the instructor.

EC 572 ECONOMICS OF WAGES AND EMPLOYMENT 3 s.h.

Analysis of wages and employment under various market structures. Also, an
analysis of the impact of labor market forces on wages, prices, and distributive shares.
Prerequisite: EC 530 or permission of the instructor.

EC 573 ECONOMICS OF HUMAN RESOURCES 3 s.h.

Analysis of the development and utilization of human resources with an emphasis
on the income and employment situation of minorities. Manpower policy options
designed to increase the value and use of human resources are also explored. Pre-
requisite: EC 530 or permission of the instructor.

EC 574 ECONOMICS OF EDUCATION 3 S.h.

Analysis of the costs and benefits of education, the impact of education on economic
growth, the private and public process of determining investment in education, and
planning at the institutional level. Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits of C or better in
six s.h. of Principles of Economics or permission of the instructor.

EC 580 SEMINAR 3 s.h.

Seminar in selected economic issues or problems. Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits

of C or better in six s.h. of Principles of Economics or permission of the instructor.

EC 582 URBAN ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Analysis of the structure of urban economy; goals, processes, problems and policy
in urban economic development. Prerequisite: EC 501 or grade of C or better in six
s.h. of Principles of Economics or permission of the instructor.

EC 583 REGIONAL ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Process of regional economic growth, location theory, basic techniques of regional

analysis, public and private area development programs. Prerequisite: EC 501 or grade

of C or better in six s.h. of Principles of Economics or permission of the instructor.

EC 634 ECONOMICS OF CORPORATE DECISIONS 3 s.h.

Applies economic theory to corporate decision making. Covers mathematical solu-
tions to various profit-maximization and cost minimization problems and examines
statistical estimation of demand and cost functions. Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits
of C or better in six s.h. of Principles of Economics or permission of the instructor.

EC 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-6 s.h.

Directed readings, written assignments, and research on a specific topic determined
by the student and the instructor. Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits of C or better in
six s.h. of Principles of Economics or permission of the instructor.

96— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY

The Educational Psychology Department offers programs leading to a
Master's of Education, School Psychology certification, and Doctor of Educa-
tion degree. The Master of Education programs may be taken with an
emphasis on School Psychology, Human Development and Learning, or
Education Evaluation and Research. The Doctor of Education is in the area
of School Psychology.

After admission to the Graduate School, the candidate must secure the
Departmental Application Packet, which includes further information from
the Educational Psychology Department. Potential candidates will be inter-
viewed by the Program Admissions Committee after the departmental appli-
cation, copies of transcripts from The Graduate School, and official Graduate
Record Examination scores, including Education or Psychology are received.
An adviser will be assigned to approved candidates and no coursework may
be scheduled without the adviser's approval. The adviser may approve alter-
nate courses to meet required competencies.

Admission to the programs will be based on evidence of previous
scholarship and/or potential for academic success, personal and professional
qualities deemed necessary for adequate functioning as a specialist in educa-
tion and motivation for professional excellence. Continued enrollment once
begun, is expected. Exceptions to this policy must be filed in writing and
approved by the student's program committee.

Candidates for admission to master's degree programs must have a
bachelor's degree from an accredited institution. Candidates for admission
to the post-master's certification program must have a master's degree from
an accredited institution.

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN
EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY

The Master of Education degree in Educational Psychology program
(33-36 s.h., depending upon choice of thesis or non-thesis option) has been
designed to give the interested student a broad theoretical and practical
background in the areas of education and psychology. There are three majors
in this degree.

General requirements are: All students will take the Professional
Development Area (total of nine s.h.). Humanistic Studies (three s.h.), select
one FE 611, FE 612, FE 613; Behavioral Studies (three s.h.), select one
EP 604 or EP 578, EP 573, EP 576, CE 629, EX 631 , or EX 500; Research
(six s.h.), GR 615, GR 516.

Requirements for the three major areas are as follows:

School Psychology — (23-27 s.h.) is designed to prepare the interested
student for entrance into the post-master's certification program. Professional
Specialization courses (six s.h.) EP 618, EP 662, Subject Area and/or Elec-
tive (1 7-21 s.h.) EP 604, EP 578, EP 576, EP 572, EP 573, EP 650, EP 681 ,
ED 601, PC 640, EX 631, EX 500, EX 639, EX 660, EX 665, CE 625 or
CE 635, SH 630, SH 614, EP 850.

Human Development and Learning — (23-27 s.h.) is designed to
prepare the teacher to be more effective in the classroom and to have a
balanced program in Educational Psychology. Professional Specialization

Programs and Courses — 97
Educational Psychology

courses (six s.h.) EP 618, EP 604 or EP 578, Subject Area and/or Electives
(17-21 s.h.) EP 604, EP 578, EP 576, EP 572, EP 573, EP 650, EP 681,
AC 520, PC 569, PC 640, EX 500, EX 639, EX 665, CE 625 or CE 635,
EP 850.

Educational Evaluation and Research — (23-27 s.h.) is designed to
provide a broad theoretical and practical background in Educational Evalua-
tion and Research. Professional Specialization (six s.h.) EP 618, EP 578,
Subject Area and/or Electives (17-21 s.h.) EP 604, EP 662, EP 576, EP 573,
EP 681 , GR 61 5, GR 51 6, GR 51 7, CO 502. CE 648, EP 850. Thesis required.

CERTIFICATE OF ADVANCED STUDY

IN SCHOOL PSYCHOLOGY -

POST-MASTER'S DEGREE PROGRAM

A certificate of Advanced Study in School Psychology may be issued
to those students who have completed a minimum of 66-69 graduate hours,
33 of which should be approved graduate hours in the university beyond
the master's degree, and who have met all of the requirements for certifica-
tion as a school psychologist.

The School Psychology Program is designed for those individuals who
are seeking certification as school psychologists. The objectives of the pro-
gram are to train competent individuals who will demonstrate (1) an ability
to evaluate students and prescribe interventions, (2) an understanding of
individual and group dynamics, (3) an understanding of the educational
system and learning process, and (4) an ability to apply all acquired profes-
sional competencies. There is a required comprehensive exam, practicum,
and internship experiences. Certification as a school psychologist is recom-
mended when all of the indicated role competencies are demonstrated by
the candidate. Completion of a plan of study may be pursued on either a
full-time or part-time schedule of coursework.

The Professional Specialization studies courses for the program for 21-24
s.h. are EP 611, EP612, EP613, EP 663 and EP 650-EP 651 (12-15 s.h.).
The other approved courses for nine s.h. to meet competency requirements
are EX 666 or EP 581, and PC 635, PC 647. For final certification other
courses and/or additional internship hours may be required by the School
Psychology Committee to satisfy competency requirements.

For descriptions of EX courses, see section on SPECIAL EDUCATION;
for PC course, PSYCHOLOGY.

COOPERATIVE DOCTORATE IN

SCHOOL PSYCHOLOGY

The Doctor of Education (Ed.D) in School Psychology is designed as
a sixty-nine semester hour program beyond the master's degree. Thirty-three
hours of the program involve the post-master's preparation for certification
as a school psychologist in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania completed
at either Indiana University of Pennsylvania, California University of Penn-
sylvania, Edinboro University of Pennsylvania, or Millersville University of
Pennsylvania. The remaining thirty-six semester hours, designated as the
doctoral sequence, may be implemented to complete the plan of study for
the doctorate in School Psychology at Indiana University of Pennsylvania.

98 -Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Students will be able to enter the doctoral sequence only after comple-
tion of the 33 semester hour certification program in School Psychology.
Since the Ed.D. is a practitioner oriented degree, it will be recommended
that the students who apply to the program have at least two years of experi-
ence as a practicing school psychologist, part of which may be an intern-
ship. Completion of a plan of study may be pursued on either a full-time
or part-time schedule of coursework.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

EP 571 PSYCHOLOGY FOR TEACHING SEX EDUCATION 3 s.h.

This course is designed to present concepts and programs for teaching sex educa-
tion. The course includes detailed teaching strategies for the various grade levels
from K-12.

EP572 PSYCHOLOGY OF CHILDHOOD EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Studies relationship which physical, social, emotional, and intellectual development
have on theory and practice of childhood and pre-adolescent education.

EP 573 PSYCHOLOGY OF ADOLESCENT EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Concerned with study of significant characteristics of adolescence, and understand-
ing the role of cultural influences on formation of behavior.

EP 576 BEHAVIOR PROBLEMS 3 S.h.

Explores behavior problems encountered in classroom situations and gives causes,
characteristics and some remedial techniques.

EP578 LEARNING 3 s.h.

Explores learning theories and educational application in working with learning prob-
lems in the classroom.

EP 583 EDUCATION OF THE DISADVANTAGED CHILD 3 s.h.

Acquisition of necessary understandings of physiological, psychological, and social
implications relevant to working with and teaching disadvantaged children.

EP 585 HUMANIZING THE CLASSROOM 3 s.h.

An experimental course concerned with human-relations-skills training and par-
ticular emphasis on group process, non-verbal communication, listening and respond-
ing skills. The focus is primarily on the translation of these skills into effecting pro-
ductive classroom environments in educational settings.

EP 588 INTERPERSONAL EFFECTIVENESS AND

COMMUNICATION SKILLS 3 s.h.

Designed to increase professional effectiveness and improve communication skills
with educational, business, and industrial settings. Includes analysis of non-verbal
behaviors, active listening, and rational self-analysis and assertion skills.

EP 604 ADVANCED EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

An upward extension of Educational psychology with a systematic review of cur-
rent research and learning theory with emphasis on classroom application.

EP 61 1 INTRODUCTION TO SCHOOL PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

Designed for those students who are preparing to function as school psychologists,
and includes role concepts and other responsibilities of a school psychologist.

EP612 INDIVIDUAL EVALUATION I 3 s.h.

Individual testing and professional competency in Stanford-Binet Scale, Wechsler
Scales for children, and related tests of intelligence.

Programs and Courses — 99
Educational Psychology
Elementary Education

EP 613 INDIVIDUAL EVALUATION II 3 s.h.

Individual testing and professional competency in Stanford Binet Scale, Wechsler
Scales, and other pertinent individual diagnostic tests.

EP 618 INTERPRETATION OF EDUCATIONAL AND

PSYCHOLOGICAL TESTS 3 s.h.

Designed to provide the individual with information necessary to understand,
evaluate, and interpret results of educational and psychological tests accurately and
meaningfully.

EP650 INTERNSHIP I 3 s.h.

Supervised experiences in Educational Psychology. Prerequisite: For approved
candidates.

EP651 INTERNSHIP II 3-12 s.h.

Clinical and field experience with mentally and physically handicapped and emo-
tionally disturbed children. Prerequisite: For approved School Psychologist candidates.

EP 652 DOCTORAL INTERNSHIP 3 s.h.

Supervised field experience in psychological procedures and practices in an educa-
tional setting and/or facility appropriate to the special professional interests of the
student. Prerequisite: School Psychology major, Permission of instructor.

EP 662 PSYCHOTHERAPY AND GROUP DYNAMICS 3 s.h.

A systematic study of major techniques of counseling and psychotherapy, and appli-
cation of principles of group dynamics to educational settings.

EP663 PROJECTIVE TECHNIQUES 3 s.h.

An introduction to various personality and behavior assessment techniques cur-
rently used. Prerequisite: For approved School Psychologist candidates.

EP 664 SEI\^INAR IN SCHOOL PSYCHOLOGY I 3 s.h.

An examination of practices, trends, and issues in a specialized area of diagnosis.
The areas to be examined will be based on the predetermined interests of the students
and the expertise of the available faculty. Prerequisite: Permission of instructor.

EP 665 SEIVIINAR IN SCHOOL PSYCHOLOGY II 3 s.h.

An examination of practices, trends, and issues in a specialized area of treatment
or remediation. The areas to be examined will correspond to those covered in EP 664.
The focus of the seminar will be to develop the students' understanding and skills
in implementing appropriate treatment and remedial strategies in homes, school and
clinic settings. Prerequisite: Permission of instructor.

EP 681 SPECIAL TOPICS IN EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

Designed for those students who wish to do independent research in special areas.
Prerequisite: department chairperson permission.

ELEMENTARY EDUCATION

The Elementary Education master's curriculum is designed to assist the
graduate student to broaden or strengthen background in academic areas
and in professional education. The graduate student may elect one of several
specialized fields of study, including curricula in general elementary educa-
tion, early childhood education, and reading.

Upon admission to any of the Elementary Education programs, students
will be notified of an adviser by the Coordinator of the specific program. At
this time, the student and adviser outline a tentative program of studies.

TOO — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MASTER OF EDUCATION

IN ELEMENTARY EDUCATION

Students working toward a master's degree in Elementary Education
should complete 30 semester hours of work (thesis option) or 36 semester
hours of work (non-thesis option) from the following areas: Nine semester
hours in Professional Development, including a Foundations of Education
course, a Behavioral Studies course and Elements of Research; six semester
hours in a Specialization Core; 18 semester hours of Elementary Education
electives; and EL 680, Seminar in Advanced Research. With the approval
of the coordinator, when appropriate, six semester hours of workshop credit
or graduate electives may be applied to the master's degree.

GRADUATE PROGRAMS

IN EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION

Students seeking Instructional Level II certification with a specializa-
tion in early childhood education or a master of education degree specializ-
ing in early childhood must complete the following requirements: a minimum
of 24 s.h. is required for students with an Instructional I certificate seeking
an Instructional II certificate or 30 s.h. minimum is required for the master
of education degree program. Courses scheduled by the student should have
the approval of the program coordinator.

Students pursuing the M.Ed, with an Early Childhood concentration must
complete 30 s.h. (thesis option) or 36 s.h. (non-thesis option) from the follow-
ing areas: nine semester hours in Professional Development, including a
Foundations of Education course, a Behavioral Studies course, and Elements
of Research; six s.h. in Specialization Core; 18 s.h. of Elementary Educa-
tion electives including EL and EE courses; and EL 680, Seminar in Ad-
vanced Research. With the approval of the coordinator, when appropriate,
nine s.h. of graduate electives may be applied to the master's degree from
Sociology/Anthropology or Child Development/Family Relations. In addition
an Internship in one of the above areas can be included with the Specializa-
tion Core with the approval of the program coordinator.

THE DOCTORATE IN ELEMENTARY EDUCATION

The Doctor of Education degree in Elementary Education is designed
for those who wish to teach at the college or university level or who desire
to work in a teaching, supervisory, or administrative capacity. A candidate
for this degree is expected to acquire a broad knowledge of various aspects
of education, and to demonstrate, through the completion of an acceptable
dissertation, the ability to conduct an independent investigation of a topic
approved by an advisory committee.

A doctorate is defined as 90 semester hours of advanced study beyond
the undergraduate degree program. Using this criterion, students who have
already obtained a master's degree in education (30 semester hours) from
an accredited institution of higher learning would be responsible for approxi-
mately 60 remaining semester hours of study and research. In most cases,
approximately 45 semester hours, or 15 different 3 credit courses, would

Programs and Courses — 101
Elementary Education

be devoted to coursework. The remaining 15 credits would be allocated in
the internship (6 credits) and to the dissertation (9 credits). The exact number
of hours in coursework is determined by the director of the doctoral pro-
gram and doctoral committee members. Each doctoral applicant's creden-
tials are evaluated on an individual basis.

A complete description of the Doctor of Education program in Elemen-
tary Education can be obtained from the Department of Elementary Educa-
tion, Davis Hall.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

EE 660 EARLY CHILDHOOD STUDY TECHNIQUES

AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS 3 s.h.

Designed to provide the student with a specific method of studying children from
three through eight years. Students learn to observe, record and analyze pertinent
information, and to suggest ways to help children toward positive self development.
Tests for assessment of the young child in areas of perception, concept development,
self-inventories, general intellectual ability, readiness, and academic ability will be
examined, administered, and interpreted.

EE 661 EARLY CHILDHOOD PHILOSOPHY, CURRICULUM,

AND MATERIALS 3 s.h.

Introduces students to philosophy and historical background of pre-school educa-
tion and their influences on current programs and curriculum. Curriculum patterns
and strategies, including available materials, for schools for the younger child are
introduced and evaluated.

EE 662 EARLY CHILDHOOD FIELD STUDY EXPERIENCES 3 s.h.

Includes direct observation and teaching in early childhood programs. Seminar ses-
sions will be directed toward the study of appropriate strategies with immediate ap-
plication with children. Students will be expected to meet the individual needs of
children they are teaching. Close supportive relationships with parents and community
will be stressed. Prerequisites: EE 660, EE 661, EE 664.

EE 664 EARLY CHILDHOOD CURRICULUM IN

PRIMARY GRADES 3 s.h.

Based on developmental levels of children, students understand the appropriate
concepts and strategies which should be included in the primary grade component
of early childhood.

EE 665 ISSUES IN EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Focuses on the major controversies facing the early childhood educator. Oppos-
ing viewpoints will be presented for review, reaction and debate. Students will be
encouraged to establish priorities and clarify value systems to arrive at solutions to
the critical issues.

EE 666 EVALUATION OF PROGRAMS FOR YOUNG CHILDREN 3 s.h.

Analysis of extant early childhood programs. Examination of early intervention
projects and materials; review of research findings and implications; cross-cultural
comparisons of preschool programs. Prerequisites: EE 661 , 664, or permission of
the instructor.

102 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

EL 510 SEMINAR IN ELEMENTARY SCHOOL EVALUATION

AND ACCREDITATION 3 s.h.

In conjunction with the Assembly of Elementary Schools of the Middle States
Association, provides instruction and field practicum in elementary school evalua-
tion, planning and accreditation. Books and supplies provided by Middle States
Association. Provides leadership training for students interested in developing school
evaluation plans and serving on accreditation teams.

ED 631 CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT 3 s.h.

Students will learn curriculum development by differentiating among educational
goals, objectives and learning activities. Sources of curriculum goals and objectives
such as needs assessment, philosophical models and psychological models will be
studied. The design and selection of learning activities as well as designs for evaluating
the effectiveness of curricula also will be considered.

ED 632 SYSTEMATIC OBSERVATION OF

CLASSROOM BEHAVIOR 3 s.h.

Students will learn how to code classroom verbal interaction through actual
demonstration, video tapes, and audio recordings, with emphasis on various teaching
strategies, monitoring verbal interaction, and supervisory sessions. Designed for
elementary majors, curriculum supervisors, and students majoring in secondary and
supervisory behavior.

EL 641 RECENT TRENDS IN SOCIAL STUDIES 3 s.h.

Specific problems with curriculum, teaching, and learning experiences and evalua-
tion are stressed. Each student will research a special problem or area of interest.

EL 642 MATHEMATICS IN ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 3 s.h.

Experiences with manipulative materials, games and puzzles, activity centers, and
lab approach to mathematics. Inexpensive mathematics lab equipment will be con-
structed. Sources of literature and materials will be presented and used. Opportunities
will be given to write activity and problem cards and to plan mathematics activity
centers. Psychological foundations and mathematics structure will be used as
reference for suggested activities and curriculum studies.

EL 643 RESOURCE MATERIALS IN ELEMENTARY SCIENCE 3 s.h.

An introduction of underlying philosophy and use of materials of several of the current
national curriculum programs in elementary science. Emphasis is placed on the follow-
ing programs: (1) Science: A Process Approach (SAPA), (2) Elementary Science Study
(ESS), (3) Science Curriculum Improvement Study (SCIS), and (4) Conceptually
Oriented Program in Elementary Science (COPES), including micro-teaching tech-
niques and development and preparation of individualized self-instruction modules.
Students are required to work with various program materials.

EL 644 RECENT TRENDS IN LANGUAGE ARTS 3 s.h.

Designed to help students to direct more effective communication through study
of problems, recent trends and contributions of research in the broad fields of listen-
ing, oral and written communication.

EL 645 EXPERIMENTAL STUDIES IN ART EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Teachers will undertake art experiences in various media as they are adapted to
provision of art experiences for the child. Emphasis will be placed on stages of growth,
type of motivation, and ways of administering stimuli. Perceptual awareness and
understanding and appreciation of visual art forms and their importance in the lives
of people in our town and other cultures will be developed along with study of the
exceptional child to recognize and encourage evidences of art potentials as well as
wholesome self-expression.

Programs and Courses - 703
Elementary Education

EL 646 MODERN PROCEDURES & SKILLS IN

ELEMENTARY MUSIC 3 s.h.

New dimensions in thinking about elementary music for children. Emphasis is placed

on the young student discovering interesting aspects of music - sounds, rhythm

through movement, use of percussive and simple method instruments, and music

of countries. (Music Staff)

EL 647 RESOURCE MATERIALS IN CHILDREN'S LITERATURE 3 s.h.

Evaluation and selection of literature as a classroom resource for teaching and
learning, including illustrations, folklore, poetry, modern and traditional fiction and
nonfiction.

EL 648 CREATIVITY AND THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL CHILD 3 s.h.

Includes a study of creative thinking and ways to develop creativity in children in-
cluding strategies and techniques to use in the classroom. Ways of measuring creativity
and analyzing the role of the teacher are included. Students are encouraged to develop
their own creativity.

ED 650 SCHOOL AND COMMUNITY 3 s.h.

Development and maintenance of a purposeful program of communication between

the school and the community through study of selection, organization and functions

of citizens advisory committees and cooperative use of various community services.

EL 651 RECENT ISSUES AND INNOVATIONS IN EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Newer trends in classroom procedure, equipment, and materials as well as prob-
lems involved in improvement of instruction. Whenever possible sessions will be held
to demonstrate and use recently developed materials. Individual research and field
trips into many of the new programs in elementary education.

ED 652 SCHOOL EVALUATION 3 s.h.

Current models for both formative and summative evaluations are presented with
emphasis on their application to school programs and other educational projects. Prior
knowledge or experience in curriculum development and/or project proposals would
be helpful but not required.

ED 653 SUPERVISION AND THE IMPROVEMENT

OF INSTRUCTION 3 s.h.

Purposes, patterns, processes, and products of the supervision of instruction with
emphasis on the supervisor as the educational leader whose concern is improve-
ment of instruction through the on-going growth and professional development of
his/her staff.

EL 655 RECENT TRENDS IN HUMAN DEVELOPMENT

AND LEARNING 3 s.h.

Concerned with the literature and recent research in the field of human develop-
ment and learning and how they relate to the education of children. Characteristics
of the learner and the developmental aspect of children will be stressed.

EA 656 SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION 3 s.h.

Designed as basic course in school administration, intended to serve as an intro-
duction to principles and practices of school administration for students who aspire
to a supervisory or administrative position in public schools. Human aspects of educa-
tional administration are emphasized.

EA 657 SCHOOL PERSONNEL ADMINISTRATION 3 s.h.

Designed to provide background for potential principals and supervisors in mat-
ters pertaining to functions of various types of personnel employed in schools.
Knowledge of organizational practices for proper and effective utilization of person-
nel and recognition of administrator's role in providing services to both staff and pupils.

104 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

ED 658 SCHOOL LAW AND NEGOTIATIONS 3 s.h.

An understanding of legal principles as they pertain to functions of personnel in
public school system and to persons engaged in education. Study of statutory enact-
ments, review of court actions through case studies, and analysis of collective negotia-
tion laws and cases.

EL 659 ADMINISTRATION OF THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 3 s.h.

Principles and techniques of elementary school administration. Administrators will
be viewed as leaders of teachers, children, non-professional staff and the communi-
ty to develop and maintain the best educational system possible.

EL 677 SUPERVISED INTERNSHIP 6 s.h.

A carefully planned field-based on internal work experience proposed by the ad-
vanced graduate student to extend professional competence, subject to approval by
advisory committee. Registration only by permission.

EL 678 SEMINAR IN ELEMENTARY EDUCATION INTERNSHIP 3 s.h.

Provides opportunities for in-depth study in special areas in elementary education.
Designed primarily for doctoral and post master's candidates. Registration by per-
mission only.

EL 680 SEMINAR IN ADVANCED RESEARCH 3 s.h.

This course focuses on the application of experimental and survey designs within
the school setting. Students will be expected to use the computer in analyzing a
research project. Students will be able to interpret factorial analysis of variance,
analysis of covariance, and also some non-parametric research designs.

EL 681 SPECIAL TOPICS IN EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Designed for the students who wish to do independent research in special areas.

EL 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 1-3 s.h.

Students will select one or more topics which are of critical importance in elemen-
tary education and will meet staff members for independent reading, study, analysis,
and evaluation. Registration only by permission of Graduate Committee.

EL 850 THESIS 3 s.h.

For students writing a thesis. Should be scheduled for the semester in which the
student plans to complete his/her work. All thesis writing involves a committee com-
posed of the student's adviser, two additional faculty members, and the Associate
Dean for Research.

EL 950 DISSERTATION 1-12 s.h.

Students preparing a doctoral dissertation for credit must register for this course.
Number of credits assigned and the extent of time for which research activity is
scheduled depend on nature and scope of student's research problem and his/her
general doctoral program.

NOTE: Credits for both thesis and dissertation, if not completed during the semester
scheduled, are recorded as RESEARCH IN PROGRESS. They remain so until the
paper is approved. They DO NOT automatically revert to the grade "F" in a specific
length of time. Also, thesis and dissertation can be programmed above the regular load.

N.B. Candidates wishing to select an emphasis in Reading are referred to the Reading
section of this catalog.

Programs and Courses — 105
Elementary Education
English

ENGLISH

A candidate for a master's degree in English may choose a program
leading to either the Master of Education or the Master of Arts. The choice
will depend on the background of the candidate and his/her purpose of pur-
suing graduate study. Both programs share a common aim of increasing
the candidate's knowledge of English language and literature and introducing
the student to the discipline of advanced study. In addition, the Master of
Education degree aims at preparing teachers for public schools.

After a student is admitted to The Graduate school, the Director of
Graduate Studies will consult with him or her about the scheduling of courses.
The student should apply for the candidacy before 12 credits have been
earned.

The writing of a thesis is optional for both the MA and MEd degree.
The English department values writing and research; however, a candidate's
decision concerning the thesis should be made on the basis of his/her pur-
poses in obtaining the degree and the extent to which training in research
will enhance both professional and personal goals. Under special circum-
stances and upon request from The Graduate School, a thesis may be writ-
ten for additional credit after the student has already completed the master's
degree without a thesis.

MASTER OF ARTS IN ENGLISH

The MA degree either with or without a thesis requires a minimum of
30 s.h. beyond the bachelor's degree. The candidate who chooses not to
write a thesis will take all 30 s.h. in course work. Depending upon the nature
of the thesis, the candidate who chooses to do research will take either three
or six s.h. of the minimum 30 as thesis and the remainder in course work.

Required of all MA candidates are (1) EN 674 and (2) proficiency in a
single language in addition to English. The language requirement may be
satisfied by acceptable undergraduate credit of 12 hours, by examination
through the Foreign Languages Department at lUP, or by the Graduate
School Foreign Language Test through the Educational Testing Service,
Princeton.

The MA candidate may apply a maximum of six s.h. in a related field
(e.g. history, philosophy, psychology) toward satisfying total course require-
ments. All hours remaining from the minimum 30 hours requirement will be
satisfied by courses listed in the catalog EN 529 through EN 699.

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN ENGLISH

The candidate for the MEd has the same thesis option as the candidate
for the MA. The MEd candidate must satisfy the following requirements: (1 ) A
Pennsylvania Teacher's Certificate in English or its equivalent from another
state (2) Three s.h. in Humanistic Studies: any course from FE 611, 612,
613, 514 (3) Three s.h. in Behavioral Studies: EP 604, EP 573. EP 576,
EP 578, EP 580, CE 629, CE 639, or EX 631 (4) Three hours in Research:
GR 614 (5) Six hours Specialization Core: EN 603 and EN 693; and (6) Three
hours in bibliographical methods: EN 674.

106— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Depending upon choice of thesis options, the candidate will complete
the 30 hour minimum requirement by taking from six to 12 hours of elec-
tives, chosen from courses EN 529 through EN 699.

There is no foreign language requirement for the MEd.

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF
EDUCATION; for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE
courses, COUNSELOR EDUCATION; for EX courses, SPECIAL
EDUCATION.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY PROGRAMS

There are two distinct doctoral programs in English, one in English and
American literature, and the other in Rhetoric/Linguistics. Both programs
lead to a Doctor of Philosophy in English.

I. Doctor of Philosophy in English and American Literature

The program leading to the Doctor of Philosophy in English and
American literature is designed for those who wish to teach at the college
or university level. As such, this plan of study places strong emphasis upon
the humanistic tradition in literature, for the values expressed therein are
felt to be the essential concern of a liberal arts education. A candidate for
this degree is expected to acquire a broad knowledge in limited areas of
study and to show through the completion of an acceptable dissertation the
ability to conduct an independent investigation of a topic approved by the
department. To become a candidate the applicant must meet all The
Graduate School requirements for candidacy, as well as the special re-
quirements of the English department. Admission to course work beyond
the master's degree does not constitute admission to candidacy for the PhD
program. No specific number of course credits entitles a student to the
degree, but a minimum of 60 semester hours of credit, exclusive of research
credits, must be earned beyond the bachelor's degree. Applications for can-
didacy will be reviewed by a departmental committee after nine hours of
graduate credit have been earned beyond the master's degree and before
15 hours have been completed. In determining whether or not an applicant
should be accepted as a candidate for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy,
an Advisory Committee will consider the applicant's scores on the Graduate
Record Examination, performance in course work, and whenever applicable,
performance as a teaching-intern.

On application for candidacy, the candidate will be assigned to an Ad-
visory Committee who will help the candidate prepare a plan of study for
a comprehensive examination, both written and oral, which will be taken
on the recommendation of the Advisory Committee near the end of course
requirements and before registering for EN 950 dissertation credits.

The linguistic requirement for PhD candidates, which must be completed
before the comprehensive examinations, may be satisfied by one of the
following comparative study options: (1) six graduate credits in theoretical
or applied linguistics; (2) six graduate credits in computer languages; (3)
foreign language proficiency as measured either by ETA or Foreign
Language Department examinations. The Student's Advisory Committee will
attempt to suit the language study to the student's needs as a teacher and

Programs and Courses - 107
English

researcher. Sole authority in determining foreign language proficiency rests
with the Advisory Committee.

On approval of the Advisory Committee, a candidate may take as many
as nine graduate hours of course work in a minor field in support of major
research interest.

Although there are specific requirements for the degree, the professional
and educational background of a number of students will make it necessary
to waive certain requirements to avoid needless duplication. Decisions to
waive requirements will be made by the student's Advisory Committee.

Candidates must demonstrate the capacity to teach effectively, either
in the departmental teaching-internship program, or through other acceptable
teaching experience. English is required of all candidates.

As this catalog is being prepared, the PhD program in English and
American literature is undergoing revisions. Both requirements and course
offerings can be expected to change. A complete description can be ob-
tained from the English Department or from the Graduate School.

II. Doctor of Philosophy in Rhetoric and Linguistics

The program which leads to the Doctor of Philosophy in English is
designed for teaching English in the community college or the four-year col-
lege. The pre-service candidate for this degree is expected to acquire a
thorough understanding of the community college as an institution and to
demonstrate, largely through a semester's internship at a community col-
lege, the ability to teach effectively.

The in-service candidate for this degree may have the internship waived
after a description and evaluation of his/her teaching experiences have been
accepted.

Upon admission to the program, the candidate will be assigned to a
Program/Evaluation Committee which will, in consultation with the candidate,
work out a program of study. The Program/Evaluation Committee will review
also the candidate's application for candidacy, which must be submitted after
nine hours of graduate credit have been earned and before 15 hours have
been completed. Another function of the Program/Evaluation Committee will
be to prepare a comprehensive examination, written and oral, for each
candidate.

Although there are some general course and research requirements
for this degree, they may be waived by the student's Program/Evaluation
Committee if they believe the student has already acquired the information
or specific competencies which these courses are designed to communicate
or develop. These general course requirements are as follows: EN 689,
EN 692, EN 631 , EN 603, a course in the teaching of literature, nine hours
of elective credits in psychology, sociology, communications media, etc.;
a dissertation related to Rhetoric and Linguistics; a semester's internship
at a community college.

As this catalog is being prepared, the program is undergoing revision
of requirements and of course offerings. Notable is the ESL component of
this program which is fully in place and currently offered on a regular basis.
A complete description of all revisions can be obtained from the English
Department or from the Graduate School.

108 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

EN 529 HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 3 s.h.

Development of phonology, syntax and lexicon as well as rhetorical theories from
Old English through Modern English.

EN 542 CLASSICAL LITERATURE 3 s.h.

Ranges from drama to lyrics and epic poetry in translation.

EN 560 BRITISH LITERATURE TO 1500 3 s.h.

Intensive study of some major works of Old or Middle English.

EN 561 CHAUCER 3 s.h.

Major works of Geoffrey Chaucer are studied as literature with emphasis upon pro-
nunciation, versification, language, and textual problems.

EN 565 BRITISH LITERATURE -RENAISSANCE (1500-1600) 3 s.h.

Investigation of an area of English Renaissance that is not currently treated in course
work.

EN 566 SHAKESPEARE 3 s.h.

In addition to the plays and the scholarship on them, study of the historical theatrical
influences that affected Shakespeare.

EN 569 SEVENTEENTH CENTURY PROSE AND POETRY 3 s.h.

Major writers from the death of Elizabeth to 1660, excluding Shakespeare and Milton.

EN 570 MILTON 3 s.h.

Major prose and poetry of John Milton and the religious and political controversies
reflected in Milton's work.

EN 579 ENGLISH ROMANTIC LITERATURE 3 s.h.

Works of the major poets and essayists from 1798 to 1832.

EN 580 VICTORIAN LITERATURE 3 s.h.

Examines major social, political, economic, and religious issues in the works of
the leading poets and prose writers from 1832 to 1890.

EN 581 SPECIAL TOPICS IN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 3 s.h.

Allows students to pursue subjects such as textual criticism, prosody, and com-
puters and literature not covered in detail in existing courses.

EN 590 LITERARY BRITAIN 3 s.h.

A three- or six-week's tour of major sites important to English literature. Always
includes London, Stratford, and Cambridge.

EN 601 AMERICAN ENGLISH GRAMMAR 3 S.h.

Phonology, morphology and syntax of present-day English, various approaches
to analysis of English Grammar, and detailed consideration of problems of dialect
and appropriateness.

EN 603 LINGUISTICS AND THE ENGLISH TEACHER 3 s.h.

Effects of modern linguistic theory on teaching of English, with special emphasis
on reading, composition, stylistic analysis, and dialect interference.

EN 611 MAJOR WRITERS 3 s.h.

Concentrates on one or two major writers of American or British literature, such
as Twain, James, Wordsworth, Keats, etc.

Programs and Courses — 109
English

EN 612 THE AMERICAN RENAISSANCE 3 s.h.

Works of major writers in mid-nineteenth century America.

EN 613 NATURALISM AND REALISM IN AMERICAN FICTION 3 s.h.

Major American realists and naturalists, 1880-1910, including Twain, James,
Howells, Norris, Crane, and Dreiser.

EN 614 MODERN AMERICAN FICTION 3 s.h.

Special studies in such figures as Dreiser, Anderson, Fitzgerald, Lewis, Dos Passes,
and Wolfe.

EN 615 TWENTIETH CENTURY AMERICAN DRAMA 3 s.h.

Explores the major playwrights and major developments of drama in the twentieth
century.

EN 616 AMERICAN LITERATURE TO 1870 3 s.h.

Major writers in Puritan period, early republic, and other phases up to and including
the Civil War.

EN 617 MODERN AMERICAN LITERATURE (from 1870) 3 s.h.

Study of particular author or group of authors; literary genre, literary movement,
restricted period of time, etc.

EN 631 SEMINAR IN LINGUISTICS 3 s.h.

Concentrates on a specific aspect of linguistics (e.g. sociolinguistics) to provide
stimulus for independent study.

EN 633 THE PSYCHOLOGY OF LANGUAGE 3 s.h.

An introduction to psycholinguistics for the English specialist, treating language
as a code, acquisition of language and patterns of normal and aberrant human
language behavior.

EN 672 EIGHTEENTH CENTURY PROSE AND POETRY 3 s.h.

Major figures such as Dryden, Pope, Swift, Johnson, Defoe, Fielding, Sterne,
Smollett, Burke, and Godwin.

EN 673 SEMINAR IN BRITISH DRAMA 3 s.h.

Ranges from medieval to modern drama; a thematic focus may sometimes be used.

EN 674 BIBLIOGRAPHICAL METHODS IN ENGLISH 3 s.h.

Practical training in special methods and materials of research in English. Required
of all majors in English except those taking the PhD in Rhetoric/Linguistics. Should
be taken early in the program.

EN 677 SEMINAR IN SHAKESPEARE 3 s.h.

Emphasis on individual study and research in primary and secondary sources.

EN 678 SEMINAR IN THE BRITISH NOVEL 3 s.h.

Focuses on novels of a given century; a thematic focus that ignores time divisions
is sometimes used.

EN 681 SPECIAL TOPICS 3 s.h.

Courses relating to specialized interests in literature, rhetoric or linguistics which
fulfill special needs or interests. May become permanent course offerings.

EN 684 MODERN POETRY 3 s.h.

Study of Modern British or American or European poetry, or any combination of
them.

110— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

EN 685 CRITICISM

Major statements of critical theory from Aristotle onward. Aims are both historical
and aesthetic.

EN 686 BLACK LITERATURE IN AMERICA 3 s.h.

Chronological study of Black American writing for students who have had little intro-
duction to Black literature. Emphasis on twentieth century.

EN 687 LITERATURE AND THE FILM 3 s.h.

Explores relationship between film and literature and the influences that each has
had on the other.

EN 689 ORIENTATION AND FIELD EXPERIENCE IN THE

COMMUNITY COLLEGE 3 s.h.

Examines the community college from historical and philosophical perspectives.

Includes observations of classes and interviews with staff at community colleges.

Specifically for students preparing for careers in the community college. To be taken

early in the program.

EN 692 SEMINAR IN TEACHING BASIC

COMMUNICATION SKILLS 3-6 s.h.

Instructs students in teaching of reading or of writing to adults. Reading/writing
taught in alternate semesters.

EN 693 SEMINAR IN TEACHING ENGLISH IN THE

SECONDARY SCHOOL 3 s.h.

Explores recent development in teaching of language, composition, and literature.

EN 698 INTERNSHIP 3-12 s.h.

Practical experience in the student's area of interest, working under professional
supervision on the job. Special permission only, dependent upon needs of student's
program as well as personal and academic qualifications.

EN 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 s.h.

Study of depth of topics not available through regular course work. Student works
with supervising professor on carefully planned, student- initiated project. Prior ap-
proval necessary.

EN 850 THESIS 1-6 s.h.

EN 950 DISSERTATION 1-12 s.h.

NOTE: Special Topics in Language and Literature, and Major Writers, as well as all
seminars, may be scheduled more than once, because subject matter will change
with each offering of the course. More complete course descriptions available from
the department.

FOOD AND NUTRITION

The Master of Science Degree Program in Food and Nutrition is de-
signed to increase the student's depth of knowledge in food and nutrition,
continue professional growth through development of leadership ability, and
increase the student's capacity for independent action in scholarly and pro-
fessional pursuits. It may also lead to fulfilling the requirements for the
American Dietetic Association registration. Courses in intermediate nutri-
tion and biochemistry are required for entrance into the program. A faculty

Programs and Courses —111
English
Food and Nutrition

advisor will be assigned to each student. Prospective students apply for ad-
mission through The Graduate School. Applicants are then referred to the
Food and Nutrition Department Graduate Studies Committee for acceptance.
All relevant transcripts and letters of recommendation must be on file with
the Graduate School prior to any department decision. At the completion
of 15 hours of graduate course work including a research course as well
as statistics, all Food and Nutrition majors must qualify for degree candidacy.
Qualification for degree candidacy means that the student has successfully
taken and passed a qualifying examination.

University Requirements: Elements of Research, 3 s.h. and Statistics
I, 3 s.h. are required of all students. Thesis, 4 s.h. is optional. With thesis,
30 s.h. are required; without thesis, 33 s.h. are required for graduation.

Department Requirements: All students must choose 14 s.h. from
courses: FN 544, FN 613, FN 611, FN 642, FN 645, FN 646.

University Core: All students may elect 4-10 s.h. from the lUP Graduate
Catalog with approval of their adviser.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

FN 510 FOOD, NUTRITION AND AGING 3 s.h.

How food relates to health maintenance and special dietary problems during the
middle and later years.

FN 544 FOOD COMPOSITION AND BIOCHEMISTRY 3 s.h.

Covers basic chemistry and biochemistry of essential components of food originating
from plant and animal sources. Prerequisite: CH 355.

FN 547 NUTRITIONAL ASPECTS OF FOOD PROCESSING 3 s.h.

Studies current known effects of food processing techniques on the nutritional value
and safety of food. Prerequisites: FN 212, Bl 241,

FN 558 ADVANCED HUMAN NUTRITION I 3 s.h.

Nutritional needs and problems occurring during pregnancy, infancy, early child-
hood, adolescence and aging. Prerequisites: FN 212, CH 355, Bl 151.

FN 561 MICROWAVE COOKING TECHNOLOGY 3 s.h.

Examines the electronic technology, selection, care and use of the microwave oven.
Basic physical and chemical concepts related to microwave cooking. Individual
research problem required. Two lectures, two lab hours per week.

FN 61 1 NUTRITION IN THE LIFE CYCLE 3 s.h.

Studies body functions at different stages of development under differing environ-
mental conditions and at various levels of biological organization.

FN 641 CULTURAL ASPECTS OF FOODS 3 s.h.

Investigation and analysis of historical, political, religious, ethnic, environmental,
and social influences affecting food habits and customs. Major cuisines of the world
and regional U.S. are included.

FN 642 CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN FOOD AND NUTRITION 3 s.h.

Current information in foods and nutrition is investigated, analyzed and evaluated
for practical implementation.

FN 643 SEMINAR IN CLINICAL DIETETICS 3 s.h.

Examines nutritional management of the hospitalized patient with emphasis on the
role of the dietitian. Research for a paper and seminar presentation required.

112 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

FN 645 PROTEINS, CARBOHYDRATES AND FATS

IN NUTRITION 3 s.h.

Nutritional considerations of protein, carbohydrates and fat metabolism. In vitro

and in vivo analysis as well as physiologic and biochemical function of these nutrients.

FN 646 VITAMINS AND MINERALS 4 s.h.

Biochemical role of vitamins and minerals as co-factors in macronutrient metabolism.
Focus on biochemical and physiologic functions, research, and analytical methods.
Prerequisite: FN 645.

FN 652 INTERNSHIP 1-6 s.h.

Supervised v\/ork experience for Food and Nutrition majors. Permission: Depart-
ment Chairperson.

New courses, FN 612, Administration of Food Service Systems, 3 s.h.

FN 613, Seminar in Food and Nutrition, 1 s.h.

FN 699, Independent Study in Food and Nutrition, 1-3 s.h.,
are pending approval.

FOREIGN LANGUAGES*

GERMAN

The programs leading to the MA and MEd degrees in German have
a number of goals in common and overlap in several areas. Both programs
seek to improve the candidate's proficiency in German and to increase the
student's knowledge of German culture and civilization. While sharing com-
mon aims, each program is flexible enough to be tailored to the individual
candidate's purposes and desires for pursuing graduate study.

A minimum of 30 semester hours of graduate work is required, including
three s.h. of Elements of Research (GR 61 5) for the MED. The thesis is op-
tional (0-six s.h.). The remainder of the courses is to be taken in areas directly
related to the student's main field of study. All candidates for advanced
degrees in German will also demonstrate their achievement and proficiency
by successfully passing comprehensive oral and written examinations on
all graduate work in German completed at lUP.

Candidates for the Master of Arts degree must earn a minimum of 1 8 s.h.
of credit in German courses (GM 610 through GM 653) and provide evidence
of proficiency in a second foreign language. Candidates for the Master of
Education degree must earn a minimum of 15 s.h. in German courses and
successfully complete one course in the area of Foundations of Education.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

Duisburg program: lUP students can take up to 10 credits at the Univer-
sity of Duisburg in the Federal Republic of Germany.

* Potential applicants should discuss with the Graduate School the availability
of course offerings in the foreign languages before submitting an applica-
tion for admission.

Programs and Courses — 113
Food and Nutrition
Foreign Languages

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

GM610 HISTORY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE 3 s.h.

History and development of German language, with special emphasis on relation-
ships with English. Analysis of annals in Gothic, Old High German, and Middle High
German using methods of historical and contemporary linguistics.

GM611 ADVANCED COMPOSITION & STYLISTICS 3 s.h.

Development of abilities in German composition and stylistics which will lead to
greater facility and accuracy in writing German

GM 612 ADVANCED ORAL PRACTICE 3 s.h.

Designed to achieve fluency and accuracy in spoken German by using various media
to provide framework for guided discussions of current topics.

GM613 GERMAN PHONETICS 3 s.h.

Analysis of physiological and linguistic factors of spoken German. Practice on critical
areas of German pronunciation and intonation, with special emphasis on potential
interferences between German and English.

GM 620 SEMINAR ON GERMAN LANGUAGE 3 s.h.

In-depth study of structure and grammar of the language.

GM 630 SEMINAR ON GERMAN CULTURE 3 s.h.

In-depth study of German culture from either an historical, fine arts perspective
or from an anthropological, sociological point of view. Independent research with oral
and/or written reports required.

GM 640 SEMINAR ON GERMAN LITERATURE 3 s.h.

In-depth study of particular author, or genre requiring independent research.

Seminar topics to vary on a rotating basis, depending on staff and student interest.

GM 653 ADVANCED METHODOLOGY 3 s.h.

Demonstrations and discussions of current teaching strategies to provide teachers
of German with greater expertise in dealing with problem in motivation, articulation
and other pedagogical concerns. Topics vary from time to time, depending on
background and experience of participants involved.

GM 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 s.h.

SPANISH

The Spanish Division of the Foreign Languages Department offers pro-
grams of study leading to either the Master of Arts or the Master of Educa-
tion degree in Spanish Language and Literature. The MA degree is recom-
mended to those who plan to pursue studies towards the PhD degree. The
MEd degree in Spanish Language and Literature is designed especially for
those who plan a career as secondary school teachers or those already
employed as teachers in a school system. Geared to both full and part-time
students, since its inception in 1966, the program has served more than
100 graduate students.

114 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MASTER OF ARTS

IN SPANISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE

Candidates for the MA degree in Spanish Language and Literature must
successfully complete a minimum of 30 s.h. of which at least 24 s.h. are
to represent the area of concentration as well as a minimum of four different
literary epochs chosen from courses in Peninsular and/or Spanish American
literature. Required courses for the MA degree are: SP 600 or SP 601 and
SP 606. Thesis is optional; if the candidate chooses the "No Thesis" option,
he/she must complete 33 s.h. with a minimum of 27 s.h. in the area of con-
centration. For admission to degree candidacy the student must demonstrate
a reading knowledge of a second foreign language acceptable to the
department.

MASTER OF EDUCATION

IN SPANISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE

Candidates for the MEd degree in Spanish Language and Literature
are required to successfully complete 30 s.h. with distribution as follows:
A minimum of 1 5 s.h. in Spanish area studies which must represent courses
chosen from at least three different literary epochs in Peninsular and/or
Spanish American literature. One course in Foundations of Education (three
s.h.) to be selected from among: FE 611, 612, 613, 514. One course (three
s.h.) to be chosen from among the following Behavioral Studies: EP 604,
EP 573, EP 576, EP 578, EP 580, CE 629, CE 639 or EX 631. GR 615
Elements of Research is required of all students in the MEd program. Two
courses or six s.h. from among the following: FE 515, CM 600, SP 605. Re-
quired courses in Spanish are: SP 600 or SP 601 and SP 606. If the student
chooses the "No Thesis" option, he/she must then complete 18 s.h. in
Spanish or a total of 33 s.h. For admission to degree candidacy the student
must demonstrate a satisfactory reading knowledge of a second foreign
language acceptable to the department.

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF
EDUCATION; for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE
courses, COUNSELOR EDUCATION; for EX course, SPECIAL EDUCATION;
and CM course, COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

Curriculum for the MA and MEd Degrees In
Spanish Language and Literature

I. Spanish Language and Literature (Area of Concentration) Courses SP 600
through 699 provide subject matter content in the area of specialization
for both the Master of Arts and the Master of Education degrees. MA can-
didates are to complete 24 to 30 s.h. and MEd candidates a minimum
of 15 to 18 s.h. chosen from these courses some of which represent re-
quired courses. FL 525 Valladolid Program for which six s.h. will be allot-
ted is optional provided that the candidate has not elected the Valladolid
program as an undergraduate.

Programs and Courses —115
Foreign Languages

Related Studies

A limited number of graduate credits may be elected from related areas

of study with departmental approval.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

FL 521 LANGUAGE AND SOCIETY 3 s.h.

Salient facts of language and its fundamental role in development and continuity
of society and culture, including language families and their characteristics, factors
of linguistic change and development, reciprocal influences of culture and language,
linguistic borrowing, psycholinguistics, and systems of writing. (Open to majors and
non-majors).

FL 525 FOREIGN STUDY - VALLADOLID (Optional) 6 s.h.

Intensive study of Spanish language and culture at the University of Valladolid,
Spain, from approximately January 7 to May 30. For detailed description consult the
lUP publication "The Pennsylvania-Valladolid Study in Spain Program."

SP 580 FOREIGN STUDY - JALAPA (Optional) 1-3 s.h.

Intensive study of Spanish language and Mexican culture at the University of
Veracruz in Jalapa, Mexico, from approximately July 7 to August 20. Credits subject
to approval of the Director of the Program.

Hispanic Graduate Studies

Series 600-605: Philology, Stylistics, Grammar and Methodology

SP 600 HISTORY OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE 3 s.h.

Traces phonological, morphological, lexical and syntactical evolution of Castilian
dialect from its origins in Vulgar Latin through its development, perfection and ultimate
recognition as the official language of Spain and Spanish America. Places Castilian
linguistically with relation to other Romance Languages and considers features peculiar
to Spanish of Latin America.

SP 601 ADVANCED GRAMMAR, COMPOSITION

AND CONVERSATION 3 s.h.

Advanced grammar, composition and oral fluency intended to substantially improve
understanding of Spanish grammar and syntax, increase vocabulary and command
of language, and to provide opportunity for acquisition of poise and ease of self-
expression.

SP 605 METHODOLOGY OF FOREIGN LANGUAGE TEACHING 3 s.h.

Improvement of teaching skills and an increased understanding and awareness
of implications of current research to foreign language teaching and learning theory
as well as development of strategies for testing and evaluation of student learning
and exploration of curricular innovations.

SP 606 METHODS OF RESEARCH, CRITICISM,

AND STYLISTICS 3 s.h.

Acquaints students with tools of research in the field. MLA style sheets, histories
of literature, historical grammars, dictionaries, literary criticisms, recognized collec-
tions of literary texts, critical editions and monograph studies as well as various
scholarly journals devoted to romance philology and literatures. Introduction to history
of Spanish literary criticism and to stylistics as a tool of literary analysis applied to
representative works of various epoch styles.

116 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Spanish Peninsular Literature

Series 610-650

SP 610 MEDIEVAL SPANISH LITERATURE 3 s.h.

Reading and discussion of various medieval genres: epic poetry ("Juglaria" and
"clerecia"); lyric and didactic poetry; prose (Alfonso X and selections from the Cronica
General, the Partidas, the Cantigas, etc.; Juan Manuel and the Apologo); Danza General
de la Muerte, the debate and the medieval drama.

SP 615 PHOTO-RENAISSANCE LETTERS AND MASTERPIECES 3 s.h.

Critical appreciation of transitional literary forms of XV century Spain; poetry and

the Cancioneros and the Romancero; prose (history, biography and satiric-didactic

literature, apologues). Special emphasis on Libro de buen amor and La Celestina.

SP 620 RENAISSANCE AND HUMANISM 3 s.h.

Consideration of cultural contributions of Spanish Christian Humanism together
with a careful study of Renaissance lyric poetry (Italianate and traditional veins); the
epic; the novel (in its various forms); Pre-Lopesque theater; the dialogue; ascetic and
mystical prose and poetry; history.

SP 625 THE SPANISH BAROQUE 3 s.h.

An insight into typical Baroque themes, motifs and stylistic devices through analysis
and interpretation of important works of XVII century authors. Poetry (lyric and epic);
prose (novel and novella); literary criticism and polemics; drama.

SP 626 GOLDEN AGE DRAMA 3 s.h.

Readings and interpretations of major dramatists (Lope and Calderon) and examina-
tion of XVII century drama, its peculiar national character, and its relationship to con-
temporary society and culture.

SP 630 NEOCLASSICISM AND ROMANTICISM 3 S.h.

Compares and contrasts cultural and ideological expression of XVIII century Spain —
both French cultural influence and popular reaction to the trend — as manifested in
the prose (polemic, erudite, narrative and philosophic), poetry and theater of the period
to artist and literary aesthetics of the first half of XIX century Spain as reflected in
poetry, novel, drama and literary perceptive of her imported Romanticism together
with an appreciation of the late romantic Becquer.

SP 635 COSTUMBRISM, REALISM AND NATURALISM 3 s.h.

Studies and analysis of "Articulos de costumbres" and especially several trends
in the novel of latter half of the XIX century in Spain: Fernan Caballero, Alarcon, Valera,
Pereda, Palacio Valdes, Pardo Bazan, Blasco Ibaiiez, Clarin and Perez Galdos.

SP 640 GENERATION OF 1898 3 s.h.

A critical excursion into minds of the last XIX and early XX century novelists and
thinkers and their works. Emphasis on novels and essays of Unamuno, Ganivet, Azorin,
Baroja, Valle-lnclan, Ortega y Gasset and Perez de Ayala.

SP 646 MODERNISM, CONTEMPORARY AND

POST-CONTEMPORARY POETRY 3 s.h.

Study and analysis of lyric poetry in Spain from Modernism and its evolution to
present.

SP 650 SPANISH LITERATURE OF THE XX CENTURY 3 s.h.

Trends in Spanish Novel after Civil War. A) 1940-1961: "Tremendismo" and
testimonial novel; Social Realism and Objectivism. B) 1962 to present: reaction against
Social Realism and Objectivism; new tendencies. C) short story. D) study and inter-
pretation of Spanish theater from generation of 1898 to present.

Programs and Courses —117
Foreign Languages

Spanish American Literature and Culture

SP 581 SPECIAL TOPICS 3 s.h.

Study of an author, genre, epoch or literary movement.

Series 655-699

SP 655 PRE-COLUMBIAN LITERATURE AND SPANISH

AMERICAN CIVILIZATION 3 S.h.

Literature, art, myth and thought of Indian civilizations of Latin America with empha-
sis on Aztecs, Mayas and Incas as well as history and culture of Spanish America.
Spanish American character, traditions and ideology from its origins to the present.

SP660 COLONIAL PERIOD 3 s.h.

Representative chroniclers, poets and dramatists from the letters of Columbus to
end of the XVI century together with a study of various literary genres during the XVII
and XVIII centuries in Spanish America with special emphasis on Baroque and
Neoclassical trends.

SP 665 ROMANTICISM AND GAUCHESQUE LITERATURE 3 s.h.

A detailed study of the Romantic period, its European influences and unique
characteristics of Romanticism in Spanish America with representative poets, novelists
and essayists read against the XIX century historical background. Development of
Gauchesque genre in Argentina and its characteristics, interrelated with the
geographical, historical and social background with emphasis on Gauchesque poetry.

SP670 MODERNISM 3 s.h.

Modernistic movement of Spanish American literature history, and its relation to
certain European artistic trends and movements. Aesthetic principles of modernism
together with its renovation in themes, vocabulary, syntax and versification will be
seen as reflected in the criticism and works of the movement's outstanding authors.

SP 675 POST-MODERNISM AND AVANT-GARDE POETRY 3 s.h.

A study of the reaction against modernism as characterized by new techniques
of post modernistic poetry, followed by an analysis of historical and socio-cultural
situation of "avant-garde" movements. Discussion of characteristics of works of major
Spanish American "avant-garde" poets.

SP 680 REGIONALISTIC NOVEL 3 s.h.

A study of the "maestros" of Spanish American regionalism of the early XX cen-
tury, including novelists Gallegos, Rivera, Azuela, GiJiraldes, Icaza, Alegria, etc.

SP 685 XX CENTURY SPANISH AMERICAN LITERATURE 3 s.h.

Literary expressions in Spanish America from end of the XIX century to present.

SP 690 CONTEMPORARY NOVEL AND SHORT STORY 3 s.h.

Major contemporary novelists and short-story writers (Borges, Onetti, Cortazar,
Carpentier, Rulfo, Garcia Marquez, etc.), with an examination of their major themes,
techniques and stylistic features.

SP 695 THE SPANISH AMERICAN ESSAY 3 s.h.

Development of theory and ideological essay from the last two decades of the XIX
century to present with stress on contemporary period. Essays will be read both as
a literary genre and as a vehicle of ideas against the historical background.

SP699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 s.h.

118 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION

The Foundations of Education Department seeks to expose its students
to a systematic inquiry into educational theories and practices through a
philosophical, sociological, historical, and comparative analysis. Founda-
tions study generates criteria for judgment and helps to formulate a Gestalt
of various subjects. It also helps to develop an integral cross sectional view
of education, while augmenting the construction, clarification, and evalua-
tion of educational goals necessary for development of effective methods
of instruction. Furthermore, it broadens perspectives and deepens analysis
of policies and programs which help educational personnel find meaning
and value in all educational activities.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

FE 514 COMPARATIVE FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Educational theories and practices in different nations will be studied. Educational
purposes, curriculum, methods, administration, school systems, teacher education,
and other educational features in America and those in other nations, will be ana-
lyzed, evaluated, and compared.

FE515 CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT 3 s.h.

Analysis of philosophical, sociological, and psychological basis for creation of cur-
riculum patterns. K-14. Includes utilization of technological devices, critical examination
of basic concepts underlying determination of objectives, selection, and organiza-
tion of subject matter and learning experiences in general. Current curriculum research
will be analyzed, as will existing instructional materials and programs.

FE 595 INTERNATIONAL EDUCATION STUDIES PROGRAM 3 s.h.

A travel-seminar conducted in a foreign country and designed to afford educators
and students of education the opportunity to investigate teaching-learning process
in cultural settings other than their own. Particular attention to such current educa-
tional issues as theories of curriculum development, methodology, teacher educa-
tion, and changing value systems.

FE 611 HISTORICAL FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Study of historical development of American education. European influences on
philosophies and practices of American schools will serve as a background. Empha-
sis on development of education in America as influenced by various individuals and
schools of thought. Historical trends will be related to current problems and prac-
tices in education.

FE 612 PHILOSOPHICAL FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Analysis and evaluation of basic philosophies and their impact upon education.
Nature, value, means and ends of education and some other fundamental phases
of schooling will be thoroughly examined. Stress on essentials enhancing and indi-
vidual working philosophy of education; basic ideas heightening a sound philosophy
for American schools.

FE 613 SOCIAL FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Social and cultural forces which influence education. Particular stress on current
problems as they relate to entire educational system and to curricular problems and
practices in today's schools.

Programs and Courses —119
Foundations of Education
Geography and Regional Planning

FE616 PROFESSIONAL NEGOTIATIONS IN EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Study dimension of professional negotiations process in educational sector. Instruc-
tional tools will be case studies, lecture-discussion and reading assignments.
Guidelines of public policy affecting public employer-employee relations will also be
evaluated and analyzed.

FE699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-6 S.h.

GEOGRAPHY AND REGIONAL PLANNING

lUP's Department of Geography and Regional Planning offers graduate
programs leading to the degrees of Master of Arts, Master of Science, and
Master of Education. The programs are designed to prepare students for
a variety of careers as geographers in business, government, research and
planning organizations, and teaching; or for entry to a doctoral program at
another university. Emphasis is placed upon developing professional com-
petence in the tools, substance, methodology, and theory of geography.

Graduates of the program are employed by the state and federal govern-
ment, city, county and regional planning commissions, private consultant
firms, business and industry, and secondary schools, colleges and univer-
sities. Knowledge of spatial location patterns and processes and environmen-
tal concerns; the planning field, its organization, and operation; and geo-
graphic and cartographic skills, including computer application is of value
to the graduate in the job search.

Students usually hold a bachelor's degree in geography or one of the
social sciences. Persons with degrees in education, science or business
find a degree in geography of value.

Geography graduate students at lUP may pursue traditional geographic
themes of study or research such as economic-urban and cultural-historical
geography. The Department also offers faculty strength in regional develop-
ment and planning, and in cartography/remote sensing/geographic infor-
mation systems. Thus, the student may choose between two plans. The MA
student may design his or her own program in consultation with a faculty
advisor. The MS program requires that the student complete a twelve-credit
concentration in regional development, planning, and cartography. In either
program selected courses in related fields may be applied toward a degree.
All graduate degree programs require a minimum of 30 semester hours of
credit for the thesis option, or at least 36 hours for the non-thesis option.
These include three core courses: GE 511 , GE 610 and GE 612. Graduate
students have the option to incorporate an internship as a part of either the
MA or the MS program.

MASTER OF ARTS AND MASTER OF SCIENCE

IN GEOGRAPHY

I. Core Program (nine s.h.): Thought and Philosophy in Geography and
Planning; Research in Geography and Planning; Quantitative Techniques
in Geography and Planning.

II. Electives and/or Thesis (21-27 s.h.)

120 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

A. The MA candidate elects 15-20 s.h. in geography and related fields

with the thesis (one to six s.h.) and 27 s.h. without thesis.

B. The MS candidate tal<es a concentration in regional development,
regional planning and cartography (12 s.h. minimum), elects three to
nine s.h. in geography and related fields with thesis (one to six s.h.)
and 15 s.h. without thesis. Six s.h. in internship may be included.

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN GEOGRAPHY

I. Professional Development Area: (nine s.h.) Humanistic Studies (three
s.h. from the following): FE 611; FE 612; FE 613; FE 514; Behavioral
Studies (three s.h. from the following): EP 604; EP 573; EP 576; EP 578;
EP 580; CE 629: CE 639; EX 631; Research (three s.h. required of all
students): GR 615.

II. Specialization Core (six s.h. from the following list): FE 515, CM 600,
GE 670.

III. Subject Area and/or Thesis: 15 s.h. in geography.

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF
EDUCATION; for EP courses. EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE
courses. COUNSELOR EDUCATION; for EX courses, SPECIAL EDUCA-
TION; for CM course. COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

GE 511 THOUGHT & PHILOSOPHY IN GEOGRAPHY

& PLANNING 3 s.h.

History of the disciplines, great ideas, leading professionals, and unresolved issues
are studied.

GE513 CARTOGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Develops ability to map and diagram human and environmental phenomena. Special
maps, charts, and diagrams will be considered as required by students. Recommended
for all master's candidates.

GE 514 MAP & PHOTOGRAPH INTERPRETATION 3 s.h.

Develops skill in extracting information and synthesizing data from maps and aerial

photographs as applied to geologic, land use, economic and transportation problems.

GE515 REMOTE SENSING 3 S.h.

Methods of remote sensing such as thermal sensing, multi-spectral scanning.
satellite imagery, side-looking airborne radar imagery, and additive color analysis and
their applications, particularly as applied to geographic and planning problems are
studied.

GE 610 RESEARCH IN GEOGRAPHY & REGIONAL PLANNING 3 s.h.

Elements and techniques of scientific research, as applied to geographic and plan-
ning problems, are studied. A research proposal is developed.

Programs and Courses —121
Geography and Regional Planning

GE 612 QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES IN GEOGRAPHY

AND PLANNING 3 s.h.

Descriptive and inferential statistical techniques applied to spatial distribution and
spatial association of physical and cultural phenomena and testing of spatial
theoretical, constructs.

GE 617 FIELD TECHNIQUES IN GEOGRAPHY AND PLANNING 3 s.h.

Field techniques are evaluated. Field tools and techniques are used in the study
of a specific area. Emphasis is upon skill and interpretation of spatial patterns of
phenomena.

GE 620 SPATIAL STRUCTURE OF THE ECONOMY 3 s.h.

The spatial organization of economic systems is studied. Various processes that
give rise to these systems and their spatial interdependencies will be explored. Some
topical and regional examples of spatial structure will be used as case studies.

GE 622 INDUSTRIAL GEOGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Spatial aspects of industry are considered. Emphasis is placed on the locational
patterns of industry.

GE 623 REGIONAL DEVELOPMENT 3 s.h.

Theory of and the policy implications of the spatial aspects of development in various
regions of underdevelopment.

GE 630 CULTURAL GEOGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Literature and methods of cultural geography. Topics include population, settle-
ments, human ecology, culture areas, and related features.

GE 531 POPULATION GEOGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Spatial variations in numbers, characteristics and dynamics of human population,
models and theoretical constructs relevant to demographic structures and processes
are studied.

GE 532 URBAN GEOGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Analysis of city types, patterns and functions as influenced by geographic condi-
tions and other factors. City planning techniques and field study are utilized.

GE 633 SETTLEMENT GEOGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Settlement patterns and processes; origins, diffusion, classification, pioneer, settle-
ment planning, and agricultural colonization.

GE 534 POLITICAL GEOGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Geographic factors and conditions are analyzed as they relate to character and

function of states. Political institutions are evaluated in light of geographic conditions.

GE 540 CONSERVATION: ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Problems of exploitation and utilization of regional resources, i.e., soils, minerals,
forests, and wildlife in relation to population growth and regional planning and
development.

GE 650 REGIONAL GEOGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Various regions of the world may be dealt with, such as Latin America, Africa, or
South Asia when there is sufficient student demand. Physical, environmental, cultural,
and population patterns are considered.

GE 651 GEOGRAPHY OF PENNSYLVANIA 3 s.h.

Regions of Pennsylvania are examined in detail to identify man-environment rela-
tionships. Soils, topography, climate, vegetation, population and economic patterns
are studied.

122— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

GE 560 INTRODUCTION TO PLANNING 3 s.h.

Introduction to field of planning on city, metropolitan, regional and county levels.
Included are: intergovernmental context and legislative basis for planning; the com-
prehensive plan; plan implementation; and the planning agency.

GE 561 PLANNING: BASIC STUDIES & ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Research, analytical design and plan-making techniques in urban and regional plan-
ning. Examines basic items necessary to prepare urban and regional comprehen-
sive plans. Prerequisite: GE 560.

GE 562 PLANNING: DEVELOPMENT OF PRINCIPLES & THEORY 3 s.h.

Examines process of city planning during ancient, medieval, renaissance and
modern periods. A review of early planning in America, as v\/ell as present city plan-
ning is included. Prerequisite: GE 560.

GE563 PLANNING: DESIGN 3 s.h.

Presents concepts of city, subdivision and transportation design in relation to

topography, natural resources, and other physical elements. Prerequisite: GE 560.

GE 564 LAND USE POLICY 3 s.h.

Basic concepts of land use policy at the national, regional, county and local levels
are treated. Analysis is made of the various land use policies.

GE 665 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION 3 s.h.

Considers zoning, improvement programs, housing codes, building codes
methodology and application of administrative procedures, federal and local urban
renewal programs, site selection, program administration. Prerequisite: GE 560.

GE 581/681 SPECIAL TOPICS 3 s.h.

Topical courses offered on an experimental basis. Check department schedule for
these offerings.

GE 670 PROFESSIONAL PROBLEMS IN

GEOGRAPHIC EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Classroom problems and discussion centered about new viewpoints in geography.
Individual reports, group discussion and research included.

GE 680 SEMINAR 3-6 S.h.

Seminars on various topics will be offered occasionally. Topics might be new trends
in planning, cartographic theory or spatial aspects of service industries.

GE698 INTERNSHIP 3-12 s.h.

Professional learning experience with emphasis on practical applications of

academic background. Open to students who have completed at least 12 s.h. of

graduate work with a minimum of 3.0 GPA. Six s.h. only applicable to degree programs.

GE 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-6 s.h.

Independent research and study under faculty directions. Interested students should
apply to director of graduate studies.

GE850 THESIS 3-6 s.h.

Registration for thesis must be approved by the department's graduate coordinator
and chairperson ahead of time.

Programs and Courses — 123
Geography and Regional Planning
Geoscience

GEOSCIENCE

The Master of Arts Degree Program in Geology is presently inactive.
Graduate level geoscience courses will continue to be offered for those
students who can utilize them as electives in other degree programs or who
desire to supplement their undergraduate training.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

GS511 SEDIMENTARY PETROLOGY 3 s.h.

Determination and interpretation of grain size parameters; an introduction to clays
and clay mineralogy; hand lens and petrographic microscope study of marine
phosphorites, carbonates, siliceous sediments, heavy minerals, and sandstones with
emphasis on interpreting ancient depositional environments. GS 321

GS512 STRATIGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Study of layered rocks with emphasis on the guiding principles of stratigraphy, the
evaluation of unconformities, the principles and problems of correlation, and selected
stratigraphy problems. GS 411

GS 520 PENNSYLVANIA GEOLOGY 3 s.h.

Diversity and abundance of geologic phenomenon within the state will be used to
apply basic geologic concepts of time, rock types and structures and geomorphic
processes. Extensive field trips wilt be an integral part.

GS 522 IGNEOUS & METAMORPHIC PETROLOGY 3 s.h.

Study of rock phyla and their chemical and spatial relationships in the earth. Special
attention of the genesis, mineral composition, and classification of rock types. Ecology
of igneous, sedimentary, and metamorphic rocks is studied in detail. GS 321

GS 524 GLACIAL GEOLOGY 3 s.h.

Study of phenomenon of glaciation, including study of glacial movement, glacial
deposits, and an investigation of possible causes of glaciation. A working acquain-
tance with glacial land forms is provided by means of field trips to glaciated regions
of NW. Pennsylvania. GS 121 and GS 131

GS 526 STRUCTURAL FIELD GEOLOGY 3 s.h.

Includes techniques of geologic field work such as measuring sections, use of aerial
photographs, and a field project involving compilation of a geologic map, cross sec-
tions, and geologic report. GS 325

GS527 GEOMORPHOLOGY 3 s.h.

Landforms and processes and principles that govern both their origin and their
subsequent development. GS 325

GS 530 PALEONTOLOGY 3 s.h.

A morphological study of major invertebrate life forms of geologic past and their
distribution in space and time. GS 131 or Bl 120

GS 535 ECONOMIC GEOLOGY 3 s.h.

Study of earth's metallic and non-metallic mineral resources with regard lo processes
of formation, methods of extraction (mining and drilling methods), methods of treat-
ment, uses, and economic and environmental factors. GS 321

124 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

GS536 GEOLOGY OF THE NORTHERN ROCKIES 3 s.h.

A field study of the major geologic features and relationships involved in the develop-
ment of the northern Rocky Mountains. National Park and Monument areas of South
Dakota, Wyoming, and Montana are included among the areas investigated. Permis-
sion of instructor

GS 540 PETROLEUM GEOLOGY 3 s.h.

An introduction to the geology of petroleum, its origin, migration, entrapment and
production. The laboratory is designed to provide practical experience in subsurface
mapping techniques and the use and evaluation of geophysical logging devices.
Minimum 20 credit hours of Geology

GS 541 THE SOLAR SYSTEM 3 s.h.

Characteristics and behavior of planets and their satellites, asteroids, meteors, com-
ets, and other phenomena of the solar system. One of the major topics will investigate
and criticize several of the theories of its origin. It will require some treatment of celestial
mechanics. MA 121 and PY 1 1 1

GS 542 THE SIDEREAL UNIVERSE 3 s.h.

Characteristics and classification of the stars, their assemblage in groups and gal-
axies, and their evolution. Techniques of gathering data are examined to gain an
understanding of the role of the telescope, spectroscope, and photometer in astro-
nomical research. Lab exercises and night observations are a part of the course. Credit
will be given only to those for whom the course represents an area of study for which
credit has not previously been recorded. MA 121 and PY 111

GS 543 CARBONATE GEOLOGY FLORIDA 3 s.h.

Two weeks of field study in Florida Keys. Will be conducted from base camp in
Florida Keys and will consist of both land and water work as the different carbonate
environments in the Keys, Florida Bay, and the Atlantic reef tract are studied.

GS 550 OPERATION OF THE PLANETARIUM 1-2 s.h.

Designed to acquaint student with the operation and use of the Spitz Planetarium.
A satisfactory instructional program or show for a public group will demonstrate ac-
complishment of course objectives. GS 110 or GS 341 or GS 342

GS561 PHYSICAL OCEANOGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Introduction to physical, chemical, geological and biological nature of ocean;
topography, submarine geology, and bottom deposits. PY 111 and MA 121

GS 562 MARINE GEOLOGY & PLATE TECTONICS 3 s.h.

A continuation of physical oceanography. Emphasis upon marine geology, coastal
geomorphology, and structure and sedimentary environments of the continental shelf,
slope and ocean basin. PY ill. PY 112, and Geology courses

GS 571-572 METEOROLOGY I and II 3-6 s.h.

Basic and advanced considerations of physical processes of the atmosphere.

Lectures, readings, term paper, lab. One year of Physical Science or Physics GS 581 .

GS681 SPECIAL TOPICS 1-3 s.h.

As student demand and circumstances may dictate, special graduate courses may
be offered by any member of the geoscience graduate faculty.

GS614 CARBONATE PETROLOGY 3 s.h.

Involves the study of ancient and recent limestones and dolomites. Topics include
classification, recognition of constituents of calcareous rocks, cementation processes,
and diagenesis of calcareous deposits.

Programs and Courses — 725
Geoscience
Health and Physical Education

GS619 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Designed for the geologist, chemist, or physicist. Minerals are studied utilizing com-
mon field and X-ray notation. External and internal morphology is examined. Stereo-
graphic projection techniques are applied. Fundaments of fVlathematics plus
IVIineralogy or Physical Chemistry, or permission of instructor

GS621 OPTICAL MINERALOGY 3 s.h

Workshop in study and identification of minerals, theory of mineral formation and
structure, and mineral relationships. Simple chemical and physical techniques will
be used in mineral identification. Physical Geology or General Chemistry

GS 630 PALEOECOLOGY 3 s.h.

Application of paleontologic, sedimentologic, and geochemical approaches to the
interpretation of ancient environments. Field and laboratory research leading to a
term paper. GS 330

GS 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 s.h.

Independent research and study under faculty direction.

A new course, GS 532 Coal Geology, is pending approval.

HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION

The master of science degree in sport sciences is designed to attract
students from the non-teaching professions as well as the teaching profes-
sion. It is discipline-oriented with provisions for the student to choose between
two major areas of emphasis: professional specialization and sport studies.
Options for professional specialization are provided in sport management,
sports information, sports media, and aquatics administration and facilities
management. Options in sport studies are interdisciplinary in nature and
tailored to meet individual needs and interests.

Requirements for Admission — To be admitted to the Health and
Physical Education Department, the applicant must have completed the re-
quirements for a bachelor's degree from an accredited college or university
and fulfill the general requirements for admission to The Graduate School
for a master's degree as discussed in this bulletin.

Requirements for Candidacy — Acceptance into The Graduate School
permits a student to tal<e course work in the department. If a student wishes
to become a degree candidate, he/she must complete the Application to
Candidacy and fonA/ard this form to the dean of Health Sciences after having
successfully completed six hours of course work in the department.

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN SPORT SCIENCES

Students may choose between a thesis or non-thesis curriculum depend-
ing upon individual preference and needs.

I. Thesis Degree Requirements (30 s.h.)

A. Core Courses (20-24 s.h.): HP 600, HP 601 , HP 602, HP 603, GR 615,
GR 516, HP 850.

B. Electives (six-10 s.h.)

Students may, with the advice and consent of an adviser, select elec-
tives from any of the approved graduate level courses.

126 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

II. Non-Thesis Degree Requirements (36 s.h.)

A. Core Courses (18 s.h.): HP 600, HP 601, HP 602, HP 603, GR 615,
GR 516.

B. Electives (18 s.h.)

Three semester hours from HP 631 , HP 632, HP 633, HP 634, HP 635,
HP 637, HP 680, or HP 681. Fifteen semester hours from any of the
approved graduate level courses with the advise and consent of an
adviser.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

HP 510 EXERCISE PRESCRIPTION 3 s.h.

The course is designed to teach individuals to write exercise prescriptions based
upon a subject's tolerance for physical activity. Special emphasis will be given to risk
factors, techniques of evaluation, drugs, injuries, environmental factors, and motiva-
tion with respect to their role in physical activity assessment. In-depth experiences,
working with qualified medical personnel will be provided. Prerequisite: HP 343,
Physiology of Exercise

HP 512 PHYSICAL ACTIVITY AND STRESS MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

Acquisition of necessary understandings of anxiety and stress with respect to the
nature, the place they hold in our society, and the intervention strategies related to
physical activity. A paper, relating the utilization of these techniques is required.

HP 513 PHYSICAL ACTIVITY AND AGING 3 s.h.

The goals of the course are to present the major aspects of physical activity, its
importance to the older adult, and the organization of an activity program. Specific
attention will be given to the physiology of physical activity, effects of activity on growth
and aging, exercise prescription, flexibility, overweight and obesity, and motivational
strategies. A paper is required that deals with analysis of problems of the aged as
observed from visitations to nursing homes, senior citizen organizations, and social
service agencies.

HP 550 CURRICULUM AND PROGRAMMING IN

SEXUALITY EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Designed to provide and share information that will be helpful to current and future
school personnel in developing sexuality education programs in their schools and
local communities.

HP 600 HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY OF SPORT 3 s.h.

A functional approach to an understanding of sport and human movement during
the course of civilization with emphasis on formation of a constructive philosophical
approach to present day problems.

HP 601 SPORT AND SOCIETY 3 s.h.

Designed to acquaint the student with the reciprocal relationships between sport
and physical activity as it affects man's development in the societies and cultures
out of which sport emerges.

HP 602 SPORT PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

Study of the psychological effects and implications of man's participation in sport
and physical activity. Emphasis is on personality and motivational dynamics as they
relate to sport involvement in human behavior.

Programs and Courses — 127
Health and Physical Education

HP 603 PHYSIOLOGICAL BASIS OF SPORT 3 s.h.

An examination of the physiological factors that influence performance in sport with
an emphasis on the analysis of various training techniques.

HP 631 f^OTOR LEARNING 3 s.h.

Psychological principles of learning are applied to the learning of motor skills.
Focuses on integration of the learning process, the individuality of the learner, and
task and instructional procedures.

HP 632 ASSESSMENT OF HUIVIAN PHYSIOLOGICAL FUNCTIONS 3 s.h.

Study of various physical fitness components, their contribution to a person's well
being and how to measure and evaluate physical fitness.

HP 633 KINESIOLOGICAL PRINCIPLES 3 s.h.

Scientific study of human motion with particular attention given to analysis of sport
techniques and discussion of kinesiological concepts.

HP 634 CURRENT LITERATURE IN SPORT 3 s.h.

Review of current literature in physical education and sport. Requires the submis-
sion of an article for publication.

HP 635 SPORT MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

Theory and practice of human management with applications to sport; formal struc-
ture of organizations, goal-setting, organizational personality, group processes and
leadership styles.

HP 641 ADMINISTRATION OF AQUATIC PROGRAMS 3 s.h.

Examines the organizational procedures, administrative techniques and practices
employed in aquatics with special emphasis on adapted, competitive, instructional,
recreational, social and water safety programs.

HP 642 DESIGN AND OPERATION OF AQUATIC FACILITIES 3 s.h.

Elements and principles of planning, design and operation of swimming pools, water-
front facilities and related equipment necessary for the aquatic administrator.

HP 680 SEMINAR 3 s.h.

Specific subjects will be considered through readings, reports, discussions and
guest presenters. A paper will be required. A specific title will be listed in the schedule
of classes. May be repeated.

HP 681 SPECIAL TOPICS 1-3 s.h.

Topics may be considered that are not available through other course offerings.
Prerequisite: Permission of instructor.

HP 690 INTERNSHIP 3-6 s.h.

Prospectus must be presented by the student. Objective is to provide an in-depth
experience in an area of interest to the student under guidance of a faculty member
and a cooperating supervisor. Prerequisite: Graduate faculty approval.

HP 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 s.h.

Students may study intensively a subject of their interest under the guidance of
a faculty member with the appropriate expertise. Prospectus must be presented by
the student. Prerequisite: Approval of faculty member, department chairperson, school
dean, associate provost.

HP 850 THESIS 3-6 s.h.

A new course, "Sport Facilities Administration," is pending approval.

128— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

HISTORY

The Master of Arts Degree in History is designed to give students both
breadth and depth in that academic discipline. As a terminal degree it pre-
pares teachers for the secondary schools and community colleges. Also busi-
ness and industry are seeking students with social science or humanities
majors because of their superior organizational and communication skills.

MASTER OF ARTS IN HISTORY

A minimum of 30 semester hours is required, or 36 semester hours for
those electing not to write a thesis. Within these general requirements is
a nine semester hour research requirement consisting of HI 614 (or a sub-
stitution approved by the department) and a combination of seminars and/or
thesis hours. The remaining hours are selected from the subject matter
courses. Six semester hours may with approval be from related disciplines.
Failure to consult with the department prior to registering for courses may
delay the completion of a master's degree.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

HI 501 HISTORY OF GREECE 3 s.h.

Will analyze major political, social, economic and cultural developments in ancient
Greek civilization from Bronze Age to death of Alexander.

HI 502 HISTORY OF ROME 3 s.h.

Will trace Roman history from early Republic down to fall of Empire. A study of
a civilization from its inception to its collapse.

HI 503 MEDIEVAL EUROPE I, 400-900 3 s.h.

History of early Medieval Europe, from decline of Rome to beginnings of High Middle

Ages; emphasis on political, social, economic, religious, and intellectual developments.

HI 504 MEDIEVAL EUROPE II, 900-1350 3 s.h.

History of late Medieval Europe, from High Middle Ages to Renaissance period;

emphasis on political, social, economic, religious, and intellectual developments.

HI 505 RENAISSANCE AND REFORMATION 3 s.h.

History of Europe from ca. 1250; rise of commercial city. Kings, and pressures on
Christian Church to 1600. Some consideration of technology and voyages.

HI 506 EARLY MODERN EUROPE 3 s.h.

Greatness of France under Louis XIV; Sweden; Thirty Years' War, Emergence of
modern society; French Revolution.

HI 507 HISTORY OF EUROPE, 1815-1914 3 s.h.

Study of Europe in nineteenth century, with emphasis on the emergence of major
thought patterns, Romanticism, Nationalism, Socialism, and Positivism.

HI 508 20TH CENTURY EUROPE 3 s.h.

Political, economic, and diplomatic trends of Europe since 1900, with major em-
phasis on causes and results of war. and search for security.

Programs and Courses — 129
History

HI 520 HISTORY OF ENGLAND TO 1688 3 s.h.

Survey of growth of English nation, with emphasis on political, social, and eco-
nomic developments leading to 17th century conflict between Crown and Parliament.

HI 521 HISTORY OF ENGLAND, 1688-PRESENT 3 s.h.

Survey of growth of England as a democratic constitutional monarchy. Attention
directed to colonial America and English-U.S. relations, as well as to imperial expan-
sion and England's role in 20th century world. Cultural history is included.

HI 522 FRENCH REVOLUTION AND NAPOLEON 3 s.h.

Development of the Grand Monarchy; brief sketch of Old Regime, concentration
on the Revolution and Empire, with emphasis on politics, diplomacy, and econom-
ics. Readings and brief papers.

HI 523 MODERN FRANCE 3 s.h.

Investigation of political, cultural, economic, and social developments since 1815.
Discussions and readings.

HI 524 HISTORY OF GERMANY TO 1848 3 s.h.

Study of evolution of German nation from its prehistoric origins, emphasizing
medieval and early modern phases to 1848.

HI 525 HISTORY OF GERMANY, 1849-PRESENT 3 s h.

Study of development of modern Germany from the Revolution to 1848, including
imperial, republican and totalitarian phases, to post-War formation of East and West
Germany.

HI 526 HISTORY OF RUSSIA 3 s.h.

General survey of Russian history, culture, and institutions. Special consideration
given to study of historical forces formative of Revolution in 1917.

HI 527 HISTORY OF SOVIET RUSSIA 3 s.h.

General survey of contemporary Soviet history, culture, and institutions. Special
consideration given to study of communist theory and its place in current Russian
historiography.

HI 530 HISTORY OF ISLAMIC CIVILIZATION 3 s.h.

An approach to learning about a non-Western culture; Mohammed, Arabs, Muslims
as creators to a great civilization from rise of Islam to 1800; emphasis on cultural
institutions and their interrelationships within Middle East.

HI 531 MODERN MIDDLE EAST 3 s.h.

Survey of changes that have taken place in the Middle East and in Islam since
eighteenth century and of contemporary problems in that region.

HI 540 COLONIAL AMERICA 3 s.h.

Survey of original thirteen states from their inception as colonies within the British
empire to 1763, the eve of independence. Attention given to their political develop-
ment; economic position within the empire; relations with Indians; and evolution of
their social, educational and religious life.

HI 541 THE AMERICAN REVOLUTION 3 S.h.

Study of history of United States from beginnings of revolutionary crisis in 1763
through adoption of the constitution and the administration of John Adams. Special
emphasis is given the causes and civil war aspects of the revolution, and the
constitutional-political development of the new nation.

130— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

HI 542 THE EARLY REPUBLIC 3 s.h.

Survey of United States history from 1783 to 1850, with special attention on con-
stitutional, political, economic and social trends.

HI 543 CIVIL WAR AND RECONSTRUCTION 3 s.h.

Study of failure of American democracy to cope with issues of mid-nineteenth cen-
tury, followed by political, economic, military, and social developments during War
and reconciliation of North and South.

HI 544 HISTORY OF U.S., 1876-1900 3 s.h.

Stresses reaction of various segments of heterogeneous population of rapid indus-
trialization, urbanization, and corporation of American life and emergence of U.S.
as a world power; special attention to formation of new institutions.

HI 545 HISTORY OF U.S., 1900-1929 3 S.h.

Emphasis on political, social, economic, and diplomatic developments in American
history between 1900 and 1929.

HI 546 RECENT UNITED STATES HISTORY 3 s.h.

Study of political, economic, and cultural changes in American life since 1929;
examines roots of social problems facing us today. Some recent foreign policy trends
also studied.

HI 550 HISTORY OF LATIN AMERICA: COLONIAL

PERIOD, 1450-1820 3 s.h.

Study of life of people, Indian cultures, conquest by Spaniards and Portuguese,
government during Colonial Period, and Wars of Independence.

HI 551 HISTORY OF LATIN AMERICA: NATIONAL

PERIOD, 1820-PRESENT 3 s.h.

Study of history of nations which have emerged since independence; emphasis
on economic, political, cultural, and social developments of these nations, as well
as relations of these nations to others in the Hemisphere.

HI 560 HISTORY OF PENNSYLVANIA 3 s.h.

Emphasizes the cultural, economic, political and social development of our state
in its various periods from colonial to today. Special attention given to diversity of
Pennsylvania's people, their institutions, and problems.

HI 561 HISTORY OF AMERICAN DIPLOMACY, 1775-1900 3 s.h.

Traces foreign relations of United States from independence to emergence as a
world power. Topics concentrate on themes of commercial relations, political isola-
tion, expansion, and debate over imperialism.

HI 562 HISTORY OF AMERICAN DIPLOMACY, 1900-PRESENT 3 s.h.

Treats primarily our 20th century involvement in world affairs and domestic debate
over that involvement. Special emphasis will be placed on role of interest groups and
increasing power of Executive Department over Foreign Affairs.

HI 563 THOUGHT AND CULTURE IN EARLY AMERICA 3 s.h.

Selected topics in early American intellectual and cultural growth, with emphasis
on Puritanism, Enlightenment, Cultural Nationalism, and Romantic Movement.

HI 564 THOUGHT AND CULTURE IN MODERN AMERICA 3 s.h.

Selected treatment of historical development of modern American movements in
social and political thought, religion, philosophy, fine arts, and literature.

Programs and Courses —131
History

HI 565 HISTORY OF BLACK AMERICA SINCE EMANCIPATION 3 s.h.

Description and analysis of role of Blacks in history of the United States since the
Civil War: emphasis on key leaders, major organizations, leading movements and
crucial ideologies of Blacks in modern America.

HI 567 ECONOMIC HISTORY OF U.S. 3 s.h.

Historical development of economic institutions in American life since Independence;
emphasis on farming, labor, transportation, banking and manufacturing.

HI 568 U.S. URBAN HISTORY 3 S.h.

A survey of American cities from their beginnings to present emphasizing relation-
ship of urban history of social science theory, and stages and process of city
development.

HI 569 WOMEN IN AMERICA 3 s.h.

Surveys of religious, legal, political, social and popular culture perspectives of
womanhood in America from colonial times to the present.

HI 572 HISTORY OF THE EARLY AMERICAN WORKING CLASS 3 s.h.

Description and analysis of nature and significance of the U.S. working class in
the 18th and 19th centuries. Work settings and communities of workers will be exam-
ined as well as unions such as the National Labor Union and Knights of Labor.

HI 573 HISTORY OF THE MODERN AMERICAN

WORKING CLASS 3 s.h.

Description and analysis of nature and significance of the U.S. working class in

the 20th century. Work settings and strikes will be examined and analyzed as well

as unions such as the United Mine Workers and United Auto Workers, and leaders

including Samuel Gompers, John L. Lewis, and George Meany.

HI 581 SPECIAL TOPICS IN HISTORY 3 s.h.

Each semester courses are offered in interest areas which are not part of the regular
course offerings.

HI 591 FILM AS CULTURAL, INTELLECTUAL, AND

SOCIAL HISTORY 3 s.h.

This course deals with the cinema as social, cultural and intellectual history from
its origins to the present day.

SS599 CONTEMPORARY EUROPE 3 s.h.

A study/tour program in Europe, commonly of three weeks duration each summer.
Itinerary differs, but normally includes London, Paris, Florence, Rome, Austria and
Switzerland. Program atmosphere is informal and always fun and tiring (lots of walk-
ing). Informal lectures on site, guided tours. Academic work includes reading before
departure and keeping a daily log.

HI 600 READINGS IN HISTORY 3-6 s.h.

Direct readings of historical materials, focused on a general topic.

HI 601 HISTORY SEMINAR 3-6 s.h.

Area research, culminating in a formal paper.

HI 614 RESEARCH METHODS 3 s.h.

Investigation of library systems, reference works, bibliographies, how to compile
a bibliography, organizing research, use of statistics, style systems in printing.

132 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

HI 692 HISTORY INTERNSHIP 1-6 s.h.

With departmental approval, students are attached to local or national governnnent
or private agencies doing directive, bibliographical, archival, or museum work. Advis-
ing professor meets with intern regularly and determines what papers or reports will
be required.

HI 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 3 s.h.

Student selects topic for individual study with an instructor.

HI 850 THESIS 3-6 s.h.

HOME ECONOMICS EDUCATION

The Graduate Program in Home Economics Education leads to a Master
of Education Degree. The primary purpose of the program is to further de-
velop professional competencies essential for more responsible leadership
roles.

For admission, a student must have completed a baccalaureate degree
in home economics with major in home economics education or with a
minimum of 35 s.h. of home economics, 19 s.h. in education, including home
economics education and student teaching, and a minimum of three s.h.
in educational psychology. The degree must be from an approved institution.

Food and Nutrition majors who have a BS degree from an approved
institution may be admitted to this program. Graduates with a Food Manage-
ment and Nutrition background will not be qualified to teach in the public
schools nor will this degree help them to meet state certification require-
ments for teaching Home Economics. However, students can become better
qualified for leadership positions in their area of specialization.

Upon admission, students will be assigned an adviser. The student and
adviser will outline a tentative program of studies. Any deviation from degree
requirements shall have the written approval of the adviser and coordinator
of the program.

Prior to the time the student Is admitted to degree candidacy, he/she
must, in consultation with his/her adviser and coordinator, select the thesis
or no-thesis option.

Thesis Option: Candidates will complete 30 s.h. of approved course
work plus a two to four s.h. thesis. The selection of and the proposal for
research shall be approved by the adviser and other members of his/her
Graduate Committee. The research shall be carried on by the candidate
under the direction of the research adviser and/or committee members.

THE THESIS/NO THESIS OPTION,
MASTER'S PROGRAM

Several lUP master's degree programs offer the graduate student a
thesis/no-thesis option.

When the no-thesis option is chosen, additional approved course work-
usually six or more credit hours — is required.

The typical committee thesis arrangement (3-6 s.h.) has the student
working with a committee of four faculty members including the student's
adviser and two faculty members, one of whom may or may not be a mem-
ber of the program's department. The committee may include an off-campus

Programs and Courses —133
History
Home Economics Education

person with special expertise as part of the four if requested by the depart-
ment and approved by the Graduate Dean.

DEPARTMENT DEGREE THESIS CREDITS COMMENTS

Home Economics M.Ed. Optional 30 Thesis

33 No Thesis

Non-Thesis Option: In lieu of thesis, candidate must complete 33 s.h.
of approved course work and two extensive research papers. One research
paper will be required in HE 676 and the other research paper will be in
another home economics course selected by the candidate and approved
by the adviser and the coordinator.

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN HOME ECONOMICS

Students should complete 30 s.h. of work (thesis option) or 33 s.h. of
work (no thesis option) from the following areas: Nine s.h. in Professional
Development including one course in Humanistic studies selected from FE
51 4, 61 1 , 61 2, or 61 3; one course in Behavioral studies selected from EP 604,
573, 576, 578, 580, or CE 629, 639, or EX 631; and GR 615 Elements of
Research; six s.h. in a Specialization Core including HE 674 and 676; six
to nine s.h. selected from courses HE 670, 671, 672 through 699; HE 672
is required of any student who has not completed a course in evaluation;
and nine s.h. in a home economics subject matter concentration. Courses
for the subject matter concentration may be selected from two or more sub-
ject areas of home economics or all courses may be selected from one sub-
ject area of home economics.

Courses HE 533, 677, or 697 may be counted for Home Economics Edu-
cation or subject matter concentration depending on focus of course.

Dual-level courses taken at the undergraduate level cannot be repeated
on the graduate level for graduate degree credit.

A maximum of six s.h. may apply toward degree requirements but only
one to four s.h. may be applied in any one subject matter area. A maximum
of four s.h. may be applied for any tour.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

General Courses

General courses may be used to meet the requirements for subject mat-
ter or home economics education depending upon the focus.

HE 533 TOUR IN HOME ECONOMICS 1-6 s.h.

Aspects of home economics are studied in relation to the culture of areas toured.

Consult brochures, summer sessions catalogs, or chairperson for special offerings.

HE 652 INTERNSHIP 1-6 s.h.

Supervised work experience for majors.

HE 677 SEMINAR IN HOME ECONOMICS 1-3 s.h.

Seminars in selected topics.

134 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

HE 697 WORKSHOP IN HOME ECONOMICS 1-6 s.h.

Provides opportunities for experienced educational personnel to concentrate their
study on common professional problems.

HE 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN HOME ECONOMICS 1-6 s.h.

Student will pursue an independent study in an area of home economics not previ-
ously studied and for which the student and adviser identify a need.

Human Development And The Family

HE 517 INFANT DEVELOPMENT 3 s.h.

Study of characteristic developmental changes of human infants from birth to
approximately two and one-half years.

HE 526 TECHNIQUES OF PARENT EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Focuses on scope and aims of parent education movement. Methods of helping
families become more effective in their parent-child relationships are examined.

HE 527 ADMINISTRATION OF CHILD DEVELOPMENT CENTERS 3 s.h.

Development of competencies needed to administer child care programs. Focuses
on program philosophy, curriculum materials, parent and community involvement,
staff selection and training, admissions and grouping, proposal writing, budgeting
and finance, government regulations, reporting and record-keeping.

HE 620 PROBLEMS IN FAMILY LIVING 3 s.h.

Emphasis is placed on solving problems created by social change. New knowledge
from science, medicine, sociology, economics, art and psychology is utilized to im-
prove family living. Problems concerned with food, clothing, shelter, management,
and family relationships are investigated.

HE 621 FIELD WORK IN FAMILY LIFE OR IN

HUMAN DEVELOPMENT 3 S.h.

Designed to study individual and family interaction. Methods of working with various
types of families through an analysis of research, scientific literature, and communi-
ty programs are studied. Advanced graduate students plan and participate in
laboratory-type work with individual families. (Permission of instructor for non-majors.)

Education

HE 555 HOME ECONOMICS PROGRAMS FOR INDIVIDUALS

WITH SPECIAL NEEDS 3 s.h.

Application of vocational regulations and public laws in relation to individuals with

special needs in home economics programs. Planning, methods, strategies, and

resources for individuals with special needs in home economics programs in school

and non-school settings. Three lecture hours. (Prerequisite EX 300/500.)

HE 556 INDEPENDENT LIVING FOR INDIVIDUALS

WITH SPECIAL NEEDS 3 s.h.

Home management and work simplification techniques for individuals with special

needs. Includes adaptations and modifications for housing, clothing, foods, child care,

and consumer problems of handicapped individuals. Three lecture hours. (Prerequisite

EX 300/500.)

HE 670 HOME ECONOMICS IN AMERICAN EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Present status of home economics is reviewed in terms of the profession's history
and philosophy. Role and contribution of home economics at the elementary, sec-
ondary, post-secondary levels are reviewed and evaluated; trends and issues are in-
vestigated.

Programs and Courses - 135
Home Economics Education
Industrial and Labor Relations

HE 671 HOME ECONOMICS IN HIGHER EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Contemporary programs at college level are evaluated in terms of major issues!
trends, and problems in higher education. Emphasis is placed on problems of cur-
riculum development, effective teaching, guidance and evaluation in professional home
economics.

HE 672 EVALUATION IN HOME ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Evaluative methods and techniques designed to measure a comprehensive range
of home economics educational objectives are studied. Special attention to use and
construction of teacher-made tests and evaluative devices.

HE 673 SUPERVISION AND ADMINISTRATION IN

HOME ECONOMICS 3 g.h.

Deals with principles, methods, and techniques of supervision in home economics.
Special attention is given to basic concepts in supervision such as human relations,
communication process, decision-making and leadership strategies.

HE 674 ADVANCED METHODS OF TEACHING

HOME ECONOMICS 3 g.h.

Various models of classroom teaching are studied with emphasis on procedure,
equipment, and materials used in the improvement of instruction. Implications of cur-
rent trends and issues relevant to classroom education are discussed.

HE 675 SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN HOME ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Specific problems with curriculum, teaching, learning experiences and evaluation
are stressed. Each student will research a special problem or area of interest.

HE 676 CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT IN HOME ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Special attention is focused on realistic curriculum decisions and using innovative
procedures.

HE 690 RESEARCH IN HOME ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Methodology is introduced and studied in terms of research problems. Reports by
home economics, behavioral science, and education researchers are analyzed and
evaluated. Designed to assist the student in defining a thesis. Student should com-
plete HE 676 before scheduling this course.

INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS

The Master of Arts in Industrial and Labor Relations is a multi-disciplinary
graduate degree program designed to prepare professional practitioners in
the field of industrial and labor relations in public and private management,
unions, government agencies, and neutral and service organizations. The
42 s.h. program consists of a required core of 27 s.h. and elective course
offerings totaling 15 s.h.

In consultation with the adviser, each student will individually build the
elective sequence of the program of study by choosing 15 elective s.h. from
among Industrial and Labor Relations courses and courses approved by the
adviser offered by other departments.

Students are strongly encouraged to elect an internship to integrate
theory and practice in the field. Certain students with exceptional background
in relevant work experience or previous course work may qualify for exemp-
tion from some courses. As part of their professional growth, students may
also participate in the research and training activities of the Pennsylvania
Center for the Study of Labor Relations.

136— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

COURSE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE M.A. DEGREE

I. Required Core 27 s.h. in LR 610, LR 611, LR 612, LR 613, LR 615,
LR 619, LR 625, LR 641, and EC 530.

II. Elective Area: 15 s.h. chosen from other elective courses in Industrial

and Labor Relations, or from related departments with the approval of

student's adviser.

INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS

LR 526 CASE STUDIES IN LABOR-MANAGEMENT RELATIONS 3 s.h.

Study of labor management relationships in a variety of organizational setting
through utilization of the case study technique.

LR 557 LABOR AND BUSINESS IN POLITICS 3 s.h.

Analysis of labor and business involvement in politics with special attention to the
involvement of labor and business in Pennsylvania and national politics.

LR 581 SPECIAL TOPICS IN INDUSTRIAL AND

LABOR RELATIONS 3 s.h.

According to student demand, special graduate courses on selected topics.

LR 610 EMPLOYEE RIGHTS UNDER LAW 3 s.h.

A review of the legislated rights and benefits of employees in terms of their impact
on labor and management in the collective bargaining process.

LR 61 1 DEVELOPMENT AND THEORIES OF THE

LABOR MOVEMENT 3 s.h.

Institutional and theoretical oven/iew of the development of the American labor move-
ment with special emphasis on major labor movement theorists. (Alternative: HI 566.)

LR 612 LABOR RELATIONS PRACTICE AND ADMINISTRATION 3 s.h.

Practice and administration of labor relations focusing on the operation and inter-
nal relationships of the individuals involved and upon the application of labor rela-
tions skills.

LR 613 FUNDAMENTALS OF AMERICAN INDUSTRIAL

AND LABOR RELATIONS 3 s.h.

Introduction to the terms, theories, and practice of Industrial and Labor Relations
in the United States.

LR615 DISPUTE SETTLEMENT 3 s.h.

Review of the theories underlying and legislation supporting labor arbitration, em-
phasizing development of advocacy skills through simulations of actual disputes. Pre-
requisite: LR 613.

LR 618 SEMINAR: CURRENT ISSUES IN INDUSTRIAL

AND LABOR RELATIONS 3 s.h.

Detailed examination of current professional issues in the field.

LR 619 RESEARCH METHODS IN INDUSTRIAL AND

LABOR RELATIONS 3 s.h.

Nature of and major outlets for contemporary research in labor relations as well
as the historical development of research in the field. Elements of statistics and quan-
titative interpretations are introduced.

Programs and Courses —137
Industrial and Labor Relations

LR 620 INTERNSHIP 3 s.h.

Field experience in industrial and labor relations. An internship log and term paper
are required.

LR 621 LABOR RELATIONS IN THE PUBLIC SECTOR 3 s.h.

Developments in federal, state, and local labor relations including: presidential orders
and federal agencies; survey of the states; Pennsylvania Acts 1 1 1 and 195; effects
of public sector fact-finding and arbitration.

LR 622 DISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT 3 s.h.

Investigation of employment discrimination in the United States with special atten-
tion to the roles of government, industry, and labor and the impact of federal inter-
vention since 1960.

LR 623 STRUCTURE AND GOVERNMENT OF UNIONS 3 s.h.

The union examined as an institution, with a focus on its organizational structure;
administration; relationships with the employer, its members, and its state and na-
tional affiliates. Particular unions will be chosen for case study. Prerequisite: LR 613.

LR 624 COMPARATIVE LABOR RELATIONS 3 s.h.

International dimensions of labor relations are explored by examining the labor-
management relations in a foreign country or region. Prerequisite: LR 613.

LR 625 PROCESSES OF COLLECTIVE BARGAINING 3 s.h.

Survey of current laws, principles and procedures in use in modern collective
bargaining; and evolving trends.

LR 631 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN THE

PUBLIC SECTOR 3 s.h.

Human resource management systems with a special examination of public sector
organizations.

LR 632 COMPENSATION AND BENEFIT ADMINISTRATION 3 s.h.

Study of the field of compensation management and benefits administration in the
public and private sectors. Special emphasis on the input of collective bargaining
in the development and administration of compensation and benefit systems and the
necessary skills to function as a professional in the field.

LR 640 NEGOTIATIONS 3 s.h.

A course on negotiations theory and practice which applies negotiations strategies
from a variety of fields in hands-on simulations of collective bargaining in labor rela-
tions. Prerequisite: LR 613.

LR 641 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION 3 s.h.

Analysis of the practices and responsibilities of labor and management in the mutual
performance of a collective bargaining agreement, with primary attention given to
the process of grievance resolution. Prerequisite; LR 613.

LR 650 ALTERNATIVE WORK STYLES 3 s.h.

Review of efforts to increase worker participation in certain levels of managerial
decision making in private and public production or service enterprise, through shares
in ownership, seats on boards, quality circles, and other participative structures.
Results will be considered from the point of view of productivity, of worker satisfac-
tion, of social utility. Prerequisite: LR 613.

LR 681 SPECIAL TOPICS IN INDUSTRIAL AND

LABOR RELATIONS 3 s.h.

According to student demand, special graduate courses on selected topics.

138 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

LR699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 3 s.h.

Students will select one or more topics of critical importance in industrial and labor
relations and will meet with faculty for independent reading, analysis, and evalua-
tion. Prerequisites: Approval of department chairperson, dean, and provost.

LR 850 THESIS 3-6 s.h.

For students writing the thesis, LR 850 should be scheduled for the semester in
which the student plans to complete his/her work. The thesis may be a non-committee
thesis (1-3 s.h.). with one faculty member serving as the student's adviser; or a com-
mittee thesis (1-6 s.h.).

MATHEMATICS

The Mathematics Department offers the Master of Education degree
with a major in mathematics and the Master of Science degree,

The Master of Education program is specifically designed for secondary
mathematics teachers. Its purpose is to provide an opportunity for students
to increase their knowledge of mathematics and to become aware of research
and innovations in mathematics education.

The course requirements for the Master of Science program are quite
flexible and include an option of six s.h. in an area related to mathematics.
This flexibility allows the program to senye many purposes, including appro-
priate choices for secondary mathematics teachers, for persons preparing
for employment in areas of applied mathematics, and for students who will
pursue further graduate work in mathematics.

Each graduate student will be assigned an academic adviser to aid in
selecting the most appropriate program. Approval of the adviser is required
for all courses leading to the master's degree.

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN MATHEMATICS

A minimum of 30 s.h. is required for the Master of Education degree.
Courses taken must satisfy the following requirements:

1. One course (three s.h.) from FE 514, 611, 612, 613.

2. One course (three s.h.) from EP 604, EP 573. EP 576, EP 578,
EP 580, CE 629, CE 639, EX 631.

3. GR 615, Elements of Research (three s,h.).

4. Six s.h. from MA 651, MA 652, MA 650, MA 654, With special per-
mission from the adviser, EM 651 and EM 652 are acceptable for
the fulfillment of this requirement.

5. A minimum of 15 s.h. of mathematics content courses. All three s.h,
graduate mathematics courses are considered content courses with
the single exception of MA 600, MA 521 and MA 576 are required
unless comparable courses have been completed at the under-
graduate level.

For descriptions of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF EDU-
CATION; for EP courses, see EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY: for CE
courses, COUNSELOR EDUCATION: for EX courses, SPECIAL EDUCA-
TION; for EM courses, MATHEMATICS FOR ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
TEACHERS.

For description of GR courses, see entry under GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES.

Programs and Courses — 139
Mathematics

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN MATHEMATICS

Every candidate for the Master of Science degree in Mathematics must
complete at least 30 s.h. of graduate work. These courses must satisfy the
following criteria:

1 . The course MA 600, Methods of Research in Mathematics is required
of all students.

2. The two courses MA 576, Abstract Algebra I and MA 521 , Advanced
Calculus I, are required unless comparable courses have been com-
pleted at the undergraduate level.

3. The student may select 27 s.h. of content courses in mathematics
or 21 s.h. of content courses and six s.h. in a related area. The depart-
ment accepts the optional thesis as a content course. The student
must have the adviser's approval of the courses elected in a related
area.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

MA 521-522 ADVANCED CALCULUS I, II 3, 3 S.h.

A rigorous investigation of continuity; differentiation, and integration on real
p-dimensional space. The Riemann-Stieltges integral, infinite series, and infinite series
of functions are also studied. Prerequisite: Permission of the adviser.

MA 523-524 COMPLEX VARIABLES I, II 3, 3 S.h.

Introduces fundamental concepts of complex analysis and includes the following
topics: complex numbers, functions, sequences, analytic functions, elementary func-
tions, complex integration, power series, Laurent series, singular points, calculus of
residues, infinite product and partial fraction expansion, conformal mapping, and ana-
lytic continuation. Prerequisite: Permission of the adviser.

MA 527 TOPOLOGY 3 s.h.

Basic topological concepts, including some topological invariants. Relationships
between topology and other disciplines of mathematics are discussed. Prerequisites:
Differential & Integral Calculus.

MA 545 PROGRAMMING MODELS IN OPERATIONS RESEARCH 3 s.h.

Prerequisites: two semesters of calculus. Development of deterministic mathematical
models for managerial and social sciences with relevant computational techniques.
Three hours lecture per week.

MA 546 PROBABILISTIC MODELS IN OPERATIONS RESEARCH 3 s.h.

Prerequisites: two semesters of calculus, MA 563 or equivalent. Development of
probabilistic mathematical models for managerial and social sciences with relevant
computational techniques. Three hours lecture per week.

MA 553 THEORY OF NUMBERS 3 s.h.

Elementary properties of divisibility, congruences, Chinese remainder theories, primi-
tive roots and indices, quadratic reciprocity, Diphantine equations, and number the-
oretic functions. Prerequisites; Differential and Integral Calculus.

MA 563 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS I 3 s.h.

Probability theory necessary for an understanding of mathematical statistics is de-
veloped; applications of the theory are given, with emphasis on binomial. Poisson,
and normal distributions. Distributions of sums and a central limit theorem are de-
veloped. Three hours lecture per week. Prerequisite; Differential & Integral Calculus.

140— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MA 564 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS li 3 s.h.

Multivariate distributions, properties of the moment generating function, change
of variable technique. Chi-square distribution, estimation, confidence intervals, test-
ing hypotheses, contingency tables, goodness of fit. Many practical applications. Use
of calculating machines where appropriate. Three hours lecture per week. Prerequi-
site: MA 563.

MA 565 TOPICS IN STATISTICS 3 s.h.

Correlation and regression from applied and theoretical points of view, bivariate
normal distribution, small sample theory. Student's t and F distributions, analysis of
variance, nonparametric methods. Many practical applications. Calculating machines
or computers used as appropriate. Three hours lecture per week. Prerequisite: MA 564.

MA 571 LINEAR ALGEBRA 3 s.h.

Theory of vector spaces and linear transformations, applications to linear equa-
tions, determinants, and characteristic roots are studied.

MA 576-577 ABSTRACT ALGEBRA I. II 3, 3 s.h.

Basic algebraic structures such as groups, rings, integral domains, and fields.
Designed to develop ability to construct formal proofs and work within an abstract
axiomatic system. Polynomial rings, factorization and field extension leading up to
Galois Theory.

MA 581-583 TOPIC SEMINARS IN MATHEMATICS 3 s.h.

Special topics going beyond the scope of regularly offered courses. Offered per
student interest/available staff. Students may take more than one Topic Seminar with
written approval of adviser. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.

MA 600 METHODS OF RESEARCH IN MATHEMATICS 3 s.h.

Review of literature and recent research in mathematics. Emphasis on use of peri-
odicals, other library resources. Each student completes an independent study of
an approved topic, including a written report.

MA 625-626 REAL VARIABLES I, II 3, 3 s.h.

Classical theory of functions of a real variable and of measure and integration the-
ory. Prerequisite: MA 522 or equivalent.

MA 631 FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS i 3 s.h.

Designed to acquaint students with logical techniques used in proof and set the-
ory. Topics include symbolic logic, rules and inference, validity of arguments, algebra
of sets, cardinal numbers, the well-ordering property, and the Axiom of Choice.

MA 632 FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS II 3 s.h.

Properties of axiom systems including consistency, independence, and complete-
ness for propositional calculus and first-order predicate calculus. Prerequisites: MA 631
and at least six s.h. of graduate level mathematics.

MA 641 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 3 s.h.

Special solvable nonlinear equations with solutions based on operator techniques,
Laplace transform or infinite series. Applications to physical problems. Three hours
lecture per week. Prerequisite: Differential & Integral Calculus.

MA 650 HISTORY OF MATHEMATICS 3 s.h.

Men and ideas that have shaped the course of events in mathematics. Major at-
tention given to developing activities for secondary school mathematics classroom
which incorporate the historical viewpoint.

Programs and Courses —141
Mathematics

MA 651 SEMINAR IN TEACHING JUNIOR HIGH

SCHOOL MATHEMATICS 3 s.h.

Explores problems of teaching mathematics at junior high level. Emphasis on a

discovery, lab-oriented approach to teaching. Prerequisite: Permission of instructor.

MA 652 SEMINAR IN TEACHING SENIOR HIGH

SCHOOL MATHEMATICS 3 s.h.

National and international forces shaping today's mathematics programs, curricu-
lum development and research, art of generating interest, formation of concepts, proof,
problem solving, generalization, and evaluation. Special attention to teaching topics
from algebra and calculus and modern approaches to teaching geometry and trig-
onometry. Prerequisite: Permission of instructor.

MA 654 CURRICULUM & SUPERVISION IN MATHEMATICS 3 s.h.

Basic principles underlying an effective mathematics curriculum from both a theo-
retical and experimental viewpoint. Investigates supervisor's role as source of stimu-
lation, leadership, and expertise in teaching mathematics.

MA 655 PROJECTIVE GEOMETRY 3 s.h.

An introduction to Klein's formulation of geometry of the invariant theory of a given
set under a given group of transformations and develops projective spaces of 1 and
2 dimensions and conies and quadratic forms. Prerequisites: Undergraduate courses
in linear algebra and geometry.

MA 656 AFFINE GEOMETRY 3 s.h.

Examines affine and metric geometries based on an axiom system stated in terms
of linear algebra, which leads to important theorems of classical geometry. Prerequi-
sites: Undergraduate courses in linear and abstract algebra.

MA 677 TOPICS IN ABSTRACT ALGEBRA 3 s.h.

Topics in group theory, ring theory, and study of modules. Prerequisite: MA 577.

MA 690 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN MATHEMATICS 3 s.h.

Under the guidance of faculty member, a student may study some area of mathemat-
ics not in the regular courses.

MATHEMATICS FOR ELEMENTARY

SCHOOL TEACHERS

The program leading to a Master of Education degree in Mathematics
for Elementary School Teachers is designed to give the elementary and mid-
dle school teacher both depth and breadth in the mathematical concepts
essential to a contemporary school mathematics program. An integral part
of the program will be to familiarize the students with recent developments
in curriculum, instruction, and implementation of contemporary mathematics
programs in the elementary schools. Upon completion of the program the
student will be prepared to serve as a coordinator, resource person or in
other leadership roles in an elementary or middle school mathematics pro-
gram. For teachers in the public schools, the program meets the credit re-
quirements for instructional Level II certification.

Each person admitted to the program will be assigned an advisor who
will assist the student in selecting the course work best suited to the stu-
dent's background and professional aspirations.

142 -Indiana University of Pennsylvania

A minimum of 30 s.h. is required for the Master of Education in
Mathematics for Elementary School Teachers Degree. Courses taken must
satisfy the following requirements:

I. Professional Development Area — nine s.h. as listed below:

A. Humanistic Studies — three s.h. should be selected from the course
listings for the Foundations of Education department.

B. Behavioral Studies — three s.h. should be selected from a list of ap-
proved courses (consult advisor). Course descriptions are under the
appropriate departmental listings for the Educational Psychology,
Counselor Education, Special Education, and Elementary Education
departments.

C. Educational Research — three s.h.
GR 615 Elements of Research.

II. Specialization Core — six s.h. required from EM 650, 651, 652.

III. Subject Matter Concentration Area — 11-15 s.h.

A minimum of 15 s.h. will usually be selected from the courses listed
if the student elects not to write a thesis. If the student elects to write
a thesis, 1 1 semester hours will be taken in the Subject Matter Concen-
tration Area. Courses other than those with "EM" department labels (such
as MA 654) may be taken to meet the Subject Matter Concentration Area
requirements with the advisor's consent. MA courses are listed in the
MATHEMATICS section.

IV. Thesis (optional) — two to four s.h.

A student may elect to write a thesis for two to four s.h. after con-
sultation with his/her advisor. This decision should be made at the time
the student is admitted to candidacy for the degree.

Thesis credits will be determined by the advisor in consultation with
the student.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

INTERNSHIP PROGRAM AS PART OF THE
MASTER OF EDUCATION IN MATHEMATICS
FOR ELEMENTARY SCHOOL TEACHERS
DEGREE PROGRAM

lUP in cooperation with selected school systems offers a graduate level
Internship Program as part of the Master of Education in Mathematics for
Elementary School Teachers degree. This program is intended to provide
a limited number of well qualified graduate students with teaching experi-
ences in a K-8 mathematics program while completing the requirements for
the Master of Education in Mathematics for Elementary School Teachers
degree.

The professional work experiences of the interns will earn graduate
credit and therefore will be subject to review and evaluation by a faculty
member from the University, as well as being under the supervision of
designated public school personnel.

Programs and Courses — 143
Mathematics

Information regarding the Internship Program may be obtained from:
Director of Graduate Studies in Mathematics for Elementary School
Teachers, Mathematics Department, lUP, Indiana, PA 15705.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

EM 517 INTRODUCTION TO PROBABILITY

AND STATISTICS 3 s.h.

Introduces students to elementary concepts of probability which will enable them
to analyze data, make predictions and determine what concepts may be used with
children. Prerequisite: MA 152 or equivalent.

EM 520 PRE-CALCULUS MATHEMATICS I 3 s.h.

Examines the function concept as applied to elementary real number functions and
graphing techniques for these functions. Topics include real number functions such
as absolute value, step, linear quadratic and other polynomial functions, trigonometric
and other periodic functions, exponential logarithmic functions and all other inverse
functions. Students will examine curricular materials that develop function concepts
in grades K-8. Prerequisite: MA 152 or equivalent.

EM 550 MATHEMATICS FOR EARLY CHILDHOOD 3 s.h.

Study of child-centered, activity-oriented, mathematics program for early childhood
education. Students gather and construct manipulative materials and become familiar
with commercially produced materials. Pre-numbered activities, number activities,
numeration, operations on whole numbers, fractional numbers, geometry, measure-
ment, problem solving, study of related research. Prerequisite: MA 152 or equivalent.

EM 556 PRINCIPLES OF GEOMETRY I 3 s.h.

Students become acquainted with an informal, intuitive approach to geometry. Ac-
tivities and materials for teaching geometrical concepts to children are an integral
part of the course. Prerequisite: MA 152 or equivalent.

EM 557 INTRODUCTION TO NUMBER THEORY 3 s.h.

Introduction to topics in elementary number theory including: basic operations and
properties of integers; divisibility properties of integers; modular arithmetic and con-
gruences; diaphantine equations; interesting relationships among numbers; applica-
tions of number theory in elementary school mathematics. Prerequisite: MA 152 or
equivalent.

EM 558 INTRODUCTION TO LOGIC AND LOGICAL GAMES 3 s.h.

Introduction to some basic ideas, terminology and notation of logic. Topics con-
sidered: symbolic logic, with special emphasis on algebra of propositions; applica-
tions of Boolean Algebra such as algebra of sets and switching circuits; and introduc-
tion to quantification theory and its value in determining validity of mathematical
arguments, inference schemes and logical puzzles and a consideration of other topics
in logic suitable for a K-8 mathematics curriculum. Prerequisite: MA 152 or equivalent.

EM 559 COMPUTER RELATED TOPICS IN THE

ELEMENTARY AND MIDDLE SCHOOL 3 s.h.

This course is intended to provide teachers with the concepts and techniques

necessary to teach computer related topics to children in the elementary and middle

schools. Participants will work with elementary school children throughout the

semester. Prerequisite; MA 152 or equivalent (or consent of instructor).

144 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

EM 571 BASIC CONCEPTS OF ALGEBRA 3 s.h.

Concepts of basic algebraic structures such as group, ring integral domain, field
and vector space are studied within the context of the mathematical maturity of the
student. Other topics include relations and functions, polynomials and polynomial
equations, systems of equations and inequalities. Consideration given to develop-
ment of these concepts in the mathematics curriculum. Prerequisite: MA 152 or
equivalent.

EM 601 BASIC CONCEPTS IN MATHEMATICS I 3 s.h.

For students who have not taken MA 151 or an equivalent course as undergraduates.
Will give a good understanding of development and structure of systems of numera-
tion up to and including the set of real numbers.

EM 602 BASIC CONCEPTS IN MATHEMATICS II 3 s.h.

For students who as undergraduates have not taken MA 152 or an equivalent course.
Will give a basic understanding of algebraic properties of different mathematical
systems and help the student to understand how properties of systems are interrelated.
Prerequisite: EM 601 or equivalent.

EM 603 TEACHING THE METRIC SYSTEM 3 s.h.

A course designed for elementary and/or middle school teachers that will thoroughly
acquaint them with the SI Metric System as the general public will use it and provide
an opportunity to investigate and create activities suitable for their students. Sec-
ondary teachers unfamiliar with the SI System or with methods of teaching the system
will find this course very beneficial also. Prerequisite: Methods course in teaching
mathematics or consent of instructor.

EM 650 CURRICULUM AND INSTRUCTION IN

ELEMENTARY SCHOOL MATHEMATICS 3 s.h.

The design of this course is to familiarize the elementary/middle school teacher
with the philosophical and psychological issues that guide the development of
mathematics curricula. Topics include: a history of the development of mathematics
curriculum; innovative curricula that have impacted on teaching and learning; ways
of implementing a contemporary program and criteria for the textbook selection. Pre-
requisite: Methods course in teaching mathematics or consent of instructor.

EM 651 THE LABORATORY APPROACH TO

TEACHING MATHEMATICS 3 s.h.

Development of the lab approach to the teaching of mathematics. Includes both

an intensive study of techniques, organization, and supervision of laboratory activities

and the practical design construction and implementation of materials. Prerequisite:

Methods course in teaching mathematics or consent of instructor.

EM 652 DIAGNOSIS AND REMEDIAL TEACHING

OF MATHEMATICS 3 s.h.

Examines why some children have difficulty in learning mathematical concepts and
presents tools and techniques for diagnosing and remediating common difficulties
in elementary and middle school mathematics. Course valuable for those teaching
in elementary, middle school, or remedial programs. Prerequisite: Methods course
in teaching mathematics or consent of instructor.

EM 681 SPECIAL TOPICS 3 s.h.

Special topics which go beyond the scope of regular offered courses. Offered on
basis of student interest and available staff. The student may take more than one
Special Topics offering with the written approval of the advisor. Prerequisite: Con-
sent of the instructor.

Programs and Courses —145
Mathematics
Music and Music Education

EM 699 ELEMENTARY MATH - INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-6 s.h.

Under the guidance of a faculty member, a student may study some area of mathe-
matics or mathematics education not covered in the regular courses.

MUSIC AND MUSIC EDUCATION

The graduate program in music provides the student with opportuni-
ties to improve his/her skills as teacher, performer or scholar beyond the
bachelor's degree. Upon acceptance by The Graduate School, each stu-
dent consults the Director of Graduate Studies in Music who will help to plan
the sequence of courses, and who will be responsible for the formation of
the thesis or recital committee.

ADMISSION: Undergraduate degree with major in music or its demon-
strated equivalent is required. Placement examinations will be required in
theory, music history, piano proficiency and principal performing medium.
The adviser will use the results of these examinations to determine areas
of deficiency and to prescribe specific electives. Upon completion of course
work, each student will schedule a comprehensive oral examination with
a faculty committee.

MASTER OF ARTS IN MUSIC

Core Courses: MU 600, MU 516 (MU 618 for Music Education)

and MU 632 nine s.h.

Major Concentration:

I. Music History and Literature — Courses (four) are selected from the fol-
lowing:

MU 503, MU 504, MU 505, MU 507, MU 508,

MU 510, MU 618 12 s.h.

II. Music Theory and Composition — Courses (four) are selected from the
following:

MU 511, MU 512, MU 513. MU 514, MU 515, MU 618 11-12 s.h.

III. Music Performance — Applied music courses in the major performance
area

AM 610-771 12 s.h.

IV. Music Education — MU 619 and MU 620 are required; with recital or
thesis, two or three additional courses are selected; without recital or
thesis, up to four additional courses are selected from the following:
MU 501, MU 502. MU 628, MU 629, MU 631, MU 633.

MU 634, MU 635, MU 636. MU 537, MU 540-550 10-14 s.h.

Elective Courses:

If major concentration is I, II. Ill, courses totaling six s.h. are selected
according to students' needs and interests.

If major concentration is IV, select a music theory or history course
(3 s.h.) and applied music study in students' major or minor performance
area (4 s.h.)

146 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Thesis or Recital:

GR 850 Thesis — If major concentration is I or II 3-4 s.h.

(Optional if major concentration is IV) 2-4 s.h.

GR 851 Recital — If major concentration is III 4 s.h.

(Optional if major concentration is IV) 2-4 s.h.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN MUSIC EDUCATION

I. Professional Development Area (nine s.h.)

A. Humanistic Studies (3 s.h.) - One of the following: FE 61 1 , FE 612,
FE 613, FE 514

B. Behavioral Studies (3 s.h.) - One of the following: EP 604, EP 573,
EP 576, EP 578, EP 580, CE 629, CE 639, or EX 631.

C. Research (3 s.h.)

GR 615 Elements of Research
II. Specialization Core (six s.h.) — Two of the following:
FE515 Decision Making Curriculum Development
CM 600 Seminar in Learning Resources
Departmental Methods Course(s)
Departmental Curriculum Course(s)
III. Subject Area and/or Electives and/or Thesis (15 s.h.)

A. Required Courses — Music Education Core (nine s.h.)
MU618 Comprehensive Musicianship
MU 619 Methods of Comprehensive Musicianship
MU 620 Foundations of Music Education

B. Elective Courses (six s.h. selected from the following list)
MU 501 Advanced Choral Conducting
MU 502 Advanced Instrumental Conducting
MU 628 Contemporary International Approaches to

Elementary Music Education
MU 629 Advanced String Pedagogy
MU 631 Administrative Problems in Music Education
MU 633 Comparative Choral Methods
MU 634 Practicum in Instrumental Music
MU 635 Psychology of Music Education
MU 636 Advanced Technology of Music Teaching
MU 537 Techniques of the Marching Band
MU 540-550 Summer Workshop (content varies)
AM 601-771 Applied Music

Other approved elective

C. Thesis or Recital (optional)

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF EDU-
CATION; for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE courses,
COUNSELOR EDUCATION; for EX courses, SPECIAL EDUCATION; for CM
course, COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA.

S.h

s.h

3-6

s.h

3-6

s.h

1-3

s.h

1-4

s.h

Programs and Courses -147
Music and Music Education

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

MU 501 ADVANCED CHORAL CONDUCTING 2 s.h.

Material will include large choral works with and without accompaniment. Student
will be expected to develop skills in reading score.

MU 502 ADVANCED INSTRUMENTAL CONDUCTING 2 s.h.

An intensive study of large instrumental works. Skill development of each individual
will be stressed.

MU 503 MUSIC OF THE BAROQUE ERA 3 s.h.

A survey of music from about 1600 to 1750.

MU 504 MUSIC OF THE CLASSICAL ERA 3 s.h.

A survey of music from about 1725 to about 1827.

MU 505 MUSIC OF THE ROMANTIC ERA 3 s.h.

A survey of music from about 1800 to 1910.

MU 506 VOICE PEDAGOGY 3 s.h.

Techniques in teaching voice.

MU 507 MUSIC OF THE 20TH CENTURY 3 s.h.

A survey of the principal stylistic trends in music from 1900 to the present.

MU508 MUSIC OF THE 16TH CENTURY 3 s.h.

A survey of music from about 1500 to about 1600.

MU 509 PIANO PEDAGOGY 3 s.h.

Survey of current and significant past developments in teaching of piano, both
privately and in small and large classes. The various piano methods are analyzed,
compared, criticized, and adapted to each individual's use.

MU 510 SEMINAR IN MUSIC

Subject matter will change each semester. Students will make presentations and
write an extensive research paper. Seminar may be repeated provided subject mat-
ter is not (with departmental approval). An in-depth study can be made of narrowly
defined areas, such as life and/or works of a specific composer or group of composers.

MU511 COMPOSITION 3 s.h.

Composition of Music in various song forms through the rondos and the larger sonata
allegro form. Careful analysis of similar forms of major composers. Instruction will
be highly individualized and will depend considerably on personal interest of the
student.

MU 512 ADVANCED ORCHESTRATION 3 s.h.

Consideration to problems of scoring for full symphony orchestra, string orchestra
and chamber orchestra. Students will produce a full score and orchestra parts so
that orchestration may be tested by actual playing by the University Symphony.

MU513 ADVANCED BAND SCORING 3 s.h.

Problems of scoring for modern concert band. In addition, problems of scoring for
brass band, woodwind choir, and percussion ensemble will be considered.

MU514 ADVANCED CHORAL ARRANGING 2 s.h.

Four-part writing for chorus. Five, six, seven and eight-part writing will comprise
large part of the course. Special consideration will be given to problem of writing for
men's and women's voices.

148 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MU515 CANON, DOUBLE COUNTERPOINT, AND FUGUE 3 s.h.

Application of contrapuntal techniques, through analysis and creative writing. In-
cluded will be study and writing of two- and three-voice canons; two- and three-part
inventions; and two-, three-, and four-voice fugues.

MU516 ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES 3 s.h.

Study of representative compositions of various periods, with emphasis on formal
harmonic and stylistic analysis. Student will develop basic analytical techniques
necessary for analysis of music of any period.

MU 535 MUSIC FOR THE EXCEPTIONAL STUDENT 3 s.h.

Develops music education skills, techniques and materials for the mentally, physical-
ly or neurologically handicapped student, and the gifted student. Designed for majors
in music education, special education, or elementary education.

MU 537 TECHNIQUES OF THE MARCHING BAND 2 s.h.

Theory and practical application of fundamentals of precision drill. Also this course
deals with building "half-time shows," materials and instrumentation of the marching
band.

MU 540-550 SUMMER MUSIC WORKSHOP 1-3 s.h.

Concentration in special interest areas. Content varies.

MU 551 ITALIAN/ENGLISH DICTION 2 s.h.

MU 553 FRENCH DICTION 2 s.h.

MU 554 GERMAN DICTION 2 s.h.

MU 575 MUSIC ENSEMBLES 1 s.h.

Various music department ensembles are open to qualified graduate students.

MU 600 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF MUSIC 3 s.h.

Introduces graduate students to various types of music, music literature and biblio-
graphical tools which exist and which may be used in research in music. As a proj-
ect, each student will prepare an extensive annotated bibliography of a music sub-
ject within his special interest.

MU618 COMPREHENSIVE MUSICIANSHIP 3 s.h.

Combines undergraduate concepts and skills in music theory, literature, and per-
formance at an advanced level using an integrated approach. Prepares student to
function in a varietv of musical roles.

MU 619 METHODS FOR COMPREHENSIVE MUSICIANSHIP 3 s.h.

Includes learning strategies, experiences, and activities appropriate for introducing
Comprehensive Musicianship at elementary and secondary school levels.

MU 620 FOUNDATIONS OF MUSIC EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Study of historical, philosophical and social foundation of music education including

current trends in educational thought and their implications for school music program.

MU 622 COMPOSITION II 3 s.h.

MU 623 COMPOSITION III 3 s.h.

Programs and Courses — 149
Music and Music Education

MU 628 CONTEMPORARY INTERNATIONAL APPROACHES

TO ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 2 s.h.

An introduction to new developments in elementary, music education practices
based on techniques originated by Carl Orff in Germany, Zoltan Kodaly in Hungary
and Shinichi Suzuki in Japan. Authentic adaptations of music and materials in lec-
ture, demonstration and workshop situations.

MU 629 ADVANCED STRING PEDAGOGY 2 s.h.

Study of specific techniques and problems of teaching violin, viola, cello and double
bass in both individual and class situations.

MU 631 ADMINISTRATIVE PROBLEMS IN MUSIC EDUCATION 2 s.h.

Review of conventional administrative organization of music education in public
schools. Role of music director, music specialist, consultant, and music resource
teacher will be carefully defined. Consideration of problems of scheduling in public
school. Current issues concerned with music education and public education in general
will be considered including curriculum development.

MU 632 RESEARCH TECHNIQUES IN MUSIC 3 s.h.

Study of research techniques appropriate for music and music education including
selection of research problem, collection of data, types of research, survey of cur-
rent research studies in music education and use of library in connection with research
problems. Elements of statistics are introduced as needed to interpret research reports.
As part of requirements, student will prepare a written plan for research project or
thesis.

MU 633 COMPARATIVE CHORAL METHODS 2 s.h.

Materials and procedures of preparation of vocal groups for public performance.
Several accepted, yet contrasting, approaches will be considered, ranging from the
Christiansen technique to that of John Finley Williamson. Special attention to pro-
gram building.

MU 634 PRACTICUM IN INSTRUMENTAL MUSIC 2 s.h.

Consideration of those materials and procedures which have been proven by ac-
tual use in the United States. These various approaches will be compared and critically
analyzed by the class. Rehearsal techniques, efficient use of time and basic motiva-
tion will be stressed.

MU 635 PSYCHOLOGY OF MUSIC EDUCATION 2 s.h.

An analysis of latest evidence produced by field of psychology in music education
as applied in actual classroom situations.

MU 636 ADVANCED TECHNOLOGY OF MUSIC EDUCATION 2 s.h.

Examination and application of modern communications media and their role in
music education. Development of an experimental sound lab, use of electronic devices,
synthesizers and computers. Application of systems approach and programmed learn-
ing to music education.

MU 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN MUSIC 1-6 s.h.

150 -Indiana University of Pennsylvania

APPLIED MUSIC (AM 601-771) 1-4 s.h.

The following courses will be taught in form of private lessons geared to individual
student and aiming at maximum progress of each student, depending on background
of the student and time available. The student should for any series of lessons use
the first number in programming for the first time, the second number for the second
time, etc.

AM 601, 651, 701, 751 Private Piano

AM 602, 652, 702, 752 Private Organ

AM 603, 653, 703, 753 Private Harpsicord

AM 605, 655, 705, 755 Private Voice

AM 606, 656, 705, 756 Private Violin

AM 607, 657, 707, 757 Private Viola

AM 608, 658, 708, 758 Private Cello

AM 609, 659, 709, 759 Private Bass Viol

AM 610, 660, 710, 760 Private Flute

AM 61 1 , 661 ,711, 761 Private Clarinet

AM 612, 662, 712, 762 Private Oboe

AM 613, 663, 713, 763 Private Bassoon

AM 614, 664, 714, 764 Private Saxophone

AM 615, 665, 715, 765 Private Trumpet

AM 616, 666, 716, 766 Private French Horn

AM 617, 667, 717, 767 Private Trombone

AM 618, 668, 718, 768 Private Baritone Horn

AM 619, 669, 719, 769 Private Tuba

AM 620, 670, 720, 770 Private Percussion

AM 621, 671, 721, 771 Private Guitar

NURSING

The Nursing Department offers a Master of Science degree with a con-
centration on Family Nursing. The program of study includes three areas
of focus: the clinical focus on Family Nursing, a focus on nursing theory
and research, and a functional focus on either the teaching of nursing or
the administration of nursing services. The program is designed to prepare
graduates to function as teachers, administrators, or practitioners of family
nursing.

In addition to meeting the requirements for admission to the Graduate
School, the student must have graduated from an NLN accredited bacca-
laureate nursing program, be licensed to practice nursing in Pennsylvania,
have completed an undergraduate statistics course, have had two years of
nursing work experience, and have submitted letters of recommendation
from three individuals attesting to the student's nursing competency and
potential for graduate study. For admission to degree candidacy, the stu-
dent must have completed at least six hours of graduate Nursing courses,
have achieved satisfactory scores on the Graduate Record Examination,
and show a 3.0 grade average in graduate courses.

The Master of Science in Nursing curriculum requires completion of
38 hours of prescribed coursework plus a thesis, or 38 hours of prescribed
coursework plus an additional 6 hours of approved elective courses.
Research is an essential component of the program, whether or not the stu-
dent elects to complete a thesis. The functional component of teaching or
administration requires a practicum; practicum sites are secured by graduate
faculty and practice is supervised by graduate faculty. As a terminating ac-

Programs and Courses — 151
Nursing

tivity, the student is required to write a comprehensive examination, the con-
tent and procedure determined by the graduate faculty. The purpose of the
comprehensive examination is to test the student's ability to analyze and
synthesize theory, concepts and methodologies learned over the period of
study for the Master's degree. Further information on course requirements,
academic policies and program requirements is included in the MSN Hand-
book which is distributed to all graduate students and is available at the
program office.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

NU 610 NURSING ADMINISTRATION PRACTICUM 5 s.h.

Development of the functional role of nurse administrator; practice in a health care
agency under the supervision of a practicing nurse administrator; application of admin-
istrative theory to nursing.

NU611 TEACHING PRACTICUM 5 s.h.

Development of functional role as nurse educator; practice under the guidance of

a master teacher of Nursing.

NU 615 ADVANCED NURSING RESEARCH 3 s.h.

Selection of a research problem, the literature search, data collection, elements
of statistical analysis, and writing research reports are studied. Thesis proposal will
be developed during this course.

NU 620 THEORETICAL FOUNDATION FOR NURSING 3 s.h.

Contemporary theories of nursing; concept formulation, fundamental theory develop-
ment and application to nursing practice; social and political issues.

NU 624 CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT FOR

NURSING PROGRAMS 3 s.h.

Development of curriculum ohilosophy, conceptual framework, objectives, and
course content essential to undergraduate education in nursing; overview of curriculum
philosophies.

NU 625 TEACHING STRATEGIES FOR NURSING CURRICULUM 3 s.h.

Theories of learning, instructional modalities, teaching strategies and methods,
methods of evaluation of learning; emphasis on theoretical and clinical requirements
for professional nursing.

NU 627 ADMINISTRATION OF NURSING SERVICES 3 s.h.

Conceptual framework of nursing administration; goals and structure for nursing

management, processes, resources, controls; administrative and organizational theory.

NU 630 FAMILY NURSING I 3 s.h.

The study of family theory and the family process, with emphasis on the nuclear
and extended family; assessment techniques, family analysis.

NU 631 FAMILY NURSING II 3 s.h.

Focus is on Family health problems in the non-urban community setting, promo-
tion of health, maintenance of health, and health education; development of knowledge
of the process of diagnosis of deviations from health, application of that knowledge
in family nursing practice; fundamental disease processes and the study of the sick
or disordered human system.

NU 632 FAMILY ASSESSMENT & ANALYSIS 3 S.h.

Practicum, with concentrated study of either a nuclear family or an extended family.

152— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

NU 633 FAMILY NURSING III 3 s.h.

Study of health care systems and the role of the professional nurse in the com-
munity; health planning, health policy development, and health care program evalua-
tion; emphasis on the family and referral systems, development of a clinical nursing
role in non-urban health care; nursing in health care agencies, client homes, clinics.

NU 850 THESIS 3-6 s.h.

Thesis should be scheduled for the semester in which student plans to complete

degree requirements. A committee of faculty members will provide thesis supervision.

PHILOSOPHY AND RELIGIOUS STUDIES

The Philosophy & Religious Studies Department does not presently offer
a graduate degree in either area. However, graduate students in other dis-
ciplines and public school teachers will find courses which relate directly
to their fields on a theoretical level. And, in some cases, philosophy courses
are accepted as electives in graduate programs in other disciplines (see your
department advisor for further information). Research or thesis work may
be done in Philosophy or Religious Studies with approval of the student's
major program advisor.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

PH 505 HUMAN RIGHTS: THEIR BASIS AND BOUNDARIES 3 s.h.

An analysis of a concept which is the focus of much moral, political and legal dis-
pute. Philosophical sources are supplemented by recent social science research
concerning the comparative abilities of human and nonhuman animals and by en-
vironmental studies which prompt consideration of the possible rights of future gener-
ations.

PH 560 PHILOSOPHY OF LANGUAGE 3 s.h.

An investigation of issues in the philosophy of language and related issues in lin-
guistics (including anthropological linguistics, sociolinguistics and psycholinguistics).
Topics include, e.g., the influence of language on perception, rationalist/empiricist
perspectives on language acquisition, language and political control, reference, mean-
ing and truth.

RS 580 READINGS IN RELIGIOUS THOUGHT 3 s.h.

An examination of religion as a vital human phenomenon. Treating both classical
and contemporary themes; origin of western theological thinking; alienation; contem-
porary atheism; definitions of deity in western and eastern religions; the sacred; ori-
gins of religion.

PH/RS 581 SPECIAL TOPICS 1-3 s.h.

PH 582 PROBLEMS OF ETHICS 3 s.h.

An investigation into the nature of morality by focusing on influential historical and
contemporary ethical theories and issues.

PH 583 AMERICAN PHILOSOPHIC THOUGHT 3 s.h.

Study of influential and original philosophies developed in America from colonial
period to present. Topics include the American Enlightenment, Transcendentalism,
Evolution, Idealism. Pragmatism and Naturalism.

Programs and Courses — 153
Philosophy and Religious Studies
Physics

PH/RS 584 PHILOSOPHY/RELIGIOUS STUDIES SEMINAR 3 S.h.

Area research in the discipline, considering various facets of a central problem.
Students doing a thesis or research project in Philosophy or Religious Studies will
register for this course.

PH 585 PROBLEMS IN LOGIC 3 s.h.

An investigation into issues in deductive and/or inductive logic, fallacy analysis and
the nature of critical thinking.

PH/RS 599 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-6 s.h.

PHYSICS

The graduate program in physics offers a choice of three degrees: a
Master of Education, a Master of Arts, and a Master of Science. The stu-
dent obtaining a nnaster's degree for fulfillment of certification requirements
usually selects either the Master of Education Degree or the Master of Arts
Degree. The student obtaining a master's degree for additional preparation
for research, an industrial position, or further graduate work will usually se-
lect the Master of Science Degree.

Because of a wide range of possible courses and research areas avail-
able, the student is required to have the consent of his/her department ad-
viser before selecting a course or initiating a research project. Adviser
assignments are made as soon as the acceptance of a graduate student
reaches the physics department. The graduate student should arrange
appointments with his/her adviser. The flexibility of the program allows the
student to satisfy almost any combination of educational goals.

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN PHYSICS

I. Professional Development Area — nine s.h.

A. Humanistic Studies (three s.h.) — One course must be selected from
FE 514, 611, 612, 613.

B. Behavioral Studies (three s.h.) — One course must be selected from
the following: EP 604, EP 573, EP 576, EP 578, EP 580, CE 629,
CE639, EX 631.

C. Research Coursework (three s.h.) — Students in this program must
enroll in GR 615.

II. Specialization core — nine s.h.

Students in this program must enroll in the following three courses for
three s.h. each: PY 511, PY 512, SC 576.

III. Thesis (optional) — zero to four s.h.

Each student may undertake an individual research and complete an
acceptable thesis under the direction of one of the Graduate Faculty.
The semester hour requirement is fulfilled by enrolling in PY 850 for the
proper number of semester hours as decided jointly by the student and
his/her thesis adviser.

IV. Subject Area and/or Electives — eight to fifteen s.h.

With the written approval of the graduate adviser, the student may com-
plete the 30 s.h. requirement* by choosing from among any of the re-
maining courses in The Graduate School.

154 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF EDU-
CATION; for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE courses,
COUNSELOR EDUCATION; for EX course, SPECIAL EDUCATION.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

*lf the option of "no thesis" is exercised, an additional three s.h. are required
bringing the total requirement to 33 s.h.

MASTER OF ARTS IN PHYSICS

This program is the most flexible of the three graduate degree programs
offered by the Physics Department. Each student's program is designed to
meet his or her individual needs by the student and adviser working together.

The educational goals of students in many categories can be met while
the student is working to attain his/her degree. Several examples of the cat-
egory of student who may select this degree program are:

1. The student whose undergraduate training is in Physics Education,
Physical Science Education, or Science Education with a strong
professional education component. This student may need more con-
tent than professional education. In this program the student may,
with the concurrence of his/her adviser, enroll in exactly that ratio
of content courses to professional education courses which are neces-
sary to attain his/her goals.

2. The student who holds a teaching certificate in a field other than phys-
ics but is a secondary school physics teacher. These students often
require formal coursework in a number of areas of physics in order
to have physics added to their certificate. This is normally a require-
ment of their school district and/or the Commonwealth. This program
allows them to meet this requirement while working toward a degree.

3. The student who wishes to enroll in a cooperative program includ-
ing those programs with internship components. Students may earn
8-15 s.h. during a semester while interning under one of the special
programs instituted by the University.

SUBJECT MATTER - 15 s.h. minimum.

Required coursework in Physics is to be selected from the Graduate
Physics courses whose course number is 510 or greater. This selection must
have the prior approval of the student's academic adviser and a notation
of such approval is to appear in the student's folder.

ELECTIVES - 11 to 18 s.h.

The student may complete the requirements for an MA by selecting,
with the approval of his/her adviser, from among the offerings of The Gradu-
ate School. The number of credits selected for electives depends upon the
option exercised under Research and Thesis.

RESEARCH AND THESIS OPTION

Each Master of Arts student must complete degree requirements in one
of the following two ways:

A. Undertake an individual research problem and complete an accept-

Programs and Courses — 155
Physics

able thesis. For this option the student must schedule PY 600 for
two s.h. and PY 850 for at least two s.h. If he/she selects this option
he/she will have completed a minimum of 30 s.h. including these
two courses for the degree.
B. Decide, with the approval of his/her academic adviser, that he/she
does not wish to undertake such a research problem. If this option
is exercised, the student will not do a thesis but must complete a
minimum of 33 s.h. of coursework.

For description of PY 850, see page 00.

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN PHYSICS

I. Admission Requirements. Any student meeting the requirements of The
Graduate School and having either a BA or BS with the major in physics
will be permitted to initiate study in this curriculum. Students having other
degrees that provide sufficient preparation in mathematics and physics
may be permitted to initiate study with approval of the chairperson of
Physics.

II. Subject Matter Concentration.

A minimum of six courses to be selected with the approval of the ad-
viser from the following: PY 536, PY 601-602, PY 634, PY 641 , PY 651 .
PY 652, PY 661-662.

III. Research Requirement.

Each Master of Science student is required to undertake an individual
research problem and complete an acceptable thesis under the direc-
tion of one of the Graduate Faculty. The semester hour requirement is
normally fulfilled by scheduling PY 600 and PY 850.

IV. Comprehensive Examination.

The student is expected to pass a comprehensive examination.

V. Free Electives.

The student may complete the 30 s.h. requirement by choosing from
among any of the offerings of The Graduate School, with, of course, the
advice and approval of his/her graduate adviser.

For description of PY 850, see page 00.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

PY 507 INTRODUCTION TO MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS I 3 s.h.

Designed to provide background needed for most 500 level courses. Student will
acquire skills in problem solving in areas of mechanics and wave motion utilizing
calculus and vectors. Prerequisite: Permission of adviser.

PY 508 INTRODUCTION TO MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS II 3 S.h.

A continuation of PY 507. Develops skills in problem solving in areas of electricity

and magnetism utilizing vectors and calculus. Prerequisite: Permission of adviser.

PY 510 INTRODUCTION TO THEORETICAL PHYSICS 3 s.h.

Application of mathematical methods to physical theory in area of mechanics, elec-
tricity and magnetism, including partial differentials, vector calculus, and non-cartesian
coordinate systems. Intended primarily for individuals in the M.Ed, program. Pre-
requisite: Permission of adviser.

156 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

PY 51 1 SECONDARY SCHOOL PHYSICS

LABORATORY PRACTICE 1-3 s.h.

Designed not only to give the student training in use of PSSC and Harvard Project
Physics laboratory materials, but also to increase his/her ability to make the lab a
more effective teaching tool.

PY 512 CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENTS IN

SECONDARY SCHOOL PHYSICS 3 s.h.

Includes an intensive study of developments, such as PSSC and HPP. Philosophy,

methodology and cognitive theory behind each curriculum will be considered. The

lab equipment, experiments, and visual aids for each will be studied in their proper

setting.

PY 520 ADVANCED LABORATORY PRACTICE 3 s.h.

Experimental Physics. Experiments are made available to supplement student's
previous training. Data interpretation and experimental techniques are emphasized.
Topics can include but are not limited to various methods of measurement and analysis
of radioactivity, interferometry, spectrometry, microwave optics, NMR, mechanical
vibrating systems, and thermal properties.

PY531 MODERN PHYSICS 3 s.h.

An introduction to particle and wave properties of matter, atomic structure, quan-
tum mechanics and the quantum mechanical model of the atom.

PY 533 THERMAL AND STATISTICAL PHYSICS 3 s.h.

A unified approach to study of thermodynamics through use of statistical mechanics.
Temperature, entropy, chemical potential and free energy are introduced and ap-
plied to a monatomic ideal gas and systems of fermions and bosons in quantum and
classical regions.

PY 535 ELECTRONICS 4 s.h.

DC and AC circuits, diode circuits, and transistors circuits, such as the common
emitter and emitter follower amplifiers, are extensively covered. Negative feedback,
operational amplifiers, oscillators, and digital logic are introduced. These topics are
discussed in lecture and investigated by the student in the lab.

PY 536 ADVANCED ELECTRONICS 3 s.h.

Field effect transistors, noise problems, grounding and shielding, applications of
digital logic, digital to analog to digital conversion techniques, transmission lines, and
microprocessor applications. Two one-hour lectures and one three-hour lab. Prerequi-
site: PY 535.

PY 541 ANALYTICAL MECHANICS I 2 s.h.

Kinematics, particle dynamics, gravitation, free and forced harmonic motion. Treat-
ment of these topics utilizes vector calculus and differential and integral calculus.

PY 542 ANALYTICAL MECHANICS II 2 s.h.

Central-force motion, high energy collisions.

PY 545 OPTICS 3 s.h.

Main concepts of modern optics utilized in areas of geometrical, wave and quan-
tum optics. Includes presentation of illustrative examples in areas of laser technology,
complex optical systems, interferometry, and spectroscopy.

PY 551 ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM I 2 s.h.

Coulomb's Law, electrostatic potential, Gauss' Law, dielectrics will be presented
using vector calculus in a modern field formalism. Prerequisite: PY 510.

Programs and Courses -157
Physics

PY 552 ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM II 2 s.h.

Biot and Savart's Law, induced emf, vector potential, displacement current, special
relativity, and electromagnetic radiation \n\\\ be presented using techniques introduced
in PY 551. Prerequisite: PY 551.

PY561 QUANTUM MECHANICS I 3 S.h.

Introduction to theory of linear vector spaces, linear operators, eigenvalues, eigen-
vectors and eigenfunction and their application to the harmonic oscillator, hydrogen
atom, electron in a magnetic field, scattering and perturbations. Prerequisites: PY 541
and PY 531 or equivalent.

PY 565 INTRODUCTION TO NUCLEAR PHYSICS 3 s.h.

Survey of introductory nuclear physics including: nuclear size, mass, types of decay,
models, forces, elementary particles, reaction theory.

PY599 SPECIAL STUDIES 1-6 s.h.

A special topic may be offered at the discretion of the department to fulfill a special
necessity.

PY 600 METHODS OF RESEARCH IN PHYSICS 2 s.h.

Offers the student practical training in special methods and materials of research
in physics. Emphasis on types of research, use of physics and physics-related jour-
nals and library facilities. Prerequisite: Permission of department.

PY 601 THEORETICAL PHYSICS I 3 s.h.

Serves as a preparation in mathematical physics for graduate student. Included
will be vector analysis, curvilinear coordinate systems, infinite series, complex variables
and the calculus of residues, ordinary and partical differential equations. Prerequi-
site: Permission of department.

PY 602 THEORETICAL PHYSICS II 3 s.h.

A continuation of PY 601 , covering Tensor analysis, matrices, group theory. Sturm-
Liouville theory, special functions, Fourier series, integral transforms, Green's func-
tions, and integral equations. Prerequisite: PY 601.

PY 634 STATISTICAL MECHANICS 3 s.h.

A quantum approach to statistical mechanics. Fermi, Bose, ideal gas and imperfect
gas systems are investigated. Selected topics in kinetic theory of gases, transport
phenomena, magnetic systems and liquid helium. Co-requisite: PY 561 or its
equivalent.

PY 641 ADVANCED MECHANICS I 3 s.h.

Includes the following topics: Lagrange's equations, Hamilton's Principle. Two body
central force, Euler's Theorem, Small Oscillations, Hamilton's Equations, Canonical
Transformations. Prerequisite: PY 542 or its equivalent.

PY 642 ADVANCED MECHANICS II 3 s.h.

Rigid body mechanics, including Angular Momentum, Euler's equations. Preces-
sions, Special relativity, Covariant four dimensional formulation, Covariant Lagrangian
formulation, Hamilton-Jacoby Theory, Introduction to classical field theory. Prerequi-
site: PY 641 or equivalent.

PY 651 ADVANCED ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY I 3 s.h.

Solution of boundary value problems using Green's functions and separation of
variables techniques. Cartesian and spherical coordinate systems, multipole expan-
sions, macroscopic electrostatics and magnetostatics. Maxwell's equations and plane
electromagnetic waves. Prerequisite: PY 552 or equivalent.

158 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

PY 652 ADVANCED ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY II 3 s.h.

Solution of electrostatic problems using cylindrical coordinates. Green's function
for time-dependent wave equation, conservation laws, wave guides and resonant
cavities. Special Theory of Relativity, simple radiating systems and diffraction. Pre-
requisite; PY 651

PY 657 SOLID STATE THEORY 3 s.h.

Quantum approach to solid state. Topics include second quantization of fermion
and boson systems, electron theory of metals, electron-phonon interactions, and super-
conductivity. Selected subjects in thermal transport, magnetic phenomena. Co-
requisite: PY 561 or its equivalent.

PY661 QUANTUM MECHANICS II 3 s.h.

Fundamental concepts of quantum mechanics, theory of representations and linear
vector spaces, relationship between quantum and classical mechanics. Approxima-
tion methods for stationary problems with applications to central potentials. Prerequi-
site: PY 561 or its equivalent.

PY662 QUANTUM MECHANICS III 3 S.h.

Approximation methods for time dependent problems with application to scatter-
ing and transition theory. Elementary theory of many particle systems with applica-
tions to: molecules and chemical bonds, fundamentals of the quantum theory of solids,
Dirac theory. Prerequisite: PY 661.

PY 690 RESEARCH PROBLEMS IN PHYSICS 1-6 s.h.

Introduction to advanced research problems through individual assignment. Pre-
requisite: Permission of department.

SCIENCE COURSES

SO 575 THE GROWTH OF SCIENCE AND ITS CONCEPTS I 3 s.h.

Traces development of science and its concepts from early beginnings to time of
Newton. Interaction of science and math and their impact on growing society of
Western Civilization is treated in a non-mathematical manner. Three hours lecture
per week.

SC576 THE GROWTH OF SCIENCE AND ITS CONCEPTS II 3 s.h.

Influence and development of concepts of science in Western Civilization are studied
from Newton to present time. While the concurrent development of mathematics is
considered, stress is placed on the non-mathematical understanding of basic con-
cepts. Three hours lecture per week.

POLITICAL SCIENCE

The Political Science Department offers the MA in Public Affairs degree,
with concentrations in Public Administration and International Affairs.

MASTER OF ARTS IN PUBLIC AFFAIRS

The MA in Public Affairs program is designed for part-time and full-time
students who are seeking or are currently engaged in professional careers
as administrators, project directors, staff analysts, supervisors in govern-
ment and human service agency delivery systems, teachers of the social
studies, and those interested in international affairs.

The MAPA requires a minimum of 30-36 graduate credits, including

Programs and Courses —159
Physics
Political Science

a research or internship requirement. The entering student should have suf-
ficient preparation in the social sciences, or in equivalent professional ex-
periences, necessary for satisfactory perfornnance in the progrann. In some
cases this may require specific courses not for graduate credit. Preparatory
requirements, if any, will be determined by the Political Science Department
and the Graduate School and may be completed after admission to the
Graduate School, but prior to admission to candidacy for the degree.

DEGREE REQUIREMENTS: Students may elect to concentrate in one of
two areas: (A) Public Administration (36** credits) or (B) International
Affairs. (30 credits plus Foreign language competence)

A. PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION (36** credits minimum)

1. Research Methods (3-9 credits minimum): PS 674 or *GE 612, and
**C0 502, and **GR 516 or 517.

2. Required Core Courses (15 hours): * * * PS 570, * * * PS 571 , PS 666,
PS 668, PS 673, or PS 555.

3. Research Requirement (3-6 credits). Students must complete an
Internship including a Research Project. The Internship will, when ap-
propriate, be supervised by the student's sub-field advisor or depart-
ment designee. A field-based research project may be substituted for
the internship requirement upon prior approval by the sub-field con-
centration department chairman and the MAPA program director.

4. Subfield Concentration (15 credits minimum): Students must select
one of the following sub-field concentrations with advice from a sub-
field concentration advisor: Police Administration or Correctional
Management; Planning or Regional Development; Human Serv-
ices Administration; Personnel Administration; Municipal Manage-
ment. (See Director of MAPA Program for current list of required
courses and additional options for sub-field concentrations.)

B. INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS CONCENTRATION (30 credits
minimum)

1 . Required Courses (24 credits minimum): Twenty-four (24) semester
hours of primarily Political Science courses as a minimum. At least
half of these must be in the international and comparative area and
should include three of the following courses: PS 520, PS 521 . PS 589,
PS 670, PS 672. The remainder may be selected from area studies
and (with advisor approval) from international or comparative courses
in other Departments. For students preparing for International Service,
courses in Public Administration and/or Public Policy Analysis are
strongly recommended.

2. Foreign Language Reading Competency, established by Exami-
nation.

*May be taken only by those students with subfield concentrations in Plan-
ning or Regional Development.

**lf a student can demonstrate proficiency in statistics or has taken an
undergraduate course in computer science, the hours required to com-
plete the degree will be reduced from 42 to either 36 or 39 hours.

* * *May be waived if taken as an undergraduate, and another course(s) sub-
stituted.

160- Indiana University of Pennsylvania

3. Research Requirement (6 credits minimum):

a. Methods Course: SS 614 or GR 615 (or a Social Science Research
Methods course, approved by advisor, such as PS 674) 3 credits,
and Thesis (PS 850) or PS Internship (PS 695) with Research Proj-
ect (3 credits minimum).

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

PS 520 INTERNATIONAL LAW 3 s.h.

Study of the development, nature, and function of international law, including re-
cent trends.

PS 521 INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS 3 s.h.

Inquiry into purposes, structures, and actions of contennporary international politi-
cal organizations, such as United Nations, regional and functional organizations.

PS 544 SCIENCE/TECHNOLOGY AND PUBLIC POLICY 3 s.h.

Focuses on the interactions of science/technology and politics as they impinge on
the public decision-making process. Technology generated socio-political problems
are investigated on local, state, national, and international level; the adequacy of po-
litical processes and institutions for solving problems in the technological age is ques-
tioned.

PS 550 THE PRESIDENCY 3 s.h.

Examines the Office of President with attention to constitutional foundations, evo-
lution, structure powers, and functions. Comparisons are made between presiden-
tial and parliamentary systems and between offices of President and Governor.

PS 551 THE LEGISLATIVE PROCESS 3 s.h.

Legislative process in the U.S. with emphasis on Congress. Focus on organiza-
tion and function of legislative bodies, with American legislative institutions compared
with those of other nations.

PS 552 PUBLIC OPINION 3 s.h.

Nature of public opinion within political system. Attention to formation of public
opinion, expression, propaganda, mass media, interest groups, and polling.

PS 553 AMERICAN POLITICAL PARTIES 3 s.h.

Role of people, parties, and pressure groups in politics of American democracy.
Attention to sectional and historic roots of national politics, voting behavior, pressure
group analysis, and campaign activities.

PS 554 METROPOLITAN PROBLEMS 3 s.h.

Analyzes multiplicity of problems facing our metropolitan areas such as urban renew-
al, shrinking tax base, federal aid to cities, subsidized mass transit, municipal authori-
ties, and political consolidation.

PS 555 FEDERALISM 3 S.h.

Explores the characteristics of federal system of government with emphasis on the-
ories, origins, institutions, and problems in intergovernmental relations in the U.S.;
federal systems in other nations; and trends.

PS 556 MASS MEDIA IN AMERICAN POLITICS 3 s.h.

Variant theories of the symbiotic relationship between American politics and the
press are examined in the light of the American colonial-national experiences. The
special constitutional rights given to the media are explored, with particular atten-
tion to radio-TV.

Programs and Courses — 161
Political Science

PS 557 LABOR AND BUSINESS IN POLITICS 3 s.h.

An in-depth study and analysis of labor and business involvement in politics is the
focus of the course. Special attention will be given to the involvement of labor and
business in Pennsylvania politics as well as to the relationship between the two com-
peting groups — conflict or cooperation.

PS 558 JUDICIAL PROCESS 3 s.h.

Explores nature and limits of judicial power, courts as policy-making bodies, selection
of judges, decision process, external forces impinging on the courts, and role of Su-
preme Court in its relationship with Congress, the Presidency, and federalism.

PS 559 CONSTITUTIONAL LAW AND CIVIL LIBERTIES 3 s.h.

Study of civil liberties and civil rights issues through leading Supreme Court deci-
sions. Topics include First Amendment rights, procedural due process and the Bill
of Rights, and equal protection problems.

PS 560 CLASSICAL POLITICAL THOUGHT 3 s.h.

Evolution of Western political tradition of Constitutionalism from Plato and Aristotle
to Locke and Montesquieu; religious and rational foundations; medieval theories of
authority and representation; early modern theories of state and sovereignty. Con-
cepts of law, natural rights, liberty, equality, and justice are treated in detail.

PS 561 MODERN POLITICAL THOUGHT 3 s.h.

Development of Western political thought since the mid-1 6th century; classic liber-
alism conservative thought; modern irrational ideologies such as fascism and national
socialism; socialist thought; contemporary collectivist liberalism.

PS 562 AMERICAN POLITICAL THOUGHT 3 s.h.

Develops an understanding of American political thinkers from the Puritans through
the current Afro-American writers. Political phenomena is examined relating to past
writings and inferences are made for future political behavior.

PS 570 INTRODUCTION TO PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 3 s.h.

Examines the environment of public administration; organizational structure, execu-
tive functions, the politics and tools of administration, personnel processes, finan-
cial administration and the problems of democratic control of bureaucracy.

PS 571 ISSUES IN PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 3 s.h.

Intensive study of role of agencies and their administrators in determining and de-
veloping public policy. Public administration in practice is emphasized by utilizing
case studies.

PS 580 SOVIET POLITICS 3 s.h.

Essential features of Communist party and government of U.S.S.R., including ge-
ographical and historical background and ideological and theoretical foundations.

PS 581 SPECIAL TOPICS 1-3 s.h.

In-depth study of a specific problem or topic not regularly treated in courses. May
be repeated.

PS 582-

587 POLITICAL STUDIES 3 s.h.

Comparative study of government and politics of a selected region.

PS 582 AFRICA

PS 583 ASIA

PS 584 MIDDLE EAST

162 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

PS 585 CENTRAL AND EASTERN EUROPE

PS 586 ATLANTIC COMMUNITY

PS 587 LATIN AMERICA

PS 588 POLITICAL-MILITARY STRATEGY 3 s.h.

Deals with national security problems including decision-making and budgeting,

levels of strategy, the utility of force, and the impact of the military on American Society.

PS 589 DEVELOPING NATIONS 3 s.h.

Deals with the political characteristics of emerging nations: the impact of econom-
ic and social change upon political structure; evolving patterns of political develop-
ment; and techniques of nation-building.

PS 631 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN

PUBLIC SECTOR 3 s.h.

In-depth study of human resource management systems with special focus on public

sector organizations. Emphasized will be the development of an understanding of

traditional functional systems as well as skills necessary to successfully manage such

systems.

PS 666 PUBLIC POLICY ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Examines public policy using analytical tools and policy models. Considered with-
in this framework are values and resources, the cultural-political environment, the
policy-making process, evaluation methods and their application to major policy areas.

PS 668 PUBLIC SECTOR FINANCIAL ADMINISTRATION 3 s.h.

Concerned with the administration of fiscal and monetary processes of government
at all three levels. Included are topics related to revenue and expenditure, how the
former are calculated and provided for, and how the latter are prioritized and allocated
via the budgetary process; and control systems which are concerned with record keep-
ing and the monitoring of the flow of revenues.

PS 670 FOREIGN POLICY STUDIES 3 s.h.

Considers selected problems in international affairs. Emphasis on those problems
and conflicts which have evolved in the post-war era, particularly as they related to
position of the United States in world affairs. Specific problems are approached both
in terms of countries involved and the existing balance in world economic, ideological,
and power structure.

PS 672 COMPARATIVE POLITICAL STUDIES 3 s.h.

Theory, structure, politics, and problems of selected foreign governments are
analyzed from comparative point of view. Special emphasis on comparing and con-
trasting ideas and institutions with those of the U.S.

PS 673 REGIONAL POLITICAL STUDIES 3 s.h.

Examines structure and function of state, county, and municipal governments. Em-
phasizes understanding and analysis of problems faced by government at local levels.
Pennsylvania governmental forms are stressed and compared with those of other
states.

PS 674 ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES 3 s.h.

Exposes the student to approaches, methods, tools, focus, and boundary lines of
political science study. As a research methods course in graduate political science,
it should be scheduled early in program.

PS 681 SPECIAL TOPICS 1-3 S.h.

In-depth study of a specific problem or topic not regularly treated in courses. May
be repeated.

Programs and Courses —163
Political Science
Professional Growth
Psychology

PS 695 POLITICAL SCIENCE INTERNSHIP 3-6 s.h.

Practical experience in government and politics Students are individually assigned
to a cooperating local or state government agency, political party, or interest group,
or to a federal or international agency when arrangements can be made. Students
report periodically to professor in charge, and undertake reading assignments and
write such reports and papers as the professor may require. Prerequisite: (Vlust have
approval of instructor and department chairman.

PS 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 s.h.

Readings and written assignments on a specific topic determined by student and
instructor in charge. May be repeated.

PS 850 THESIS 3 s.h.

NOTE: No more than 50 per cent of credits counted toward graduate degree may
be in 500-level courses.

PROFESSIONAL GROWTH

The Professional Growth program leading to an MA, MS, or MEd is a
highly restricted and specially structured course of studies determined by
the student and his/her advisory committee. A four s.h. committee thesis
is required, as well as the course GR 615, Elements of Research. For fur-
ther information, write Professional Growth Degree, The Graduate School,
lUP, Indiana, PA 15705.

PSYCHOLOGY

The Psychology Department offers a Doctor of Psychology degree in
Clinical Psychology (Psy.D.) and Master of Arts degrees in Community
Psychology and Experimental Psychology. The Psy.D. includes specializa-
tions in such areas as Behavioral Medicine, Child, Assessment, Psycho-
therapy, and Community Systems. The program is designed to meet the
academic requirements of licensure and provide the background to im-
mediately assume responsibilities in appropriate professional settings. The
M.A. program in Community Psychology specializes in evaluation research
and organizational psychology and prepares students for a wide range of
positions in human services, government, and industry. The Master of Arts
in Experimental Psychology is offered only on an occasional basis when
a student's research interests closely match those of a faculty member.

The department also offers courses open to students in other graduate
programs in the Graduate School.

MASTER OF ARTS IN COMMUNITY PSYCHOLOGY

Admission

The following criteria are used to evaluate applicants: a) overall grade
point average and grades in psychology courses; b) GRE scores (500
minimum on quantitative portion of the aptitude test); c) statement of goals;
d) previous research and community experience; and, e) letters of
recommendation.

164 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

The deadline for receipt of all application materials is March 15. Late
applications will be considered if space permits.

Philosophy

The M.A. program provides training in the planning and development
of human service programs, program evaluation, and the implementation
of human service innovations. The skills obtained are applicable to a vari-
ety of local human service, government, and private industry settings. The
program is not a clinical/community program, and it does not provide direct
clinical "client contact" experience.

Curriculum

The M.A. Program in Community Psychology requires the completion
of 45 credits and takes approximately two years of full-time study to com-
plete. The minimum required courses are: PC 601 , PC 602, PC 603, PC 650,
PC 569 or PC 654, and Advanced Psychology Practicum (PC 675) for 9 to
12 credits. The remaining credits are taken as electives either in the Psy-
chology Department or in other departments in the University. Students are
expected to develop a content area specialty based on their electives and
practicum. In addition to coursework, students must complete a 6-credit
thesis.

Candidacy

After completion of 1 8 hours of graduate work at lUP including PC 601 ,
PC 602, PC 603, PC 650, and PC 569 or 654, the student must formally
apply for candidacy to the department's Community Program Committee
for admission to degree candidacy. For approval the applicant must have
attained at least a 3.0 QPA, have at least a B in each of the required courses
taken, present satisfactory scores on the GRE, and receive satisfactory
recommendations from faculty members familiar with his/her work.

Part-time Study

Applicants for part-time study are welcome. Upon acceptance, the part-
time student must prepare, in consultation with an advisory committee, a
program of study that will result in completion of degree requirements with-
in three years. With permission of the Community Program Committee, a
portion of the practicum requirement may be waived. In some circumstances
it may be possible for a student to receive practicum credit for his/her su-
pervised work while a student in the program.

DOCTORATE IN CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY

Admission to the Psy.D.

The following criteria are used in the evaluation of application materi-
als: (a) overall grade point average and grades in psychology courses (3.00
minimum in both areas); (b) scores on the Aptitude and Advanced sections
of the GRE (average of 500 on all sections); (c) training in research method-
ology; (d) prior clinical experience in practicum or employment; (e) the ap-
plicant's statement of goals; (f) letters of recommendation; and, (g) results
of a personal interview.

Programs and Courses - 165
Psychology

Breadth of undergraduate training is preferable to narrow specializa-
tion. Weaknesses in one area may be offset by strengths in another area,
although the Admissions Committee gives preference to applicants with some
demonstrated strengths in all areas. Students may be required to make up
deficiencies.

The deadline for receipt of all application materials is January 25. The
Admission Committee will then select a pool of qualified applicants who will
be invited to the campus for personal interviews. Announcements of final
admission decisions will be made around April 1.

Philosophy

The Psy.D. program follows a practitioner or applied model of training
of clinical psychologists. Emphasis is placed on professional applications
of psychology to a wide variety of human problems. Students receive ex-
tensive supervision in the development of skills in interpersonal relations,
psychological assessment, psychotherapy, community outreach and pro-
gram evaluation, and a solid grounding in the scientific knowledge base of
psychology.

Curriculum

The Psy.D. program is designed to be completed in three calendar years
of full-time study plus an additional year of full-time internship. The curricu-
lum requires a minimum of 93 semester hours of acceptable graduate credit.
Each student must complete requirements for: (a) core coursework; (b) spe-
cialty requirements; (c) Practicum, Internship and Professional Issues; (d)
Doctoral Project; (e) Comprehensive Academic and Professional Exam-
ination; and, (f) master's and doctoral candidacy. In addition, a course in
History and Systems in Psychology is required for graduation. This course
may be taken prior to or during enrollment.

A. Core Coursework.

The core courses are required of all students. These courses cover
several areas of Psychology and provide the foundation for professional
practice.

1 . Methods of Behavior Change: PC 630, PC 631 , PC 632, PC 633,
PC 634.

2. Methods of Assessment and Evaluation: PC 641 , PC 642, PC 643.

3. Research and Methodology: PC 601, PC 604.

4. Individual Differences: PC 635, PC 636, PC 637.

5. Physiological Bases of Behavior: PC 646, PC 647.

6. Community and Systems Level of Intervention: PC 603, PC 650.

B. Specialty Areas: 3 to 5 courses.

Examples of specialty areas are Behavioral Medicine, Child Clinical,
Assessment, Psychotherapy, Organizational/Industrial, or Community and
Systems. No more than two required courses may be counted in a specialty,
and courses from outside the Psychology Department may be included with
permission of the advisor.

166 -Indiana University of Pennsylvania

C. Practicum, Internship, and Professional Issues: (24 credits) PC 670,
PC 675, PC 676.

Students will typically register for practicum experience throughout their
program with sampling from diverse settings. During the final year a full-
time professional internship emphasizing depth and long-term involvement
will be required.

D. Doctoral Project: (9 credits) PC 950.

E. Comprehensive Academic and Professional Examination: no credit.

At the end of each year an evaluation of clinical and professional com-
petence will be made. This evaluation data will be shared with the student
as feedback, and a joint effort will be made to remediate any deficiencies.

Students must also pass a comprehensive examination over basic
knowledge appropriate for a professional psychologist. This examination will
cover material related to any of the core coursework areas. Students will
have options of questions within the content areas.

Satisfactory performance on both the comprehensive examination and
the professional evaluations must be achieved before candidacy for the doc-
torate will be recommended. Serious deficiencies may result in recommen-
dations for remedial work, re-examination, delay of candidacy, or termination
from the program.

F. Master's and Doctoral Candidacy.

Students will routinely obtain the Master's degree enroute to the doc-
torate. Requirements for candidacy to the MA degree are the successful
completion of 24 credits of approved graduate coursework with an average
of 3.00 GPA and the recommendation of the Clinical Training Committee
based on satisfactory academic and professional evaluations. The MA in
clinical psychology will be awarded after the successful completion of 54
semester hours and satisfactory annual academic and professional evalua-
tions. The 54 credits must include 9 hours of practicum and the core course-
work of the Psy.D. degree.

The candidacy for the Psy.D. will be awarded following the completion
of all MA requirements plus a minimum of an additional 9-15 credits, suc-
cessful performance on the comprehensive examination, and satisfactory
annual academic and professional evaluations. An average GPA of 3.00 is
required for candidacy.

G. Transfer of Graduate Credit.

Applicants who have completed graduate coursework at other institu-
tions may request transfer of credit. A maximum of 36 semester hours of
credit may be approved. A portion, but not all, of the practicum requirements
may be transferred for equivalent supervised experience.

H. Part-time Study and Residency.

Students must complete two semesters or one summer plus one se-
mester in sequence of full-time study to meet residency requirements. At
other times students may complete part-time studies. Part-time students must
complete a Plan of Study which will include a detailed semester-by-semester
outline of proposed coursework and completion dates for Comprehensive
Exams, Doctoral Project, and Internship. An average of 15 semester hours

Programs and Courses — 167
Psychology

of credit must be completed each year, and all requirements must be com-
pleted within seven years.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

PC 510 HISTORICAL TRENDS IN PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

Comprehensive overview of historical antecedents of contemporary psychology.
Prerequisite: Permission.

PC 554 DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 S.h.

A comprehensive study of human growth and development from conception to death.
Major research findings and developmental theories will be considered.

PC 556 THE PSYCHOLOGY OF PERSONALITY 3 s.h.

An overview of integration of the major theories of personality.

PC 557 ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

Theories of pathological behavior with reference to clinical and experimental data.

PC 558 SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

A scientific approach to the study of behavior and experience of individuals in re-
lation to other individuals, groups and culture.

PC 561 MOTIVATION 3 s.h.

A systematic study of how behavior is initiated, sustained, directed, and terminated.
Lab projects are conducted. Prerequisite: Permission.

PC 562 PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

The relationship between behavior and the anatomy and physiology of the nervous
system. Lab projects are conducted. Prerequisite: Permission.

PC 563 HUMAN COGNITION: PERCEPTION 3 s.h.

The interaction of sensory and cognitive events in production of awareness of the
world. Lab projects are conducted. Prerequisite: Permission.

PC 564 PSYCHOPHARMACOLOGY 3 s.h.

Survey of the theoretical and empirical foundations of psychopharmacology. Topics
include discussions of basic principles of pharmacology, theories of drug action, struc-
ture and function of the nervous system with special emphasis on current findings
on neurotransmitters and the site of action of psychoactive drugs. Prerequisite:
Permission.

PC 565 CONDITIONING AND LEARNING 3 s.h.

The focus is on animal research with discussion of classical and operant condi-
tioning, discrimination learning and aversive control of behavior. Lab projects are con-
ducted. Prerequisites: Courses in experimental psychology or permission.

PC 566 HUMAN COGNITION: MEMORY AND THINKING 3 s.h.

The methodology employed in areas of verbal learning and retention, encoding,

storage, and retrieval processes. Lab projects are conducted. Prerequisite: Permission.

PC 567 ANIMAL BEHAVIOR 3 s.h.

Behavior of various animal species and man are examined from the position of
evolution of behavior as adaptation to a changing ecology.

PC 569 INDUSTRIAL/ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

Study of psychological principles in an organizational setting of behavior, applica-
tion of psychological principles to individual behavior and experience in organizations.

168 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

PC 574 ADULT DEVELOPMENT AND AGING 3 s.h.

A review of theories and researcin which apply to young, middle, and later adult-
hood, with particular emphasis on old age.

PC 578 PSYCHOLOGY OF DEATH AND DYING 3 s.h.

Emphasizes the theories and research which delineate the psychological factors
affecting the dying person as well as those people close to someone who is dying.
Psychological, social and cognitive factors affecting one's attitude toward death and
approaches to coping with dying and death are studied. Prerequisite: Permission.

PC 581/681 SPECIAL TOPICS 3 s.h.

Designed to examine a special topic in depth. Students prepare presentations
representing selected research areas. Prerequisite; Permission.

PC 600 INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN COGNITION 3 s.h.

The methodology employed in areas of verbal learning and retention, encoding,

storage, and retrieval processes. Lab projects are conducted. Prerequisite: Permission.

PC 601 RESEARCH METHODS IN PSYCHOLOGY I 3 s.h.

The design, statistical analysis, and report of laboratory experiments will be studied.
Prerequisite: Permission.

PC 602 RESEARCH METHODS IN PSYCHOLOGY II 3 s.h.

An intuitive presentation of the methods, the use of computer programs, and ap-
plications of psychological research of selected multivariate techniques. Prerequi-
sites: PC 601 or equivalent familiarity with analysis of variance and correlation or
regression techniques.

PC 603 EVALUATION RESEARCH 3 s.h.

Introduction to the methodological issues involved in validly assessing the effec-
tiveness of intervention programs relevant to psychology (e.g., human service pro-
grams), including a consideration of how the results of evaluation research can be
used to improve such programs. Students will participate in either actual or simu-
lated evaluation research projects. Prerequisite: Permission, PC 601 or equivalent.

PC 604 CLINICAL RESEARCH METHODS 3 s.h.

Introduction to data analysis techniques and methodological problems commonly
encountered in clinical research. Methods appropriate for single subjects as well as
groups are explored. Prerequisites: PC 601, 641.

PC 630 METHODS OF INTERVENTION I 3 s.h.

Methods of studying and improving competency in interpersonal skills as a neces-
sary ingredient in most models of therapy, such as psychoanalysis, client centered,
and behavior modification. Emphasis placed on theory, research, and personal com-
petence in communication. Prerequisite: Permission.

PC 631 METHODS OF INTERVENTION II 3 s.h.

Emphasis is placed upon the systematic study and application of social influence
techniques to the modification of clinical problems. A broad spectrum of cognitive,
physiological and behavior change procedures are studied and evaluated with re-
gard to their cost and effectiveness. A general problem-solving model for decision
making, case evaluation, and accountability is advanced. Prerequisites: PC 630,
permission.

PC 632 PRINCIPLES OF BEHAVIOR MODIFICATION 3 s.h.

Applications of learning theory principles in changing maladaptive behavior both
on the individual and group units. Prerequisite: Permission.

Programs and Courses — 169
Psychology

PC 633 CLINICAL GROUP TECHNIQUES 3 s.h.

Provides instruction and experience in a variety of group techniques. Includes lec-
tures, demonstrations, and participation in group exercises useful in the clinical psy-
chology profession. Prerequisite: Permission.

PC 634 FAIVIILY THERAPY 3 s.h.

Introduction to family and marital therapy. Both system theory approaches and be-
havioral approaches will be considered. Process and outcome research will be
reviewed. Prerequisite; Permission.

PC 635 ADVANCED PSYCHOPATHOLOGY 3 s.h.

An in-depth study of the description, causes, and treatment of behaviors consid-
ered abnormal by our society. The course integrates and extends previous materials
in abnormal behavior, assessment, therapy, research methodology, and profession-
al practice. Prerequisites: Previous undergraduate course in Abnormal Psychology;
permission.

PC 636 PERSONALITY THEORY AND SYSTEMS

OF PSYCHOTHERAPY 3 s.h.

Several major personality theories are reviewed in a comparative manner with em-
phasis placed upon issues such as the assumptions about the basic nature of man,
personality development, normal and pathological development, and philosophy of
treatment for each theory. Prerequisite: Permission.

PC 637 ISSUES IN DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

The processes and structures of life span development are studied. Cognitive, emo-
tional, social and physical development will be explored emphasizing the interactive
effects of the person's environment, developmental level and psychological state.
Prerequisite: Permission.

PC 641 PSYCHOLOGICAL ASSESSMENT I 3 s.h.

Beginning course in theoretical issues and development of skills in assessing psy-
chological functioning and in report writing. Beginning emphasis on intellectual assess-
ment followed by the development of an increasing variety of assessment tools.
Prerequisite: Permission.

PC 642 PSYCHOLOGICAL ASSESSMENT II 3 s.h.

Continuation of PC 641 with increased emphasis on development of skills in areas
of objective and projective tests, behavioral observations, and self-report measures,
and other assessment techniques. Prerequisites: PC 641, permission.

PC 643 PSYCHOLOGICAL ASSESSMENT III 3 s.h.

Continuation of PC 642 with emphasis on non-traditional assessment methods such
as family observations, mental status rating, and social skills assessment. Topics in
clinical judgment and inferrence, combination of assessment data and report writing
are covered. Prerequisite: PC 642 or permission.

PC 646 DRUGS AND BEHAVIOR 3 s.h.

Introduction to various aspects of drugs and behavior. Includes exploration of fac-
tors influencing drug effects, problems in drug research, therapeutic use of drugs,
legal use and abuse of drugs and social aspects of drug experience. Prerequisite:
Permission.

PC 647 CLINICAL NEUROPSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

The study of the relationship between human brain dysfunction and abnormal be-
havior. Includes assessment techniques used to diagnose brain damage. Prerequi-
site: Permission.

170— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

PC 650 COMMUNITY PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

An introduction to community psychology as an ecological approach to the under-
standing and changing of behavior; an emphasis on prevention rather than treatment
of disorders, and a concern with the development of programs to deal with a wide
variety of human problems.

PC 651 PLANNED SOCIAL CHANGE 3 s.h.

Comparative evaluation of strategies for changing human behavior. Emphasis on
techniques which alter the environmental context in which the behavior occurs.

PC 652 ENVIRONMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

The relationship between human behavior and its environmental context. Empha-
sis on the role of physical and social environments in creating and perpetuating so-
cial problems.

PC 654 THEORY AND RESEARCH IN ORGANIZATIONAL

PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

The study of the effects of the work situation and of personal, interpersonal, and
structural variables upon individual behavior and experience in organizations. Prereq-
uisite: Industrial psychology or industrial sociology, introductory coursework in psy-
chology and in behavioral science statistics.

PC 660 CHILD CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

Approaches unique to child psychopathology, assessment and intervention are ex-
plored. Ages from birth to adolescence are covered. Prerequisite: PC 637 and PC 643
or permission.

PC 661 PSYCHOLOGY AND MEDICINE 3 s.h.

This course evaluates the clinical use of, and the experimental basis for, the use
of techniques derived from general psychology for the evaluation, prevention, manage-
ment, and treatment of health-related problems. The role of psychological and en-
vironmental variables in the development, maintenance, and recovery from physical
disease is studied. Prerequisite: Permission.

PC 662 BIOFEEDBACK PROCEDURES IN BEHAVIORAL MEDICINE 3 s.h.

Procedures used to help individuals increase voluntary control of physiological ac-
tivities are reviewed and evaluated as regards their clinical potential for treating a
variety of psychosomatic and somatopsychic illnesses. Theory and research from
the fields of medicine, biomedical engineering, psychophysiology, and cognitive-
behavior therapy are incorporated in developing therapeutic applications of Biofeed-
back Techniques. Prerequisite: Permission.

PC 670 PROFESSIONAL ISSUES 3 s.h.

An examination of professional problems in the field of clinical psychology. Includes
topics such as training philosophies; licensure; legal issues such as involuntary com-
mitment and expert witness; ethical standards; and professional organizations. Prereq-
uisite: Permission.

PC 675 ADVANCED PSYCHOLOGICAL PRACTICUM 1-18 s.h.

Provides supervised experience in applied settings. Prerequisite: Permission; vari-
able credit depending on setting.

PC 676 INTERNSHIP 3 S.h.

An in-depth supervised experience designed to assure a professional level of com-
petence in several skill areas and to assist in developing an identity as a health care
professional. May be taken full-time for 12 months or half-time for 24 months. Prereq-
uisite: Permission.

Programs and Courses —171
Psychology
Reading

PC 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN PSYCHOLOGY 1-6 s.h.

Individual students develop and conduct research studies in consultation with a
faculty member. Prerequisite: Permission.

PC 850 THESIS 1-6 s.h.

A supervised research project approved by a committee of faculty members. A thesis
proposal must be approved by the end of the third full semester of graduate work,
and the finished thesis must be defended within the following year. Enrolled as 3
s.h. during two semesters.

PC 950 DOCTORAL PROJECT (DISSERTATION) 3-9 s.h.

A culminating scholarly activity requiring the mastery of an area of professional
interest. It requires a review of relevant literature and the collection and analysis of
data. An oral presentation of the proposal and an oral defense of the finished project
are required.

Other Policies

The Psychology Department has established guidelines for the regis-
tration and completion of the thesis and doctoral project, transfer to another
concentration within the Psychology Department, academic good standing,
full-time student status, an appeals process, and other academic matters.
These guidelines are explained in the Psychology Graduate Student
Handbook.

READING

lUP provides and directs the formal learning experiences of the Read-
ing Specialist and Reading Supervisor at the graduate level. These learn-
ing experiences entail classroom and clinical instruction and field
experiences by faculty members who are sincere and dedicated to the stu-
dents and the programs. In addition, the faculty members represent a marked
balance with a variety of backgrounds and areas of expertise — reading,
elementary and secondary education, psychology and reading research.

Students seeking a Master of Education degree with a major in read-
ing and who desire certification as Reading Specialists are required to com-
plete a minimum of 36 s.h. of course work selected from the curriculum
designed for the preparation of Reading Specialists.

A student who wishes to secure reading specialist certification and does
not desire a Master of Education degree may do so by completing a mini-
mum of 24 s.h. of coursework. The program for each student will be formu-
lated based on the student's needs, educational experiences and teaching
experiences. All students who desire certification are required to either take
the required courses as outlined in Program for Reading Specialist or demon-
strate or document the competencies required in the program.

Criteria for final recommendation for certification of program enrollees
are as follows:

1 . Mastery of competencies determined through the use of oral and/or
written examination administered by Reading Faculty. Overall grade
point average of B; in both ED 602 and ED 603, a grade of B is re-
quired.

2. Recommendation of Reading faculty.

Graduate students may also earn a Doctorate in Elementary Education with
an emphasis in Reading.

172 -Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Procedures for Admission

An applicant nnust first be admitted to The Graduate School as a quali-
fied student. Upon receipt of an acceptance letter the Coordinator of the
Graduate Reading Program will send the applicant the necessary forms for
the Reading Program and the name of his/her adviser. Applicants may be
requested to report for an interview with the Reading Faculty.

Upon admission to the Reading Program, each student should arrange
to meet with his/her adviser to formulate an approved program of courses.

Acceptance into The Graduate School only permits a student to take
course work in a department. If a student wishes to become a degree can-
didate, he/she must complete the Application to Candidacy form and for-
ward this form to The Graduate School within the first 12 s.h. of course work
in the department.

MASTERS IN READING/READING SPECIALIST
PROGRAM

Certification Program: Courses

Students seeking certification as a Reading Specialist must complete
a minimum of twenty-four (24) semester hours or its equivalent.

A. Reading Required (15 s.h.)

(three s.h. each) ED 510, ED 600, ED 601, ED 602, ED 603.

B. Research — Required (3 s.h.)
ED 698 or EL 680.

C. Related Area — Select One (3 s.h.)

EP 604, EP 673, EP 676, EP 678, EP 680, CE 629, CE 639, EX 631.

D. Electives — Select One (3 s.h.)

ED 508, ED 605, ED 607, ED 620, ED 696, ED 697, EL 644, EL 647,
EL 648, EL 655, EN 631, EX 631, EX 665, EX 666.

Students who wish a Master's Degree in Reading must complete twelve
(12) additional credits from the following areas:

E. Research — Required (3 s.h.)
GR 615.

F. Humanistic Studies - Select One (3 s.h.)
FE 611, FE 612, FE 613, FE 614.

G. Electives — Select Two (6 s.h.)
Refer to Category D

If thesis option is selected, minimum is 5 s.h.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

A student with previous graduate work, vast educational experience
and/or six- to nine-credit hours in undergraduate courses in reading may
opt to challenge Education 600. When this is done successfully the student
seeking certification only may 1) waive that requirement, or 2) pay for the

Programs and Courses —173
Reading

course and have the credits recorded on his/her transcript. Students seek-
ing a Master's Degree will substitute another three-credit course in reading
to meet the 36-hour requirennent for a Master's Degree at lUP.

READING SUPERVISOR

Students may pursue the Reading Supervisor's Program by selecting
courses from the following sequence of courses. Students must have a Mas-
ter of Education Degree and certification as a reading specialist. Before com-
pletion of the program students must have had five years teaching experience
in the area of reading to be eligible for the supervisor's certificate.

CERTIFICATION PROGRAM (18 semester hours) (12 semester hours re-
quired classes)

A. Required Courses: EL 631; EL 653; ED 670; EP 662 or CE 629.

B. Electives: (Select Two) ED 604; ED 605; ED 620; ED 699; ED 697; EL 632;
EL 644; CE 645; EL 652.

For description of EL courses, see section on ELEMENTARY EDUCA-
TION; for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE courses,
COUNSELOR EDUCATION.

DOCTORAL DEGREE IN ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
WITH EMPHASIS ON READING

Graduate students who are interested in working for a Doctorate in
Elementary Education with an emphasis in Reading may choose one of three
options.
Option 1

Emphasis in Reading which will lead to certification as a Reading Super-
visor. (This pre-supposes that the candidate will have Reading Specialist
certification.)

Option 2

Emphasis in Reading which will lead to certification as a Reading
Specialist.

Option 3

Emphasis in Reading which does not involve certification; for this pro-
gram students will be expected to take 15-21 hours in "Reading electives."

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

ED 508 READING IN THE CONTENT AREAS 3 s.h.

Provides techniques for reading specialists to work with teachers in both elemen-
tary and secondary schools for developing competencies in subject matter areas as
part of the regular classroom instruction. Open, also, to classroom teachers-
elementary and secondary levels.

ED 510 THE TEACHING OF READING IN THE

SECONDARY SCHOOL 3 s.h.

Emphases include reading improvement practices with developmental, corrective
and remedial readers in the middle, junior and senior high schools. Attention to both
college, preparatory students and those needing survival skills as well as to work
with related professional personnel. A mini-practicum in developmental reading is
included.

174 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

ED 600 BASIC FOUNDATIONS OF READING INSTRUCTION 3 s.h.

Emphases on nature of reading process; nature of learner; advancement of pupil's
reading skills; how pupil learns to read; what teacher can do when pupils fail to learn
to read.

ED 601 DIAGNOSIS AND REMEDIATION OF READING

DISABILITIES 3 s.h.

Students will appraise reading difficulties of individuals with emphases on general
principles and types of diagnosis appropriate to classroom and clinic. Examination
and administration of diagnostic instruments as well as methods and materials used
in remediation at the elementary and secondary level will be discussed and demon-
strated. Prerequisite: ED 600 (applied to Reading majors only.)

ED 602 READING PRACTICUM; DIAGNOSTIC CASE STUDIES

(Clinical Experience I) 3 s.h.

Students will administer and interpret a battery of diagnostic instruments, both formal
and informal, to a small group of children. Emphasis will be placed on interview and
observation techniques as well as diagnostic teaching. A needs assessment for each
child will be completed. All work will be done under the supervision of the Reading
Specialist Program faculty. Prerequisites: ED 600, ED 601, and ED 510.

ED 603 READING PRACTICUM: REMEDIAL CASE STUDIES

(Clinical Experience II) 3 s.h.

Students will complete an in-depth needs assessment as well as design and im-
plement a remedial program for a small group of children. Emphasis will be placed
on the application of specialized remedial techniques. All work will be done under
the supervision of Reading Specialist Program faculty. Prerequisites: ED 600, ED 601,
ED 510, and ED 602.

ED 604 REMEDIATION OF SEVERE READING

DISABILITY CASES 3 s.h.

Analysis and treatment of severely disabled readers under the supervision of spe-
cially prepared University personnel. Prerequisite: Permission of Coordinator.

ED 605 ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION OF

READING PROGRAMS 3 s.h.

Emphasis on patterns of organization, approaches to instruction and use of appro-
priate materials which can be adopted to operation of a total school reading program
in meeting individual, group and special needs of students.

ED 607 INSTRUCTION MATERIALS IN READING FOR

CHILDREN AND YOUTH 3 s.h.

Designed to guide teachers, librarians, principals, reading specialists, and other

curriculum workers in viable choices of appropriate materials for reading instruction.

ED p20 READING INSTRUCTION FOR THE

CULTURALLY DISADVANTAGED 3 s.h.

Emphasizes the sociological, psychological, linguistic, and educational variables
that affect the disadvantaged reader.

ED 670 PRACTICUM AND SEMINAR FOR

READING SUPERVISORS 3 s.h.

A supervised field experience relevant to the duties of the reading supervisor in
elementary and secondary schools, provides students the opportunity to translate
theory into practice. Prerequisite: Permission of Coordinator.

ED 697 SEMINAR IN SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN READING 3 s.h.

Topics such as reading disability, preschool reading instruction and adult literacy
programs will be covered.

Programs and Courses — 1 75
Reading
Safety Sciences

ED 698 RESEARCH SEMINAR IN READING 3 s.h.

Designed to insure that students be able to read and understand reading research
and statistical applications related to the field of reading. Students will interpret "t"
test, AOV, repeated measures and correlations. Emphasis on application and under-
standing of statistical information and not solving mathematical formulas.

ED 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN READING EDUCATION 1-3 s.h.

The student with cooperation of the reading faculty member with whom he/she ex-
pects to work and his/her reading faculty adviser, engages in a study individually
or with a small group on some problem or field not clearly defined in existing courses.
Prerequisite: Permission of Coordinator.

SAFETY SCIENCES

The Department of Safety Sciences offers a program of studies lead-
ing to a Master of Science degree in Safety Science. A thesis or non-thesis
curriculum is available.

Students have the opportunity to choose from a wide selection of course
offerings or select a specialized area. In addition, students may choose elec-
tive courses, with approval of advisor, in fields directly related to Safety
Sciences. The program is designed for individuals with relevant experience
in Safety Sciences and those with appropriate undergraduate preparation
who are interested in pursuing careers in the profession.

Department Admission Requirements

In addition to meeting the requirements for admission to the Graduate
School, a student intending to work toward a Master of Science in Safety
Sciences will be required to have the following prerequisite professional
preparation:

Entry level competency in the four (4) subdisciplines; Safety
Management, Occupational Safety, Occupational Health, and Fire
Protection through relevant education, documented work ex-
perience, certifications or other means acceptable to the Safety
Sciences Graduate Committee.

Relevant education would include the student's undergraduate
preparation which, in general, shall include a minimum of six (6)
semester hour credits in each of the following:

Safety Chemistry

Occupational Health Physics

Management Studies Mathematics

In addition, three (3) semester hour credits shall be required in fire
protection.

Where the Safety Sciences Graduate Committee determines that a defi-
ciency in work experience or relevant education exists, a student will be
required to complete additional studies to eliminate the deficiency.

176 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN SAFETY SCIENCES

All students are required to take a total of 36 hours of which 18 hours
are core courses. The core courses are SA 601 , SA 602, SA 603, SA 604,
SA 605, and SA 606. The student must choose the remaining 18 hours in
a specialized or generalized option. Students may choose between a thesis
or non-thesis curriculum.

Degree Requirements (Thesis) — For the additional 18 required hours
3-6 of these may consist of a thesis. Students in a specialized option must
complete a minimum of six-nine hours (not including thesis) in courses
offered by the Safety Sciences Department, plus 6 hours of electives ap-
proved by the student's advisor. Students pursuing the generalized option
must complete a minimum of 12 hours of Safety Science graduate course-
work (one three-hour course in each subdiscipline). The remaining hours
consist of electives which must be approved by the student's advisor.

Degree Requirements (Non-thesis)— Of the additional 18 required hours,
students enrolled in the specialized option must complete six hours of Safety
Sciences courses in one chosen subdiscipline. In addition, twelve hours of
approved electives must be completed. Students pursuing the generalized
option must complete twelve hours of Safety Sciences courses (one three-
hour course in each subdiscipline) and six hours of approved electives.

COURSE DESCRIPTION

SA541 ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION 3 s.h.

Focuses on the various aspects of accident investigation such as recent theories
associated with accident causes, investigative techniques, data acquisition, struc-
ture of investigative reports, management responsibilities and remedial actions. Par-
ticular emphasis is placed on determining sequence of events to develop management
actions which will prevent recurrence of accidents. Prerequisites: Junior Standing.

SA561 AIR POLLUTION 3 s.h.

Focuses on the various major aspects of the air pollution problem. These include
sources of pollution, evaluation and engineering control of pollutants, government
regulations, atmospheric chemistry and dispersion, and human and non-human ef-
fects. Particular emphasis is placed on information that is practical for the Safety
Sciences and Industrial Health professionals. Prerequisites: CH 101 and 102 or equiva-
lent and SA 301 or equivalent courses, and junior standing; or permission of the in-
structor.

SA562 RADIOLOGICAL HEALTH 3 s.h.

This course involves the study of problems associated with ionizing radiation in
the human environment. Emphasis is given to biological effects, radiation measure-
ment, dose computational techniques, exposure control, and local and federal regu-
lations. The study and use of various radiological instruments is included. Prerequisites:
SA 301, PY 111, PY 112, and junior standing; or permission of the instructor.

SA581 SPECIAL TOPICS 3 s.h.

A dual level elective offering in which the specific topic may vary from one term
to the next. Prerequisites: Permission of the instructor.

Programs and Courses — 1 77
Safety Sciences

SA 601 CONCEPTS OF RISK ASSESSMENT 3 s.h.

The concept of risk is implicit in every justification for hazard control measures
and is an important criterion in the evaluation of hazards. This course provides defi-
nitions and methods for risk measurement in various contexts. Rationale are devel-
oped for establishing acceptable risk levels, and for safety management decision
making.

SA 602 QUANTITATIVE METHODS IN SAFETY MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

The objective of this course is to prepare individuals for the conduct of research
in safety and its numerous subspecialties. Research paradigms, experimental de-
sign, data sources and collection, and statistical methods are covered in detail. The
emphasis throughout is on quantitative approaches likely to produce valid new knowl-
edge in the discipline of safety management. Prerequisites: SA 345 and MA 217 or
permission of the instructor.

SA 603 HUMAN RELATIONS IN SAFETY MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

Integrates various behavioral science theories into the practice of safety manage-
ment. Areas covered are motivation, communications, managerial interactions, and
controlling worker behavior as they relate to accident causation. Prerequisites: PC 101
and MG 642 or permission of the instructor.

SA 604 INDUSTRIAL TOXICOLOGY 3 s.h.

Principles and techniques for evaluating toxicological properties of chemical sub-
stances are studied with particular emphasis on extrapolation of information to de-
termine permissible exposure limits in the workplace. The student is acquainted with
requirements for operating an animal toxicology facility as well as means of obtain-
ing relevant human experience data. Prerequisites: CH 101, CH 102, MA 21 7 or per-
mission of the instructor.

SA 605 ADVANCED PRINCIPLES OF SAFETY ENGINEERING 3 s.h.

This course prepares the student with a fundamental understanding of those haz-
ards which can contribute to accidental injury and damage. These hazards are studied
in an engineering context and their physical and chemical characteristics are studied
in depth in order to make the appropriate hazard control measures better understood.
Prerequisites: SA 111, SA 211, PY 112; or permission of the instructor.

SA 606 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

This course offers the student a logical approach to the problem of hazardous materi-
als management. Emphasis is placed on legislative controls that industry must com-
ply with in the shipping, storing, use, and disposal of hazardous materials. Program
development in hazardous materials management is covered in detail. Prerequisites:
SA 311, CH 101, CH 102 or permission of the instructor.

SA 620 SAFETY DATA MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

Covered are: design of loss incident source documents and code dictionaries; proce-
dures to collect accident cost and cause data; accident cause analysis; and data for
management accountability and decision making. Prerequisites: SA 412 and FS 241
or permission of the instructor.

SA 623 ADVANCED SAFETY ADMINISTRATION 3 s.h.

Analyzes the management structure for its procedures, organizations, policies,
departmental competencies as they relate to safety. Ways to audit and improve
management's safety effectiveness are covered. Prerequisites: SA 412, FS 360, or
permission of the instructor.

178- Indiana University of Pennsylvania

SA 642 ADVANCED MINE SAFETY ENGINEERING 3 s.h.

Provides an understanding of advanced subjects concerned vj'Wh mine health and
safety. Details the cost-benefit analysis of each phase of the mineral industry and
the design features of various mining operations of the United States. Prerequisites:
SA 232, SA 401, or permission of the instructor.

SA 643 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY 3 s.h.

This course provides an in-depth treatment of hazard recognition, evaluation, and
control principles used in the construction industry. Extensive coverage of federal
standards is given together with the means by which a construction safety program
can be developed and administered. Prerequisites: SA 21 1 , or permission of the in-
structor.

SA 663 INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE LABORATORY METHODS 3 s.h.

Laboratory methods germane to Industrial hygiene sampling and analytical methods
are studied in depth. The student is introduced to a variety of laboratory procedures
as well as biological monitoring. Sampling and analytical statistics are also empha-
sized. Prerequisites: SA 302, SA 303, or permission of the instructor.

SA 681 SPECIAL TOPICS 3 s.h.

A graduate-only elective offering in which the specific topic may vary from one term
to the next. Prerequisites: Permission of the instructor.

SA 682 CHEMICAL PROCESS SAFETY 3 S.h.

This course is designed to cover all important aspects of loss prevention as it is
practiced in the chemical process industries. Its objective is to prepare the safety
professional so that he/she may be able to work more effectively with chemists and
chemical engineers in joint hazard identification, evaluation, and control projects.
Prerequisites: SA 301, SA 311, and SA 345 or permission of the instructor.

SA 683 DISASTER PREPAREDNESS 3 s.h.

Principles and techniques for preparing for various types of disasters. The students
are acquainted with requirements necessary to develop workable plans for natural
and industrial type of disasters. Preventative loss measures are discussed directed
toward preservation of organization resources. Prerequisites: SA 311 or equivalent
or permission of the instructor.

SA 684 FIRE SAFETY IN BUILDING DESIGN 3 s.h.

The student is provided with the necessary concepts and principles for the safe
design of buildings from a fire hazard standpoint. Emphasis is given to the adequate
understanding of fire properties as they influence selection of materials for construc-
tion, fire prevention facilities, and fire suppression considerations. Prerequisites:
SA 311 or equivalent or permission of the instructor.

SA699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 3 s.h.

Study in depth of a topic not available through other course work. Student works
with supervising faculty member on carefully planned, student initiated project. Prior
approval is necessary. Prerequisites: Permission of the instructor.

SA 850 THESIS 3 s.h.

The thesis will require a committee review with one faculty member serving as the
students' advisor. The committee will also include two additional faculty members
and a representative of the Dean of the College of Health Sciences. Prerequisites:
Permission of the instructor.

Programs and Courses — 1 79
Safety Sciences
Science for the Elennentary School Teacher

SCIENCE FOR THE
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL TEACHER

The program leading to a Master of Education Degree in Elementary
Science is designed to give elementary teachers depth and competency in
the content areas of the physical, biological and earth sciences. The as-
semblage of courses cited below should prepare the student for work as
an Elementary Science resource person within his/her school or school dis-
trict. Except for GR 615, GS 602, and GS 561 all of these courses are not
open to majors in Biology, Chemistry, or Physics.

Following admission to The Graduate School, each candidate will be
assigned an adviser who will assist the student in planning an approved
program of courses.

MASTER OF EDUCATION

IN ELEMENTARY SCIENCE

This program is not intended for certification in science at the secon-
dary level. It is designed to provide the elementary teacher with an opportu-
nity to increase his/her ability to teach science at the elementary level.
Students working for this degree with a major in Elementary Science will
complete 30 s.h. of work in accordance with the following divisions if a thesis
is completed. If no thesis is selected, 33 s.h. must be completed.

I. Professional Development Area (nine s.h.)

A. Humanistic Studies (three s.h.)— One of the following: FE 61 1 , FE 612,
FE 613, or FE 514.

B. Behavioral Studies (three s.h.)-One of the following: EP 604, EP 573,
EP 576, EP 578, EP 5. '3, CE 629, CE 639, EX 631 , EX 638, or EX 664.

C. Research (three s.h.)

GR 615 Elements of Research

II. Specialization Core— (six s.h.)

III. Subject Area and/or thesis— (15-18 s.h.)

Subject Matter Concentration Area- 15-1 8 s.h. of work in subject mat-
ter content are to be selected from the following courses except that a
more advanced course may be required by the adviser if the background
of the student warrants: ES 610-61 1 , ES 630, ES 640, ES 650, ES 660,
ES 664, ES 666, ES 674, ES 680, ES 688, ES 692, GS 602, GS 561,
EM 651, Ml 500.

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF EDU-
CATION, for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE courses,
COUNSELOR EDUCATION; for EX courses, SPECIAL EDUCATION; for GS
courses, GEOSCIENCE; for Bl and Ml courses, BIOLOGY; for EM courses,
MATHEMATICS FOR ELEMENTARY SCHOOL TEACHER.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

180— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

ES 610 EDUCATION IN THE OUT-OF-DOORS 3 s.h.

Specifically designed to teach the elementary teacher to coordinate all of the elemen-
tary subjects into lessons taught in the out-of-doors that cannot ordinarily be taught
in the classroom. (Summers only.)

ES 611 EDUCATION IN THE OUT-OF-DOORS 3 s.h.

ES 630 QUANTITATIVE TOOLS FOR EL. SCIENCE 3 S.h.

Proficiency in quantitative aspects of science. Emphasis on practical problem solving
related to typical lab data. Instruments, instrument calibration, graphing, and graph
interpretation (interpolation and extrapolation). Area under the curve idea and meaning
of slope on a graph will be explored extensively. Concentrated instruction in use of
computers, use of logarithms and significant figures as tools to achieve above ob-
jectives. (Wolfe)

ES 640 CHEMISTRY IN ELEMENTARY SCIENCE EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Principles of chemistry through lab and/or field-centered experiences relevant to
teaching chemistry in elementary school. Recommended for all elementary educa-
tion majors. (Zambotti)

ES 650 PHYSICS IN ELEMENTARY SCIENCE EDUCATION 3 S.h.

Development of basic concepts in physics on a quantitatively plausible basis ap-
propriate for elementary science. Lab work is designed to develop an understanding
of force, work, and energy, and conservation of energy in mechanical thermal and
electrical systems. Operational definitions and formulation and use of physical models.
(Riban)

ES 660 BOTANY IN ELEMENTARY SCIENCE EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Introduction to anatomy and life processes of plant cells, tissues, and organs. Con-
sideration to selected algae, bacteria, fungi, mosses, ferns and their allies and seed
plants. Recognition of groups of local plants, their economic importance and health
implications are emphasized. Lab studies will include practical uses of plants. (Schrock)

ES 664 ZOOLOGY IN ELEMENTARY SCIENCE EDUCATION 3 s.h.

A lab and field study which surveys principles and theory of zoological taxonomy
and study of representative invertebrate and vertebrate taxa. Emphasis on freshwater
and terrestrial forms which may be observed or collected in Western Pennsylvania.
Homologous structures are compared and their functions are studied. Principles of
embryology, genetics and animal behavior are introduced. (Merritt)

ES 666 CONSERVATION IN ELEMENTARY SCIENCE EDUCATION 3 s.h.

A new concept in conservation-corrective and preventive conservation for man's
survival. Problems of pollution and population are central theme. Field work is re-
quired. (Ferrence)

ES 674 METEOROLOGY IN ELEMENTARY SCIENCE EDUCATION 3 s.h.

A descriptive analysis of fundamentals of weather, including: composition and struc-
ture of atmosphere, radiation, heat budget, cloud and rain physics, circulation pat-
terns, storm structures, air pollution, and biometeorology. Familiarization with weather
instruments, maps and records, as well as activities applicable to elementary science.
(Prince)

Programs and Courses —181
Science for the Elementary School Teacher
Social Science

ES 680 ASTRONOMY IN ELEMENTARY SCIENCE EDUCATION 3 s.h.

A descriptive and qualitative study of stellar and solar system astronomy including
telescopes and space travel at a level adaptable to the elementary school classroom
and techniques for their presentation. Three hours lecture and/or lab. (Sutton)

ES 688 FIELD NATURAL HISTORY OF WESTERN PA. 3 s.h.

Bus and automobile travel throughout Western Pennsylvania. Places of interest
in ecology, geology, conservation, and nature study will be visited. Offered in pre-
or post-session only. Travel may require the student to be away from campus for sever-
al days at a time. A travel assessment based upon needs will be made. (Ferrence)

ES 692 ELEMENTARY SCIENCE CURRICULUM 3 s.h.

Various approaches to teaching of elementary science and bases for these ap-
proaches. New curricula being used in elementary schools will be examined and
critiqued. (Moore)

SOCIAL SCIENCE

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN SOCIAL SCIENCE

The Master of Education degree in Social Science is designed to give
secondary teachers greater depth and competency in the subject matter,
methodology and research techniques of the social sciences.

Each student admitted to The Graduate School will be assigned an ad-
viser in the Social Science Division. All courses must be approved by the
adviser.

Students working for this degree have two options for completing the
program: (1) 30 s.h. of work, with thesis, in accordance with the MEd pro-
gram requirements described earlier in this catalog; (2) 36 s.h. of work with
no thesis. Courses in subject matter concentration must be elected in three
of five social sciences (Economics, Geography, History, Political Science,
Sociology/Anthropology). See course listings in this catalog under each of
those headings.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

SS 581 SPECIAL TOPICS: FOREIGN STUDY 1-6 s.h.

Directed foreign study that involves travel and observation outside the United States.
Areas visited and itineraries vary from year to year. Background reading, lectures
and briefings, diary or evaluative paper is required. In past years, Argentina, India,
the Soviet Union and countries of Western Europe have been tour destinations. For
details on projected tours, direct inquiries to Director, Center for International Studies.

SS 610 NEW APPROACHES IN SOCIAL SCIENCE INSTRUCTION 3 s.h.

Develop innovative curriculum materials by applying concepts from the latest re-
search in the behavioral and social sciences. Plan strategies for use of such materi-
als in the classroom. Explore the methods available for analyzing the teaching process.

SS 614 RESEARCH METHODOLOGIES IN THE

SOCIAL SCIENCES 3 s.h.

Techniques of locating and using source materials, evaluation of evidence, organi-
zation of tested data, and exposition of tested data according to approved forms are
discussed. Methodologies of value to students in various disciplines of social sciences
are explored.

182— Indiana University of Pennsylvania

SS 680 SOCIAL SCIENCE SEMINAR 3 s.h.

Research in methodology of social science in the secondary schools. Restricted
to MEd candidates. Prerequisite: GR 615.

SS 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 s.h.

Independent research and study under faculty direction. Interested students should
apply to director of graduate studies.

SOCIOLOGY

Sociology is the study of society and human social relationships. Ad-
vanced training in sociology should enable the student to think critically and
reflectively about the social world and to be able to use the knowledge ac-
quired in a variety of ways: Sociology is relevant to a number of careers.
Many students plan to affiliate themselves with professional social service,
governmental, or research organizations, while other students pursue aca-
demic sociological careers. The MA program in Sociology is designed to
serve these various needs and interests of students.

MASTER OF ARTS IN SOCIOLOGY

In addition to graduate school admission requirements, the student
should have completed at least 12 hours of undergraduate sociology courses
with an average grade of B or better. In individual cases the department
may allow a promising student to enter the program with deficiencies. Such
deficiencies must be made up by taking specific courses at the discretion
of the department in addition to the required total number of course hours.

All MA students are required to complete the two basic core require-
ments: SO 664 Research Seminar in Sociology, and SO 667 Contemporary
Sociological Theory. Beyond the completion of these two courses, the MA
in Sociology allows the student two options:

Thesis Option: In addition to the two core courses, students will com-
plete an additional 1 8 s.h. of coursework (1 2 s.h. of which must be in sociol-
ogy) and a six s.h. thesis (SO 850).

Non-Thesis Option: In addition to the two core courses, students will
complete an additional 30 s.h. of coursework (21 s.h. of which must be in
sociology).

Students planning further academic work in sociology may find the thesis
option most helpful, while those going on to community-related work might
find the non-thesis option most beneficial. Specific programs of study are
planned by student and assigned faculty adviser when the student enters
the program. Students may later alter their program of studies in consulta-
tion with their advisers. Such flexibility in structuring the curriculum, we be-
lieve, will best serve students.

No more than one-third of a student's work toward the MA may be in
dual-level (500) courses. Therefore, those selecting the thesis option are
limited to nine s.h. of dual-level coursework, while those selecting the non-
thesis option will be permitted no more than 12 s.h. of dual-level course-
work. Furthermore, students who enrolled for dual-level courses while under-
graduates at lUP may not repeat the same courses for credit as graduate
students.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

Programs and Courses — 783
Sociology

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

so 522 CULTURE AND PERSONALITY 3 s.h.

Study of personality traits unique to prescribed cultural or institutional settings Sub-
ject matter includes socialization, emotional expression, kinesics, deviant roles, cul-
tural aspects of mental disturbance, and value orientation. Some attention given to
research methods employed in the discipline.

SO 534 POPULATION PROBLEMS 3 s.h.

Major forces of population change examined. Problems of excessive population
growth rates outside of U.S. and declining growth rates in U.S. analyzed. Threats
to ecological stability discussed.

SO 542 SOCIAL AND CULTURAL ASPECTS OF

HEALTH AND MEDICINE 3 s.h.

Review of fields of medical sociology and anthropology: Focuses on such topics
as social background of illness, folk medicine, cultural differences in perceptions of
health, and social organization of health facilities.

SO 543 DEVELOPMENT OF SOCIAL THEORY 3 s.h.

Examination of historical development of social theory with special attention to the
classical theorists and theoretical ideas which have contributed most significantly
to modern sociology.

SO 557 SOCIOLOGY OF AGING 3 s.h.

Introduction to various problems faced in the process of growing older. Attitudes
of society toward elderly and social and cultural impact of an aging U.S. population
examined.

SO 559 THE DEVELOPMENT OF SOCIAL SERVICES 3 s.h.

Examination of genesis and implementation of health, welfare, and employment

policy with particular reference to who benefits from such policy and who does not.

SO 581 SPECIAL TOPICS SEMINAR IN SOCIOLOGY 3-6 s.h.

See 681 for course description.

SO 654 SOCIAL INEOUALITY 3 s.h.

Examines central theoretical perspectives on inequality. Considers such topics as
nature of social classes and inequality in the U.S. characteristics of working class,
poor, and super-rich, and sexual inequality.

SO 656 SOCIAL CHANGE 3 s.h

Explores nature and consequences of social change, types of changes individuals
might want in U.S. and how these might be implemented. Also discusses lessons
to be learned from various social change efforts.

SO 660 SOCIOLOGY OF POWER 3 s.h.

Examines social power of groups and classes with particular emphasis on the
sources of power and the ways in which power is exerted.

SO 662 THE SOCIOLOGY OF DEVIANCE 3 s.h.

Relationship between individual deviance and social and cultural factors examined.
How different groups set limits for acceptable behavior analyzed in comparative and
historical context.

SO 663 ISSUES IN RACIAL INEQUALITY 3 s.h.

Focuses on current situation of minorities in U.S. Efforts to improve conditions for
minorities in employment, housing, education, and police protection receive special
attention.

184 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

SO 664 RESEARCH SEMINAR IN SOCIOLOGY 3 s.h.

Examination of diverse research designs in the social sciences. Focuses on under-
standing and critique of designs and on integration of theory and research. Special
attention given to development of thesis proposal. Required for MA in Sociology.

SO 667 CONTEMPORARY SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY 3 s.h.

Examination of major systems of sociological theory and major theoretical controver-
sies vying for attention in contemporary sociology. Emphasis given to theories in mac-
rosociology, especially functionalism, neo-Marxian conflict theory, and societal
evolutionism. Required for MA in Sociology.

SO 674 COMPARATIVE URBAN STUDIES 3 s.h.

Reviews sociological analysis of urbanism and urbanization. Grov\rth and problems
of cities investigated and comparative approach stressed throughout. Various research
methods and theoretical orientations considered.

SO 676 COMPARATIVE MACROSOCIOLOGY 3 s.h.

Detailed comparative analysis of major institutional features of entire range of hu-
man societies, from band and tribal, through agrarian, to industrial societies. Course
organized in an historical or evolutionary framework. Seeks basic theoretical under-
standing of forces responsible for organization and transformation of human societies.

SO 681-581 SPECIAL TOPICS SEMINAR IN SOCIOLOGY 3-6 s.h.

Seminar focuses on specialized areas in the discipline not covered by regular
courses. Students will do extensive reading in the area. Course may be repeated
under different subtitles.

SO 690 READINGS IN SOCIOLOGY 3 s.h.

Students report and develop extensive bibliographies on assigned readings for depth
understanding of a specific sociological concept, process, or problem.

SO 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN SOCIOLOGY 1-3 s.h.

Students wishing to specialize beyond course-work are encouraged to work on a
one-to-one basis with faculty members in independent study. Students may elect up
to a total of six s.h. of independent study.

SPECIAL EDUCATION AND CLINICAL SERVICES

This Department offers a graduate program leading to the Master of
Education Degree in Education of Exceptional Children or in Speech Pathol-
ogy. The Department also offers the Master of Science degree in Excep-
tionality or in Speech Pathology. A graduate level of competency in these
major areas is in accord with national standards now emphasized by profes-
sional organizations such as the Council for Exceptional Children and the
American Speech and Hearing Association.

The MEd degree requires a course in Foundations of Education and
practicum experiences in appropriate settings. The Master of Science de-
gree is based upon an individual program which integrates academic as
well as practicum experience with selected community agencies. For de-
tails on the supervisory certificate, applicants should contact the department
chairperson.

Programs and Courses —185
Sociology
Special Education and Clinical Services

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN EDUCATION

OF EXCEPTIONAL CHILDREN

This graduate program offers majors Master of Education options in
one of the following areas of concentration: (1) Mentally Retarded, (2) Emo-
tionally Disturbed, (3) Learning Disabled, (4) Gifted/Talented. As a prereq-
uisite for completion of the MEd degree, the first three major options require
Pennsylvania comprehensive teaching certification in Education of Mental-
ly and/or Physically Handicapped. Candidates with teaching certification in
other fields will be required to complete additional semester hours toward
such certification, depending on individual background. The fourth concen-
tration area requires Pennsylvania teaching certification in an elementary
or secondary field.

All four concentration areas require nine s.h. in Professional Develop-
ment selected from the approved list, including three s.h. in Foundations
of Education, three s.h. selected from the course list in Behavioral Studies,
and three s.h. in Research (GR 615). All four concentration areas also re-
quire six s.h. in Specialization Core, including EX 640 for the first three areas,
as well as the specialization courses in each area: EX 623 for the Mentally
Retarded, EX 665 for the Emotionally Disturbed, EX 666 for the Learning
Disabled, and EX 664 for the Gifted/Talented.

All four concentration areas require a minimum of 21 s.h. in Subject
Area course work unless the thesis option is selected. Advisement is re-
quired for course selection, and workshops are not to be considered ap-
plicable for degree requirements.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN EXCEPTIONALITY

Professional training is provided for those who wish to gain competen-
cies for working with mentally and/or physically handicapped adults and their
families in the community or in various agencies and organizations. Adviser
recommendation should be obtained prior to enrollment. Course selection
and degree candidacy is based upon individual background and employ-
ment goals. Candidates for the Master of Science degree will select a mini-
mum of 21 s.h. in Subject Matter Concentration including six s.h. in EX 685
Practicum, EX 522, EX 630, EX 631 , and PC 640 or EX 645. They will also
complete a minimum of three s.h. in GR 61 5 Elements of Research as well
as three to six hours of Interrelated Study selected according to student
needs.

For description of PC course, see section on PSYCHOLOGY.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

186 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

EX 500 EDUCATION OF EXCEPTIONAL CHILDREN IN

REGULAR CLASSES 3 s.h.

Intended for graduate students who are teaching regular classes, and other school
personnel who do not have a background of formal course work in the general area
of exceptionality. Included will be specific vocabulary and etiology of handicapping
conditions as they relate to regular class teachers in understanding the nature of prob-
lems. Concepts of mainstreaming and resource room teaching will be included.

EX 524 LEARNING DISABILITIES AND THE

LANGUAGE PROCESSES 3 s.h.

Designed for students pursuing the concentration in learning disabilities. Skills are
taught to help the student evaluate learning disabled children, with a major empha-
sis on language processes.

EX 530 PHYSICAL DISABILITIES AND

PSYCHOLOGICAL HANDICAPS 3 s.h.

Principles and practices in rehabilitation, with attention to contributions of teachers,
counselors, nurses, social workers, psychologists, speech therapists, and other profes-
sional workers.

EX 557 SEVERE AND PROFOUND RETARDED

AND MULTIDISABILITIES 3 s.h.

An analysis of curriculum and program content for the trainable mentally retarded

ranging from preschool age to adult ages. Directed toward students and teachers

who plan to teach the retarded in public schools, institutional facilities, and/or sheltered

workshops.

EX 564 PRESCHOOL EDUCATION OF THE HANDICAPPED 3 s.h.

Development of intervention strategies, assessment of prescriptive planning for,
and curricular programs for the preschool aged handicapped child from infancy to
five years of age. Prepares needed teachers for preschool programs for the handi-
capped. Satisfies state and federal priorities where the emphasis is being placed for
the education of preschool handicapped.

EX 580 SELECTED PROBLEMS AND RESEARCH 1-3 s.h.

Students will review critically recent developments in the field. Opportunity is af-
forded for independent readings and limited research reports. A student may identi-
fy a topic for subsequent development as his/her thesis or research project.
Prerequisites: EX 631, EX 639, EX 640.

EX 599 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN SPECIAL EDUCATION 1-3 s.h.

Individual students develop research studies in consultation with a faculty mem-
ber. Departmental consent required.

EX 623 CURRICULUM AND METHODS 3 s.h.

Designed to provide an in-depth understanding of current curriculum levels for all
retarded students. Curriculum guides are evaluated and analyzed in relation to pres-
ent and future programs. Some consideration to subject matter at elementary and
secondary levels, relationship between academic subjects and vocational skills; em-
phasis on clinical and diagnostic approach in curriculum design.

EX 625 VOCATIONAL AND CAREER OPPORTUNITIES

FOR THE HANDICAPPED 3 s.h.

Designed to develop competencies in the area of pre-vocational and vocational
education of the handicapped. A review of career and occupational alternatives for
the handicapped, as well as techniques and skills required for obtaining and main-
taining employment.

Programs and Courses — 187
Special Education and Clinical Services

EX 630 ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION OF

PROGRAMS FOR EXCEPTIONAL CHILDREN 3 s.h.

Principles, practices, and problenns of administration and supervision as they re-
late to developing and maintaining special education programs. Criteria are analyzed
for use in evaluation of local programs. Functions of administrators and supervisors
in school systems are compared according to rural, urban, or statewide responsibili-
ties. Prerequisites: EX 623, 640. (Required for administrators and supervisors.)

EX 631 PSYCHOLOGY EXCEPTIONAL CHILDREN AND YOUTH 3 s.h.

Designed as a basic course in the psychosocial and psychoeducational adjustment
of exceptional individuals. Consideration given to general needs and assessment of
all exceptional persons as well as to specific needs of those with unique mental and/or
physical conditions.

EX 632 GUIDANCE AND ADJUSTMENT FOR THE EXCEPTIONAL 3 s.h.

Home, school, and community influences are analyzed in family adjustment to the
presence of an exceptional child. Family reactions are considered in behavioral differ-
ences among children with various degrees of exceptionalities. Emphasis to guidance
skills and knowledge needed by teachers and other professional workers in the field
of exceptionality.

EX 638 PSYCHOLOGY OF THE GIFTED CHILD 3 s.h.

Characteristics of the bright, fast-learning child along with implications for educa-
tion. Emphasis to measurement techniques, motivational factors, and personality
dynamics.

EX 639 PSYCHOLOGY OF THE MENTALLY RETARDED 3 s.h.

Characteristics of the mentally retarded are analyzed with applications for educa-
tional, vocational and personal adjustment. The various levels of mental retardation
are considered in relation to etiology, learning and behavior, development, measure-
ment, social factors, and interpersonal and family relations. Consideration given to
changing outlook and recent trends in the field.

EX 640 DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUES IN SPECIAL EDUCATION 3 s.h

Diagnostic procedures and appropriate test materials are selected for use in as-
sessment of pupils with mental, physical, emotional, and learning disabilities. Ob-
servations and demonstrations, reporting and interpreting results of diagnostic
procedures are integrated with remedial or developmental recommendations in in-
dividuals case studies. Prerequisites: EX 631, EX 639.

EX 641 INTERPRETATION OF RESULTS OF

PSYCHOLOGICAL TESTS 3 s.h.

Results of psychometric tests are analyzed and interpreted. Various standardized
psychological instruments and test batteries are considered in the light of their pur-
pose and usage. Both individual and group test results are examined.

EX 645 COMMUNITY AND AGENCY PLANNING

FOR THE EXCEPTIONAL 3 s.h.

Selected professional, governmental and community organizations are studied for

their contributions to comprehensive planning toward educational, personal-social,

and occupational adjustments. Social, educational, economic, and cultural aspects

are analyzed.

EX 664 CURRICULUM PLANNING FOR THE GIFTED/TALENTED 3 s.h.

Utilization of existing hierarchal presentations to aid with curricular decision-making
by teachers, supervisors, and administrators for the gifted/talented, nursery school
through twelfth grade. Emphasis on four major areas: social studies, mathematics
and science, language arts, and creative arts. Considerations for integrating other
disciplines and for going beyond the scope of the course will be presented. Prereq-
uisite: EX 638 Psychology of the Gifted.

188 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

EX 665 EDUCATION OF CHILDREN WITH SOCIAL AND

EMOTIONAL MALADJUSTMENTS 3 s.h.

Examines reactions of children in the schools who deviate in their emotional or
social behavior. Consideration is given to children who habitually exhibit overcon-
trolled, undercontrolled, or immature reactions. Identification, characteristics, educa-
tional provisions, and preventive measures are emphasized.

EX 666 EDUCATION OF CHILDREN WITH

LEARNING DISABILITIES 3 s.h.

Emphasizes curriculum and remedial instruction for children with special learning
disabilities who exhibit a disorder in one or more of the basic psychological proc-
esses involved in understanding or in using spoken or written language. These may
be manifested in disorders of listening, thinking, talking, reading, writing, spelling,
or in arithmetic.

EX 685 PRACTICUM AND INTERNSHIP 3-9 s.h.

Advanced students are offered guided practicum experiences in selected schools,
residential institutions, clinics, or agencies. Internship or supervised student teach-
ing is planned individually. Students analyze, evaluate, and report on their experiences.

SPEECH - LANGUAGE PATHOLOGY

The Speech - Language Pathology program culminates in either a Mas-
ter of Science or a Master of Education degree. A minimum of 36 s.h. is
required for either degree. The program provides for the completion of the
academic and practicum requirements for the Certificate of Clinical Com-
petence from the American Speech-Language-Hearing Association. Those
students who have not completed an undergraduate major comparable to
that offered by lUP in the discipline may be provisionally admitted and, upon
completion of the deficiencies, may apply for full graduate status. Workshops
are not to be considered applicable for degree requirements. The thesis op-
tion is available with either degree and requires approval of the adviser.

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN SPEECH-LANGUAGE
PATHOLOGY

Candidates for the Master of Education degree will choose nine s.h.
in Professional Development, a Specialization Core of six s.h. (SH 624 and
SH 645), and a minimum of 21 hours of Subject Matter Concentration in-
cluding SH 610, SH 650, SH 661 , SH 662, SH 663, and SH 681 . The course-
work in the Professional Development sequence must receive approval of
the adviser.

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN SPEECH-LANGUAGE
PATHOLOGY

Candidates for the Master of Science degree will select a minimum of
24 s.h. in the Subject Matter Concentration including SH 610, SH 630,
SH 640, SH 650, SH 661 , SH 662, SH 663, and SH 681 . They will also com-
plete three to six s.h. of research and register for one elective (3 s.h.) ap-
proved by the adviser.

Programs and Courses — 189
Speech-Languags- Pathology

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

SH512 CLEFT PALATE 3 s.h.

Problems associated with phenomenon of cleft lip and palate with special empha-
sis in areas of speech, hearing, and language. Included in course will be human em-
bryology; physical remediation; the effects of clefts on structure and function of speech
and hearing mechanism; role of speech correctionist on the cleft palate team.

SH 604 DIAGNOSTIC METHODS 3 s.h.

Evaluation of tests and techniques of diagnosis of speech and language disorders;
interpretation of results and planning appropriate subsequent case management. In-
terviewing techniques appropriate to case history taking. Writing of diagnostic and
case-history reports.

SH 610 ARTICULATION 3 s.h.

Linguistic approach to articulatory process and analysis of misarticulation as symp-
toms of language dysfunction; variables related to articulatory mastery; programmed,
traditional, and sensory-motor methods of modifying articulatory behavior.

SH 614 NEUROPATHOLOGIES OF SPEECH 3 s.h.

Investigation of symptoms and etiologies associated with deviant neural transmis-
sion and muscular contraction. Examination of diagnostic techniques employed in
neuromuscular conditions resulting from palsies, progressive degenerative diseases,
dysarthrias, tumors, and paralytic or paretic involvement. Emphasis on treatment
approaches.

SH616 STUTTERING 3 s.h.

Nature and causes of stuttering. Emphasis on diagnosis and management. Coun-
seling and learning theory application as two main approaches to treatment. Con-
sideration of the person as a stutterer. Review of pertinent and recent research topics.

SH618 VOICE 3 s.h.

Scientific principles of voice production and modification with emphasis on phys-
iology, pathologies, or malfunctioning which produce voice defects; relationship be-
tween disorders of voice and personality; diagnostic and therapeutic considerations
for both organic and psychogenic disorders, including the laryngectomized.

SH 624 PRINCIPLES OF SPEECH-LANGUAGE PATHOLOGY

IN THE SCHOOLS 3 s.h.

Advanced study of legal and social factors affecting service delivery in the public
schools. Models of service delivery for classroom and individual programs. Models
of supervision for staff, paraprofessionals, and trainees.

SH 630 LANGUAGE DISORDERS OF CHILDREN 3 s.h.

Anatomical, physiological, psychological, neurological and environmental factors
related to language delay or disordered language acquisition. An inventory of lan-
guage skills and means of fostering their development or compensating for inade-
quacies; a holistic vs. specific approach to programs of remediation.

SH 631 SEMINAR IN LANGUAGE ACQUISITION 3 s.h.

Advanced study of the processes and sequences of normal language acquisition.
Special emphasis placed upon a comprehensive review of recent theories and re-
search related to cognitive-perceptual and social-pragmatic variables. Trends in lan-
guage acquisition will be studied in relationship to other developmental sequences.

190 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

SH 632 APHASIA 3 s.h.

Consideration of language, speech and related problems resulting from neurolog-
ical insult. Neurological functioning and dysfunctioning will be highlighted. Diagno-
sis and management of persons with aphasia, agnosias, or apraxias will be
emphasized. Role of family in rehabilitation and family counseling.

SH 635 SEMINAR IN COMMUNICATION 1-3 s.h.

Intensive study of one or more areas of speech science, speech and language pathol-
ogy, or audiology. Topics vary to meet the student's needs and interests. Course may
be repeated for credit with a change in area considered. Prerequisite; Speech-
Language Pathology major, admission to degree candidacy, and adviser approval.

SH 640 DIAGNOSTIC AUDIOLOGY 3 s.h.

Identification and description of types of hearing impairment by standard audio-
metric procedures including pure tone, speech, and site of lesion batteries. Testing
of special populations as well as evaluation for fitting of amplification.

SH 645 PEDIATRIC AUDIOLOGY 3 s.h.

Study of audiological procedures used from infancy through adolescence. Special
emphasis on evoked response audiometry, impedance audiometry/tympanometry,
and behavioral procedures in addition to standard audiological procedures. Interpre-
tation of findings on children and its effect upon medical referral, classroom place-
ment, and prosthetic or educational modifications.

SH 650 ADVANCED SPEECH SCIENCE 3 s.h.

Physiologic, acoustic, and perceptual characteristics of speech with special em-
phasis on speech monitoring and controls. Major lab instrumentation and research
techniques in current use are described and demonstrated. Status of present knowl-
edge is summarized and discussed.

SH 661 ADVANCED CLINICAL PRACTICUM I 2-6 s.h.

Supervised practicum experience in the University Speech and Hearing Clinic with
individuals exhibiting speech, language, and/or hearing dysfunction. Planning and
administration of programs of therapy plus interviewing, diagnosing, counseling, and
report writing.

SH 662 DIAGNOSTIC CLINIC 1 s.h.

Supen/ised practicum experience in performing in-depth diagnostic evaluations with
individuals exhibiting any type of speech, hearing, or language dysfunction. Experience
in taking case histories, conferring with parents, and report writing.

SH 663 HEARING TESTING CLINIC 1 s.h.

Supervised practicum experience in performing diagnostic audiological tests.

SH 681 ADVANCED CLINICAL PRACTICUM II 2-6 s.h.

Similar to SH 661: students assume more responsibility, and experience may be
done at approved off-campus sites.

SH 850 THESIS 3 s.h.

Programs arid Courses -191
Speech-Language Pathology
Theater

THEATER

The Theater Department does not offer a graduate degree program.

TH 586 PRACTICUM IN PRODUCTION 1-6 s.h.

An opportunity with academic credit for students to make significant contributions
to campus productions augmenting theater course work in the areas of assistant direct-
ing or directing, stage management, technical direction, sound design, lighting,
costuming, scene design, properties and set decoration, scene building and paint-
ing and make-up design. May be repeated for a maximum of six credits. Prerequi-
site: by permission.

TH 588 SUMMER THEATER WORKSHOP 3-9 s.h.

A practicum offering experience in all major aspects of production by combining
class work with participation in Theater-by-the-Grove, lUP's repertory theater.

X .

Directory - 193

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Texts

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Graduate catalog"

See other formats